THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 ft 0. Bk««* 
 
 sr - V va * 8 
 
 J J •-
 
 ISAAC PITMAN'S 
 
 COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHIC 
 
 INSTRUCTOR.
 
 ISAAC PITMAN'S 
 
 COiAf PLET E P HONOG IUPH1C 
 
 INSTRUCTOR. 
 
 DESIGNED FOR CLASS oil SELF-INSTRUCTION. 
 
 ISAAC! PITMAN, 
 
 (Till: INVENTOR OF PHONOGRAPHY.) 
 AUTHOR OP "THE PHONOGRAPHIC DICTIONARY," "REPORTER'S 
 ASSISTANT," "PHONOGRAPHIC PHRASE BOOK," ETC.; 
 AND EDITOR OP "THE PHONETIC JOURNAL." 
 
 REVISED EDITION. 
 
 x i: \v fork : 
 
 ISAAC PITMAN & SONS. Tm: Phonographic Depot, 
 
 33 Union Square. 
 
 Boston : W. E. Hickox, Pierce Building. 
 
 Canada : Tub Copp, Clare Co., Limited, Toronto. 
 
 1894.
 
 Copyright, 1894, 
 By ISAAC PITMAN. 
 
 Entered according to Act op Congress, in the year 1893, 
 
 By ISAAC PITMAN, 
 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress at Washington 
 
 All tights reserved. 
 
 Copyright in England. 
 
 Press of .T. J. Little & Co 
 Astor Pll it, New Sorb
 
 i 
 
 ►" " Phonography is so exceedingly simple as to be easily learned by :iny- 
 •>•'! one of ordinary capacity; and if it be learned by a very large number of 
 tr» the people, the public benefits to be derived from it are entirely incal- 
 Z3 culable. This art appears to me likely to tend to increase the love of 
 reading and writing and of education generally; and it seems to have 
 sprung up at a time when it wasmost needed."— Bight Hon. John Bright. 
 
 iil 
 
 449486
 
 KEY TO ISAAC PITMAN'S COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHIC 
 INSTRUCTOR. 
 
 This work, contains a Key to all the Exercises, and Answers to the 
 Review Questions. Uniform with the " Instructor.'' 68 pp.. cloth. 
 
 Price, 50 cents.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE system of shorthand writing presented in this 
 work, was first published by the Inventor on t lie 
 15th November, ISoT, under the title of "Stenographic 
 Sound-hand." The second edition appeared on the 10th 
 January, 1840, in the form of an engraved plate with the 
 title of "Phonography, or Writing by Sound, being also 
 A New and Natural System of Shorthand, invented 
 and drawn by Isaac Pitman." In the succeeding half- 
 century, the Inventor lias published a large number of 
 works containing presentations of Phonography, from 
 leaflets and primers to comprehensive treatises dealing 
 with the entire system. 
 
 This work belongs to the latter category, and is 
 designed to furnish, within the compass of a volume of 
 handy size, a complete presentation of Phonography, 
 including all those principles of abbreviation which 
 have caused Pitman's Shorthand to be universally adopted 
 wherever tin- English language prevails, on account of its 
 extreme brevity and legibility. There are also embodied 
 in this volume all those valuable improvements in the 
 system, the results of practical experience in the use of 
 the art. and of careful experiments conducted by the 
 Inventor during the past fifty-five years. The general 
 plan of the "Instructor " makes it equally serviceable 
 for self-tuition and for use under a teacher. Every part 
 of the system is explained in the simplest and clearest
 
 Vlll INTRODUCTION. 
 
 manner possible; each principle is illustrated by exer- 
 cises, and the student's knowledge is tested at succeed- 
 ing stages by questions. In addition to leading the 
 learner by easy steps to the briefest style of Phonography, 
 a large amount of information is included which will 
 familiarize him with a wide range of shorthand work. 
 
 Phonography, as its name implies, is a method of 
 writing by sound, as distinguished from the established 
 orthography of the English language. The accepted 
 mode of spelling is so far removed from any apparent 
 attempt to represent the sounds of speech, that this, its 
 original purpose, has almost ceased to be evident. The 
 common orthography is defective in means for represent- 
 ing several sounds, and the symbols it does employ are 
 used in many contradictory senses. It must be obvious, 
 therefore, that a system of shorthand based on the Eng- 
 lish alphabet must exhibit these imperfections in a 
 marked degree. Phonography (from cpoov?}, phone, voice, 
 and ypaq)?}, gnqihe, writing) is, however, founded on a 
 scientific analysis of vocal sounds, and with its "alpha- 
 bet of nature," the writer is able to record on paper an 
 accurate representation of spoken language. While Isaac 
 Pitman's Shorthand, by its phonetic accuracy and its 
 practical principles of abbreviation, is eminently suited 
 for the professional shorthand writer, it is also especially 
 useful for every description of written communication. 
 It is, indeed, in general employment for the various pur- 
 poses of every-day life, for correspondence, for making 
 notes and extracts, and for composition of all kinds. 
 That, Phonography is admirably adapted for this purpose 
 is apparent from the fact that its simple geometrical 
 forms can, :il the lowest computation, be written with 
 one-sixth of the trouble, and in one-third of the time, 
 Longhand requires. 
 
 The present "uncertain and unscientific mode of 
 \ riling," to quote Professor Max Midler's designation
 
 INTRODUCTION. IX 
 
 of the common spelling, is not the only hindrance to 
 facility in written communication. The characters em- 
 ployed in ordinary writing arc too long and complicated 
 
 to admit of their being written with expedition. In 
 Pitman's Shorthand, the sounds of the English language 
 are represented by the briefest possible signs, and Pho- 
 nography, therefore, furnishes a system of writing by 
 which the operations of the mind and of the hand are 
 brought into close correspondence, and, while capable of 
 being written with the speed of the most rapid distinct 
 articulation, it can be read with the certainty and ease 
 of common longhand. In addition, phonographic manu- 
 script-, are easily read by any person acquainted with 
 the system, and hence the art is extensively employed 
 for letter writing. 
 
 In the United States, where a number of publishers ' 
 have issued the system with slight alterations, 97 per j 
 cent, of the shorthand writers use either Isaac Pitman's 
 Phonography or an American presentation of it. In 
 Great Britain, Pitman's Shorthand is every year more \ 
 extensively taught and practised; it is used by 93 per 
 cent, of newspaper reporters and 98 per cent, of short- 
 hand clerks. The percentage of phonographers in Aus- 
 tralia is 96. Phonography has been adapted to eleven 
 foreign languages. 
 
 The Publishers desire to take this opportunity to ten- 
 der their hearty thanks to the large number of expert 
 writers and teachers of Phonography, who have offered 
 valuable suggestions for the improvement of this work, 
 during its passage through the press.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Part I. taoe 
 
 Directions to the Student 1 
 
 The Alphabet 3 
 
 Table of Consonants 4 
 
 Joined Consonants .... 10 
 
 < It and upward R 12 
 
 Long Vowels 1-1 
 
 Short Vowels 19 
 
 Diphthongs 23 
 
 Grammalogues 25 
 
 Additional Signs for Sand Z 28 
 
 St and St i' loops and Sic circle 34 
 
 7i' and L hooks 38 
 
 Irregular Double Consonants 45 
 
 N and F hooks 49 
 
 - Tioti hook 54 
 
 The Aspirate 58 
 
 Upward and Downward R and L 02 
 
 The Halving Principle 66 
 
 Table of Single and Double Consonants 72 
 
 W and T Series of Diphthongs 73 
 
 Vocalization of PI and Pr Series of Consonants. . 77 
 
 Double-Length Principle 80 
 
 Prefixes 83 
 
 Affixes 8(5 
 
 Additional Methods of Vocalization 89 
 
 List of Grammalogues 92 
 
 Contractions 99 
 
 Phraseography 104 
 
 Punctuat ion 107 
 
 Method of Practice 108 
 
 Shorthand Exercises 110
 
 "art II. page 
 
 Speed Practice 115 
 
 Writing Materials 119 
 
 Phraseography 1 22 
 
 Writing in Position 124 
 
 Reporting Grammalognes 127 
 
 Significant Remarks 132 
 
 Transcription 1 33 
 
 Positive and Negative Words 134 
 
 Omission of Con and Com Prefixes 136 
 
 Intersected Words 138 
 
 The Representation of Figures 140 
 
 List of Reporting Contractions 142 
 
 Compounds of Here, There, and Where 149 
 
 List of General Phraseograms 150 
 
 Business Phrases and Contractions 163 
 
 Business Letters 166 
 
 Law Phrases 170 
 
 Legal Correspondence 174 
 
 Practical Hints in Legal Work 176 
 
 Theological Phrases 193 
 
 Latin Quotations 202 
 
 French Words and Phrases 206 
 
 Words requiring insertion of Vowel 208 
 
 List of Similar Words 209 
 
 Reporting Exercises 214 
 
 Applied Phonography 246 
 
 Typewriting and Shorthand 249 
 
 Index 251
 
 [saac pitman's 
 
 Complete Phonographic 
 
 Instructor. 
 
 part i. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 DIRECTIONS TO THE STUDENT. 
 
 1. The art of Phonography may be easily acquired. 
 Experience has shown that its principles are mastered by 
 most learners in a short time, and that an hour's daily 
 practice in reading and writing, for two or three months, 
 will enable the student to write it with some degree of 
 facility. Speed in writing comes only by practice. 
 
 2. Phonography can be learned, and is learned by thou- 
 sands, from the Instruction Books without the aid of a 
 teacher, and the Text-Books are compiled to meet the 
 requirements of those who cannot obtain the services of 
 a shorthand instructor. But if the student can obtain 
 personal instruction or attend the classes of an efficient 
 teacher, he will acquire a knowledge of the system more 
 rapidly. If any difficulty is experienced in finding a 
 teacher or school, the publishers will be pleased to put
 
 2 DIRECTIONS TO THE STUDENT. 3-4 
 
 the student in communication with one on receipt of a 
 
 stamped and addressed envelope. 
 
 3. Phonography is best written upon ruled paper, and 
 either a pen or a pencil may be used, but in reporting- a 
 pen will be found the most convenient. As, however, 
 the shorthand writer is sometimes so situated that he can- 
 not use a pen, he should accustom himself, at times, to re- 
 port with a pencil. The pen or pencil should be held as 
 for longhand writing, the elbow being turned out, so that 
 the letter \ J> can be struck with ease. The writer must 
 uot let the wrist rest upon the desk or note-book. The 
 bearing of the arm on the edge of the desk should be at 
 the middle of the fore-arm ; this gives the greatest free- 
 dom of movement. The penholder should be held lightly, 
 and the writer should sit in front of the desk, with the 
 paper parallel with the edge of the table. Select a good 
 and suitable pen, smooth paper, and be accurate in 1 lie 
 length and direction of the shorthand letters : the result 
 will be a neat and legible style of writing. The learner 
 should bear in mind that it is not sufficient to know a 
 particular sign or rule, but that the knowledge must be 
 so wrought into the mental constitution by writing the 
 sign, or the shorthand outline, that it can be repeated at 
 any moment. Till a word at once suggests the shorthand 
 form, some delay must necessarily arise before its outline 
 can be placed on the paper ; therefore, no opportunity 
 should he lost of practising Phonography. 
 
 4. The student should bo very careful not to write the 
 shorthand characters rapidly at the outset. When his 
 hand has become accustomed to trace with correctness 
 and elegance the simple geometric forms of the letters, 
 he will find no difficulty in writing them quickly ; but if 
 he lets his anxiety to write FAST overcome his resolution 
 to write WELL, In 1 will not only be longer in at tabling 
 speed, but will always have to lament the illegibility of 
 his writ in 1 '-.
 
 5-7 THE ALPHABET. 3 
 
 5. The secret of success in shorthand is practice. 
 The exercises given in this book should be written and re- 
 written until the pupil is familiar with the form of every 
 word. All the illustrative words in the text should be 
 written in addition to the exercises. At least one hour 
 daily must be given to practice, and this practice should 
 be regular ; one hour daily is much better than two 
 hours every other day. In learning the Alphabet, each 
 letter as it is written should be pronounced aloud, and in 
 subsequent rules, each example or illustrative word should 
 be traced, either with the pen or the finger, as it is read. 
 The pupil is cautioned not to look ahead, or to attempt 
 to read exercises in advance of his knowledge, as such a 
 course is likely to retard his progress. 
 
 (i. From the commencement of his study, the student 
 should keep before his mind the fact that be is learning 
 to write by sound. The ordinary spelling, with its 
 many irregularities and inconsistencies, will afford him 
 little guidance in phonographic notation. At every step 
 he takes in the study of Phonography, the student should 
 exercise his reasoning powers, and accustom himself to 
 make a mental analysis of the consonant and vowel 
 sounds which compose the words he desires to write in 
 shorthand. This will greatly facilitate his progress, and 
 will ensure correct writing. 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 7. Phonography, the invention of Isaac Pitman in 
 18o7, is based upon an analysis of the English spoken lan- 
 guage. Its consonants and vowels arc so arranged as to 
 show, as far as possible, their mutual relations. In the 
 consonants, /, stands first, b } next the rest follow in their 
 natural order : firsl the stopped or explosive letters, pro- 
 ceeding from the lips to the throat ; then the continu- 
 1*
 
 1 
 
 TABLE OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 
 t 
 
 Letter. 
 
 Shorthand 
 Sign. 
 
 Name. 
 
 4s 
 
 in 
 
 P 
 
 \ 
 
 pee 
 
 rope 
 
 post 
 
 
 B 
 
 \ 
 
 bee 
 
 roie 
 
 ioast 
 
 ■2 
 
 T 
 
 | 
 
 tee 
 
 fa/e 
 
 Zip 
 
 u 
 
 §< 
 
 D 
 
 | 
 
 dee 
 
 i'a</e 
 
 </ip 
 
 H* 
 
 CH 
 
 
 chay 
 
 Vtr/i 
 
 <7<est 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 / 
 
 jay 
 
 vd,Ji • 
 
 ,/Vst 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 kay 
 
 leeh 
 
 cane 
 
 V 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 gay 
 
 lea</ue 
 
 grain 
 
 ' 
 
 F 
 
 V 
 
 ef 
 
 sa./i' 
 
 ./at 
 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 vee 
 
 saw 
 
 rat 
 
 ^ 
 
 Til 
 
 ( 
 
 ith 
 
 \viva//d 
 
 ///i.^rh 
 
 c 
 
 TH 
 
 ( 
 
 thee 
 
 wrea^Ae 
 
 ///y 
 
 e 
 
 S 
 
 z 
 
 ) 
 ) 
 
 ess 
 
 Zee 
 
 hiss 
 his 
 
 seal 
 zeal 
 
 
 SH 
 
 J 
 
 isl, 
 
 vicious 
 
 sAe 
 
 
 ZH 
 
 J 
 
 zhee 
 
 vision 
 
 
 ■3/ 
 
 II 
 
 M 
 
 , — s 
 
 cm 
 
 seem 
 
 met 
 
 N 
 
 
 en 
 
 big 
 
 sec;/ 
 In//'/ 
 
 reet 
 
 11 
 
 L 
 
 up 
 
 el 
 
 fa// 
 
 fight 
 
 I 1 
 
 R 
 
 \ •" "1' 
 
 ar 
 
 for 
 
 right 
 
 
 down 
 
 
 
 
 !| 
 
 w 
 
 "1' 
 
 way 
 
 
 IC<-\, 
 
 
 Y 
 
 <<" up 
 
 yay 
 
 
 //I '(, 
 
 Aspirate. 
 
 11 
 
 7 ( r up 
 
 hay 
 
 
 high 
 
 down 
 
 «T,V
 
 8-12 THE ALPHABET. 5 
 
 .nits, in the same order"; and lastly the nasals, liquids, 
 coalescents, and aspirate, us in the Table on the opposite 
 page. 
 
 S. The first, group of eight letters, represented by 
 straight strokes, is called " cxplodents, " because the voice 
 is exploded through organs (the lips, etc.) previously in 
 
 close contact. 
 
 !). The next group of eight is called "continuants," be- 
 cause the breath or voice continues to How through the 
 partially closed organs. 
 
 10. The " nasals" are produced by closing the lips and 
 sending the sound through the nose. The " liquids" flow 
 into union with other letters, and thus make double let- 
 ters or consonantal diphthongs. The "coalescents" pre- 
 cede vowels and coalesce with them. The "aspirate" is 
 a breathing upon the following vowel. 
 
 I 1 . Sixteen only out of t he 1 wenty-four consonants are 
 essentially different. They are p, /, ch, /■; j\ //>, g, *// ; 
 in, n, in/: i, r ; ir, >/ ; h. The articulations in the pairs 
 1 1 and l>, / and il, /'and V, rir., are t hi' same, hut the sound 
 is, so to speak, light in the first, and heavy in the second 
 letter of each pair. The letters of each pair are repre- 
 sented by similar strokes, but that chosen for the second 
 is written thick, instead of thin ; ;is \ ]i, \ h, | t, \ </, 
 \__ f, V_ >\ etc.; and thus, not only is the memory 
 burdened with fewer signs, but the mind perceives that 
 a thin stroke corresponds with a light articulation^ and a 
 thick stroke with a limn/ articulation. Ch and /are double 
 consonants, formed by the union of ,, sh, and </, ,://, as 
 may be heard in fetch, cheap ; edge, jet. Hence in the 
 alphabet they follow t, */, their first elements. Through- 
 out this hook whatever relates to the light consonants, 
 relates also to the correspond inn' heavy letters. 
 
 12. The consonants should he written about one-sixth 
 of an inch long, as in these pages. Care should Ik; taken 
 to form the curved thick letters, when standing alone.
 
 6 THE ALPHABET. 13-17 
 
 thus V. 0, ) -• If made heavy throughout they look 
 clumsy : they should be thick in the middle only, and 
 taper off at each end, except when joined to a thick Id- 
 ler, as \ r. g. 
 
 13. All the exercises that follow must be carefully writ- 
 ten out, the narru of each shorthand letter being pronounced 
 aloud as it is written. The pupil must always call the 
 consonants by their phonetic names : thus, "ch " is to be 
 named chay, not see aitch; " g" gay, natjee; "ng" ing, 
 not enjee. 
 
 14. Horizontal letters are written from left to right on the 
 line. 
 
 15. Perpendicular letters are written downward, resting 
 on the line. 
 
 16. Sloping letters are written downward, except upward 
 ?', w, p, and upward h, which are written upward, from 
 the line. The letters p, h, i\ v, sh, zh, I, and downward r, 
 are written at an angle of 45 degrees from the horizontal: 
 ch, /', and downward h, are written at an angle of GO 
 degrees; and upward r, w, y, upward //, 30 degrees. The 
 letter ( /, when standing alone, is written upward, and 
 
 J sh, downward. 
 
 17. If the pupil cannot produce a fair copy of the letters 
 in Exercise 1 at the first trial, he should write the page 
 several times, and vary the practice by writing the letters 
 in irregular order ; thus, 
 
 \ I / ~ '
 
 exercise on consonants^ 
 
 Exercise: 1. 
 i To be written by the student.) 
 
 V,B \ \ \ \ 
 
 \\ 
 
 T.I> M M II II M 
 
 1 1 
 
 OH, J [down] // // // // 
 
 // 
 
 K, G 
 
 
 
 F.V V\ V.V. ^ C.V. 
 
 W 
 
 TH, TH ( < ( ( ( ( ( < 
 
 (( 
 
 S.Z ) ) ) ) ) > ) ) 
 
 )) 
 
 sn,7.nJJ J J J J J J 
 
 JJ 
 
 LCupir rrrrrrrr 
 
 R [down] ^ ~^\ ~^ [up] y 
 
 W[np] </ a^ tS* €/' tS c/ o^ </ 
 
 r[up] s S S <s s S <y <y 
 
 H [down] 1111 [up] <S^ <s^ *^ y
 
 EXERCISE OX CONSONANTS. 
 
 18-19 
 
 18. As the letters of the Shorthand Alphabet, with the 
 exception of ^ ^ "J ^ arc straight lines and seg- 
 ments or parts of a circle, the following Diagrams will 
 assist, in fixing them in the pupil's mind. He should 
 cop}- the Diagrams, and write the letters in longhand 
 close to the shorthand forms. The student will learn in 
 a subsequent lesson that the thick character s-^ [there 
 being no heavy simple sound corresponding with ^—S\ is 
 used to represent the double consonant mp or ////', and 
 r the double consonant //•. 
 
 ^™ \fc_ ^ \W 
 
 19. To remember tlie strokes for tli and 8, note that ) 
 is the curve on the right side of jA and that I and r 
 form the /eft and right sides of an arch ft\ 
 
 EXEKCISE 2. 
 
 Copy the slwrthand letters and write the longhand letter 
 afU r each. 
 
 i. \* \», i i / . — c/ «- ; *- 
 
 2. ^ \ ^ | \ . - | ^ , , _ / _ 
 
 3. ' . v ( ( ) ) j j _ _ ^ r ~\ 
 
 4. ^ _ r v. ( w ) ~ ( J v_ j ) 
 
 5. \ ( - _ / r ^ ) i j ) i « 
 
 e. \ _ ; v_ ^ /.-_,- ^ ,- - i 
 
 s. i — i _ \ / \ / ; ^ ^ ^ /
 
 EXF.RCISE ON CONSONANTS. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Write the longhand letters, and plact the shorthand letter 
 after each. In thin and subsequent Exercises, ifu letter 
 ( named '•////." is represented by lt th;" and ( named 
 " thee," by " th." 
 
 1. t, ell, b, g, (1, p, h (down), lit;', s, ///, in, y, n, 1, r (down). 
 
 2. tli, z, r (up), sli, j. k, 1", \v, li (up), zh, v, l>, t, k, d, f, w. 
 
 3. j, z, v, s, in, r (up), 1, h (down), p, n, cli, g, ///, z, th, sh. 
 
 4. tli, r (down), g, th, v, in, cli, y, j, t, l>, a, d, zh, sh, p. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. Into how many groups of consonants is the alphabet 
 
 of Phonography divided ? Name them. 
 
 2. Give some words in which the following sounds oc- 
 
 cur : — ith, thee; hay, gay; inn/, //hi/ ; chay, jay. 
 
 3. Explain the terms " liquid " and •'continuant." 
 
 4. How is the upward /• distinguished from ch .' 
 
 5. Give the rules for writing horizontal, perpendicular, 
 
 and sloping letters.
 
 10 
 
 JOINED CONSONANTS. 
 
 20-2:; 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 JOINED CONSONANTS. 
 
 20. Whkn consonants arc joined, they should be writ- 
 ten without lifting the pen, the second letter beginning 
 where the first ends and so on ; thus, 
 
 L_uoti_ v_ v_. y r\ v r\ l o 
 
 tk, fm, pk, tl, It, pi, Ip, ak, I ah. 
 
 21. Consonants when joined are written in the same 
 direction as when standing alone, up strokes being always 
 written upward, and down strokes downward ; thus, 
 
 I //// not ^— J . L and 8k, however, when joined to other 
 letters, may be written cither upward or downward; thus, 
 
 £ 
 
 c ^v X 
 
 r 
 
 I in, Im, Ik, Ik, shf, ah tn, ah I, hi, Ing. 
 
 22. The first of t wo descending letters should rest, on 
 the line ; 1 1ms, 
 
 I tch, / rht, .\. pt, ./... chp, .V. ft, -> pth. 
 
 23. When a straight stroke is repeated there must be 
 no break between the two letters; thus, 
 
 vv/ / 
 
 pp, bb, ch <■/,,)), hie, gg, td, kg, bp t <//.
 
 24-27 JOINED CONSONANTS. 
 
 24. A curved consonant is repeated thus, 
 
 II 
 
 mm, nn, //, ff, 88, /•/•. 
 
 25. The lirsi of two ascending letters should start from 
 i lie line ; thus, 
 
 yr, 
 
 //, Ir, rl. 
 
 26. A horizontal letter followed by a descending letter 
 is written above the line, so that the down-stroke rests 
 on the line; thus, 
 
 .ZL11- J__ "Z\...2^..r\.. 
 
 gt, mf, ii ch, hp, mr, nb. 
 
 27. A horizontal letter followed by an ascending letter 
 
 is written on the line ; thus, 
 
 inr. iii/r, hi, //•, ,'//, km. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Write iln longhand letters <ni>t place ///.' shorthand /lifers 
 after each. 
 
 1. p t, p k, (I ///, p sh, b th, p 1; t p, I k, t th, t m. 
 
 2. ch p, ch k, cli 1, ch in, eh n ; k p, k t, k th, k sh, k m. 
 :'.. f p, I' eli, I' th, f m, f ,i, f 1; /// ch, th k, th f, th m. 
 
 4. s p, s k, s 1, s in, s n ; sh p, sh k, sh f, sh in. 
 
 5. in p, in k, in I', in ///, in n, in 1; n ]), n t, n ch, n k. 
 (3. n f, n ///, n sh, n m; 1 p, 1 ch, 1 k, 1 f, 1 in; w p. w 1. 
 7. }> p, t t, ch ch, k k, f f, s s, 1 1, in in, n n, r r. 
 
 S. 1' in 1, d ///, m n d, f 1 ng, y r k, in n /// 1, r v 1, t 1 in, j k b.
 
 12 
 
 AND TPWARIl 
 
 28-29 
 
 CH and UPWARD 11. 
 
 28. The upward r is distinguished from eh as fol- 
 lows: — r is written upwards, and eh downwards. When 
 r and ch stand alone, r slopes a little from the hori- 
 zontal, and ch a little from the perpendicular; thus, 
 
 " r, / eh. The stroke naturally takes these slopes 
 when struck by the hand upward and downward re- 
 spectively. 
 
 29. When r and ch are joined to other letters, they arc 
 distinguished by the direction of the stroke, and the 
 amount of slope is of no consequence; thus, 
 
 1 
 
 L A 
 
 m ch, /•//, ch n, /•/. ch t, pr, p ch, mr. 
 
 Exercise 5. — R and CM Combinations. 
 
 > 
 
 1. \ peh, \ypr, A n^ j V 1 L 
 
 2. A /I ^ 1 -/ / N^ 
 
 3. ^ v ^ S f 
 
 4. 4 > ^ S^ Vs <~s 
 
 5. x. ^ ^ r^ r\ -v r 
 
 6. / "V X ^ ^ ^
 
 13 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How are joined consonants written? 
 
 2. Show by examples how I and sh arc written when 
 
 joined. 
 :!. What is the position of the first of two descending 
 
 strokes? 
 ■1. How are straight strokes repeated? Give examples. 
 
 5. Where does the first of two ascending strokes begin? 
 
 6, Show how a horizontal letter is written when followed 
 
 by a descending letter, and when followed by an 
 
 ascending letter. 
 ', . State the distinction between ch and upward /' when 
 
 standing alone. 
 8. How are ch and /■ distinguished when joined to other 
 
 consonants?
 
 14 LONG VOWELS. 30-31 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 LONG VOWELS. 
 
 30. There are six simple long vowels in the English 
 Language, namely, — 
 
 All, EH, EE ; AW, OH, 00, 
 
 as heard in the words 
 Alms, Ale, Eel; All, Oak, <><>/.<•. 
 
 31. The first three are represented in Phonography by 
 a heavy dot placed at the beginning, middle, or end of a 
 consonant ; and the last three by a short, heavy stroke in 
 the same positions. These dots ami dashes are written 
 close to, but not touching the stroke consonant ; llins, 
 
 Ah, Eh, Ee, Aw, oh, 60. 
 
 They are here placed against the phonographic Letter i 
 in order to indicate their position as first place, second 
 place, and third place vowels. They should all he pro- 
 nounced as single sounds; thus, ah as in alms [not a-aitch] ; 
 eh (a) as in ape; ee as in eel; <nr as in awe [not a-doublt 
 you] ; oh as in owe ; 00 as in ooze. The long vowels may 
 lie remembered by repeating the following sentence: — 
 
 Half pay he thought bo poor. 
 
 n/i, i/t } ee, aw, oh, <>o.
 
 32-33 places of the vowels. 15 
 
 Places of the Vowels. 
 
 32. When a vowel is placed on the left-hand side of a 
 perpendicular or sloping consonant, it is read before the 
 consonant; and when placed on the right-hand side, it is 
 read after the consonant. A vowel placed above a hori- 
 zontal letter, is read before the consonant, and when 
 placed under, is read after the consonant. The vowels 
 are written at the side of the consonant, in three places— 
 at the beginning, middle, ami end; the beginning of the 
 consonant, whether written upward or downward, being 
 the place of the first vowel-sign ah or <ar. Thus, when 
 the letter I is written upward, the vowel places are 
 reckoned upward ; as, f ale, (' eel. Vowels placed at 
 the beginning of a consonant, as ah and aw, are called 
 first-plact vowels; in the middle, as eh and oh, second- 
 place vowels; and at the end, as ee and oo, third-plaa 
 vowels. Their places are indicated in the following Dia- 
 grams by the figures 1, '2 and 3. 
 
 A VOWEL BEFORE A consonant. 
 p t sh I k 
 
 k 2 i 3 y r 
 
 (down) (up) 
 
 Si 
 
 I 2 3 
 
 A vowel AFTER A CONSONANT. 
 p t sh I h 
 
 (down) (up) 
 33. The vowel dots and strokes musl he written at a 
 
 little distance from the consonant. If allowed to touch 
 (except in a few cases which will he mentioned hereafter), 
 they would occasion mistakes. A stroke-vowel may be
 
 10 WRITING PHONETICALLY. 34 
 
 written at any angle that is distinct ; thus, y_ orV_ foe : 
 /•. or /\ Joe. 
 
 34. The English alphabet is deficient in letters to rep- 
 resent the sounds of the language. For instance, it has 
 no single letter to represent the first consonant sound in 
 think, shoe. Neither do the twenty-six letters of the 
 common alphabet always represent the same sounds. 
 Thus, a is used for six different sounds in maker, father, 
 man, many, trull, want. The student must, therefore, 
 write words by the shorthand signs representing the 
 sou ml* of which the words are composed, without regard 
 to the common spelling. In transcribing into shorthand 
 the longhand words at the end of Exercise 6, the student 
 should, before putting pen to paper, ask himself what are 
 the elementary sounds heard in each word, and then 
 write each by its shorthand sign. In the word though, 
 for instance, he will notice that the sounds heard are 
 lh,, and oh. These are what he has to write, and not the 
 letters tee-aitch-oh-you-jee-aitch, the ordinary way of rep- 
 resenting the word. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Wiih flu longhand <r<>nl after the shorthand, as in line 1. 
 
 1. "I did, ^ aim, • eke, ~\ oat, I ought, j are, ( ale, 
 
 2. "^ air, '\ oar, — .1 -a- C _!_ 'I \) "^ 
 
 3.-1 / ^ -( *r X X ./ .) ") 
 
 4. |" day, tn may, \, \~ ' f' — r > \ 
 
 s. (- c- c r r )- i i y t 
 
 6. J ... « ~- .-- \ / <-• -r > 
 
 7. Dough J- gay—- she, eel, pea, ease, knee, gnaw, day. 
 
 8. Oak, chew, ache, ought, loo, hoe \h down], show. 
 
 9. Awed, ail, law, though, baa, Shaw, beau, owed, Joe, foe. 
 
 10. Know, each, mow, maw, ye, jaw, nay, law, yea, bee, fee.
 
 35-30 
 
 PLATES OF THE EON(i VOWELS. 
 
 17 
 
 A LONG VdWKI, BETWEEN TWO CONSONANTS. 
 
 35. PlRST and SECOND-PLACE Long vowels arc written 
 after the first consonant; as |__ talk, not d . talk; 
 
 I gate, not 'I gate ; /' rake, not / rake. 
 
 36. THIRD-PLACE vowels are written he/ore. the second 
 
 consonant ; as I • team, not V—. team; \ teach, not ]• 
 teach. '' ' 
 
 LONG VOWELS' PLACES. 
 
 y> 
 
 Exercise 7— Long Vowels. 
 
 Write the longhand word after the shorthand, as in tine 1. 
 
 1. t-» tome, \ — ■• &eff&, / Paul, \ code, \ mure. 
 
 2 . V NT NT 
 
 3. V "^ < 
 
 4. \ A ^ ^ 
 
 ^ << - 1 
 
 7. ' x 
 
 ^ P K k fl 
 
 > 3 
 
 s ^ 

 
 18 LONG TOWELS. 
 
 ].\i.i;< tsE 8 — Long Vowels. 
 
 In this and subsequent Exercises, the pupil is directed by 
 ,i small capital letter when to write the letters L and r 
 downward. 
 
 1. Palm (p ah m; lis not pronounced), balm, calm. 
 
 'I. Shape, shame, faith, bathe, make, fade, date, rage; 
 
 :!. Beecl), cheap, Liege, thief, feed, beam, theme, neap. 
 
 I. Hawk i write // down), laud, tall, talk (t air &), ball. 
 5. Poach, coach, both, comb (koh m), toll, foam, coal, joke. 
 (i. Boom, doom, food, move, tomb, poop, tooth, cool. 
 
 ;. Peep, paid, paii;, babe, bake, teach, taue; dome,dooR. 
 
 S. Chalk, choke; jail, jeei; ; keyed, coite ; game, gone. 
 
 II. Folk, fame, fool., fail;; vague, vote. veai. ; thieve, 
 lit. Shawl (sh and / upward), shone, zeal; maim, name. 
 
 11. Shoal, lothe, loi;c; wrote, rogue, wreathe, ream. 
 
 12. Weep, weed, ware ; yawi,, yore ; heed, heap, hope (h tip). 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How many long vowels are there.' 
 
 2. By what signs are they represented? 
 :;. Name them in their order. 
 
 I. Explain the terms first, second, and third-place vowels. 
 5. Give examples of each. 
 
 (i. What al'e the places or positions of vowels ah, ah, 
 • '■>. ill, iiir, a .' 
 
 7. Write the characters for p and /, and show the vowel 
 places before and after them. 
 
 S. What are Hie respective positions of first, second, and 
 third place vowels between the following con- 
 sonants: 1 
 
 L N I V \ S
 
 ;; :;s 
 
 siiokt VOWELS. 
 
 19 
 
 ClIAI'TKlt IV. 
 
 SHORT V (> W E LS. 
 
 37. Besides the six long vowels already explained, there 
 :ire six corresponding short vowel sounds in the English 
 language. There are the vowel sounds heard iapat, pet, 
 /nt; not, nut, foot. In producing these sounds, the posi- 
 tions of the vocal organs are nearly the same us in utter- 
 ing the long vowels in palm, pate, peat; nought, note, 
 food; the chief difference being that the short vowels are 
 more rapidly pronounced. 
 
 The short sound of ah in palm is a (say (ih quickly) in pal. 
 The short sound of eh in pate is e (say eh quickly) in pet. 
 The short sound of ee iii peat is i (say ,, quickly) in pit. 
 The short sound of aw in nought is o (say aw quickly) in not. 
 The short sound of oh in note is nearly u (wA) in nut. 
 The short sound of 00 in /ood (say ooquickly) is o"> in foot. 
 By drawling a word containing a short vowel, the corresponding long 
 vowel will be heard. ( 'ompare pick, peek ; COt, Caught. 
 
 08. The short vowels are represented by dots and short 
 strokes, similar to those employed for the long vowels, 
 hut made light to indicate their short sound, thus: — 
 
 Son/id 
 
 Sound 
 
 Sign 
 
 ■t thai 
 
 e pen 
 
 Sign 
 
 ii"t 
 
 u m/M-ii -i 
 
 1 10 gooil 
 
 The order of the short vowels may be remembered by saying: 
 
 Tln/t p< 11 is not ni'/eh good.
 
 20 SHORT VOWELS. 30-41 
 
 39. [nstead of calling these short vowel sounds short "//. 
 short eh, short ee, etc., it is better to give them nanus by 
 adding the consonant / to them; thus, at, et, it, ot, ut, dot, 
 in the same manner as the; consonant sounds are named 
 by placing a vowel either before or after them; thus, ''f,' 1 
 if; "m," em; li \t"pee; "v,"«ee. 
 
 40. In order to gain familiarity with the short vowels 
 and their powers, the student should pronounce them in 
 connection with other letters of the alphabet: thus, 
 
 ,// (i U af ut oSt ad <il i'l ml ml odd 
 
 and so on with other letters. When he has done this, he 
 should contrast each short vowel with its corresponding 
 long vowel ; thus, 
 
 iihl ni, eht 1 1, ut it, iilul ad, Jul <</. ml ill, 
 
 uirl nt, n/il ///, dot mil, uiril ml. nlnl ml, ,'iml odd. 
 
 11. A- a result of this practice, many common words 
 will be made, as in the following examples: — 
 
 ul, J 1 1 sit, I mill, ^ am, ^ Ann. 
 
 \ ebb, / etch, egg, / edge, f ell. 
 
 | it, itch, if, | mill, ■ ,,n, ) as. 
 
 i or, ^ of, up, -) us. ( ,11, '■ off.
 
 42-44 
 
 PLACKS UK TIIK SHORT VOWELS. 
 
 31 
 
 A SHORT VOWEL BETWEEN TWO CONSONANTS. 
 
 4'3. FlBST and THIRD-PLACE short vowels arc written in 
 the same position as their corresponding long vowels; as 
 
 | tack, I , lick, \^ ]"']', \. }>h>, { rock, / rook. 
 
 43. Second-place short vowels are written before the 
 second consonant; as I get, / wreck, instead of after 
 llu first consonant, as is the case with second-place long 
 vowels, as ^\ gate, /• rake. 
 
 44. Compare the places of second-place long and short 
 vowels in the following diagrams and words: — 
 
 LONG VOWELS' PLACES. 
 
 2 3 
 
 $ i 2 ' i 2 
 
 SHORT VOWELS' PLACES. 
 
 9. 
 
 r\ lad, (• 
 /\ wrought, 
 
 2N 
 
 lade 
 
 9 3 
 
 ^] led, .] lead, 
 
 rot, Xj wrote, /s\ rut, 
 
 2 3 
 
 /I lid 
 
 /\ rinh . 
 
 > 
 
 Exercise 9— Short Vowels. 
 \at, I J : . w /\ l_ \_ 
 \ ebb, f I / — \_ V Z - " 8 " v_^- 
 
 .1* / r \r I \ \ = 
 
 
 
 J - 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 ~] 
 
 6. V^ bull, 
 
 L',>,> ->^V>
 
 SHORT TOWELS. 
 
 Exercise 9 — (continued) . 
 
 Exicrcise 10. 
 
 1. Bag, tap, .Tuck, pad, bat, hack, pap, cap, cab, chap. 
 '.'. Peck, beg, beck, leg, dell, keg, debt, gem, jet, deck. 
 3. Dig, tick, pig, big, pith, bill, tip. ditch, chip, lil», dip. 
 1. Mock, knock, rob, pod, dot, dock, top, Tom. 
 ■V Tuck, pup, butt, dug, duck, dumb, tub, jug, gum. 
 (i. Bull, book, look, took, cook, nook, rook, pull, fui.i,. 
 
 Review, 
 
 1. How many short vowels are there ? 
 
 2. How do the short vowels differ From the lone- vowels '. 
 :i. Give the sounds of the six short vowels followed by 
 
 the consonant /. 
 1. Give the Bigns by which they are represented. 
 ."i. How do tbe signs of the short vowels differ from those 
 
 of tin' long vowels ? 
 <"). What are the minus of the all Ol' I vowels ? 
 
 7. Give .-i\ words illustrating the powers of the short 
 
 vowels. 
 
 8. What is the position of a first-place short vowel be- 
 
 tween two consonants? A second place short 
 vowel '. A third-place short vowel '.
 
 I") -47 DIPHTDONGS. 23 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 45. The double vowels, or diphthongs, heard in the 
 words ice, owl, boy, are represented by small angular 
 marks, u in due by a small curve, and the triphthong wi, 
 as heard in wife, by a small right angle; thus, 
 
 I vi my. OW a! now. 01 | oil. 
 
 U ! new. WI l : /ri<\e. 
 "I : 
 
 40. The pen must not he lilted in writing any of these 
 diphthongs. In vocalizing words, 7, w, and wi are written 
 in the first, second, or third place as may he convenient ; 
 U is written in the third position, and oi in the first. 
 
 47. In writing Exercise 11, the pupil should blend each 
 diphthong with the consonant against which it is placed. 
 It' this be done, the words will be easily recognized; 
 
 thus, 
 
 \ h? (by or buy), ( v fcbi (thigh), \ bow (bough) 
 f \ owh (out), \ p« (pew), i fir (your), | wid 
 (wide), \ boi (boy), | toi (toy).
 
 24 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 48 
 
 48. Learners sometimes cod fuse the diphthong j 1 with 
 
 the short vowel j i, and the diphthong j u witli the 
 
 short vowel _ i u, and i ow with the Ion"- vowel -i oh. 
 ! a! ° i 
 
 Contrast the following pairs of words: — 
 
 N. bite, \ bit; X\ right, | «vv7 ; /chide, / chid; 
 
 Uduhe, li duck': ,) »se. -) its; - now, — / know. 
 
 1 \v V 
 
 2 J, ^ 
 
 5 \ V" 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 Iv (v C 
 
 
 C r r y v 
 
 r r - J r 
 
 4 
 
 7 „) (^ r a 
 
 8 b i 4 v/ f 
 
 S 
 
 
 EXEKCISE 12. 
 
 1. Bite, Bite, cuhe, uow, voyage, buy, coy, wife, duke, lie. 
 
 '^. Tube, write, voweL, fury, cow, toil, cune, boil. 
 
 :i. Your, oil, mighty, few, review, gout, rye, boy, dupe. 
 
 1. Thou, loud, like, thigh, mew, pie, pouch, out, view. 
 
 5, Tithe, tunic, beguile, luite, mutiny, assume. 
 
 <>. FailuRe, feud, curacy, cubic, juicy, duly, piracy.
 
 49-50 
 
 ORAMMAI.OIifES. 
 
 25 
 
 GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 49. With (wo exceptions, (and, he,) every frequently 
 occurring word in the English language, such as a, the, 
 
 of, to, is expressed in Phonography by one of its let- 
 ters. These words are called Grammalogues, or letter- 
 words, and the shorthand signs that represent them are 
 called Logograms or word-letters. Thus, each word in 
 line 1 is represented by the shorthand letter or vowel 
 under it in line 2, which letter or vowel forms part of 
 the word when written in full, as in line 3. 
 
 1. Grammalogues. Oj\ in, be, it, 
 
 2. Logograms. \ 
 
 3. Words in full. \_ \- I 
 
 no, me, 
 
 them. 
 ( 
 
 u 
 
 50. Grammalogues are generally written on the line. 
 Sometimes they are written above or through the line, 
 as in the words in, our. The following arc some of 
 the most frequently occurring Grammalogues ; they 
 should be committed to memory by copying them several 
 times. The words marked (') are written above the line; 
 words marked ('■') through the line; the others rest on the 
 line. And and should are written upward, and who 
 downward. 
 
 a or an{ x ) 
 
 V have 
 
 on?) 
 
 w tli ing 
 
 all?) 
 
 i he 
 
 -y?. our( s ) 
 
 ( think- 
 
 ' and?) 
 
 ^- are 
 
 \ bt 
 
 , but 
 
 him 
 
 TV) 
 in?) 
 
 ! it 
 
 .\..pn/C) 
 J shall 
 
 y shoe lil 
 
 to 
 ) waa 
 which 
 
 can?) 
 
 me?) 
 
 . tin 
 
 , who 
 
 __ give or given 
 
 </(') 
 
 ( them 
 
 ~ 11""
 
 2(? 
 
 GltAMMALOGUES. 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 1. You and I can think of a thing. 2. It was our all, 
 but shall it be given to him '. 3. Who can it be ? 4. Which 
 can you have '. ■"">. Should he be in it ? 6. Was the thing 
 given to them \ 7. Are you to have it \ s. Can you give it 
 to him ? 9. Can you think of all he should have ? 10. Put 
 it to him. 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 {The full stop is represented by <i small cross ; thus, x). 
 
 i J — -*T J w ^ ^^ ' 7 ^ ? 
 Shall we now go out in our new boat and catch fish ? 
 
 2 "v% i- v r ' y s \j v ^ \* 
 
 s L - ( ' -a ? ^ ^ v^ r , I- - 
 
 4 J - ~ • ^ ' • ^ 
 
 5 ^ „ n ^ 
 
 6 .7 ) | \ 
 
 7 . ^ Vs. - 
 
 - Z_ . -a 
 
 i«» / V t < 
 
 II )_ / - 
 
 L2 .. / 
 
 
 ) 
 
 \ ; v 
 
 c 
 
 
 I x ' 
 
 1 ■ >■ 
 
 I LU- 
 
 v| 
 
 / L )-*
 
 REVIEW. 27 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How man; diphthongs :iru there? 
 
 2 Give their sounds. 
 
 ;>. How may ?, ow, and wi be written as to place ? 
 
 4. State the position for oi and ?7. 
 
 5. What is a grammalogue ? Give some examples. 
 G. How arc logograms generally written '. 
 
 7. In what directions are the logograms <///</, who, and 
 
 should written ? 
 
 8. Givo examples of logograms written above, on, and 
 
 through the line.
 
 28 ADDITIONAL SIGN FOR "s" AND " Z." 51-52 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 ADDITIONAL SIGN FOR £ AND Z. 
 
 51. 5 (together with its heavy sound s, for which s is gen- 
 erally written) is the most frequent letter in the English 
 language with one exception, (r). In Phonography s is 
 represented, in addition to the stroke \, by :i small circle 
 [o], which is very convenient for joining one letter to 
 another. When joined to straight letters, it is written 
 on the right side of downst rokes, and <>n the upper side 
 of horizontal and upstrokes; thus. 
 
 \ sj), \ st, I seh, sk, . -' sr, o_ ksh\ 
 \c pa, I ts, i eh s, o /-.v. y? rs, I tst. 
 
 By means of this Circle 8, three letters can l>e written 
 nearly as quicklj as t WO. 
 
 52. W I nil the circle n is joined to curves, it is written 
 inside tlir curve; as, ^_ sf, Vo fa, r ) 88, ^~ f . i ms, s_p n8, 
 t s/, { Is, ' s nli, .. ) xh .v, 0~~b s?ns, ^-p-s dish), 
 
 /^' is/, \ /nsr, ,■ ' /'si, o>« man, >— nam, 
 
 Va_ fs/:. , tsn.
 
 53-54 
 
 ADDITIONAL SIGN FOR "s" AM) " Z." 
 
 20 
 
 53. Between two straight lines forming an angle, the 
 
 circles is written on the outside of the angle; thus, ~ [ hst, 
 
 54. 8 is made double-sized for s*, and named .sr.sor scs ; 
 thus, \o ps, xD pss, ^S^ nssr. 
 
 EXEBCISE 15. 
 
 i. \\ r r r r *_ ^ • • 
 
 2. <L <L C C °) °) J J , ^ ^ r "N w 
 
 3. \, I / _^ ^ cS S I hs (down) , hs (up) 
 
 4. ^> ^3 (, (, J } J J ^~t> -£>N-P/a 
 
 s. L j_ v- -f — ^ V- A U ^ 
 
 7. VI '^V ^ ^ M. V. -T ^ Vs 
 
 8. v* ^r° ^ ,) n ou oi -t, n 
 
 9. No No b , 6 iD^Vo^or '^^^ ^ 
 
 io. ^p ^ Np f ^\ - VL I \)i^/
 
 30 VOCALIZATION OF "s" OR " z." 55-50 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 1. sk, si', si, sd, s tli, sg, sin, aw, sn, st, sr, s n»', s sh, sj. 
 
 •J. ks, cli s, t's, ins, js, lis (up), sh s, vs, ys, gs, l'S, ss, ts, th s. 
 
 '■). sks, sbs, sfs, sds, sms, psch, ch sn, msks, ns ng. 
 
 4. (Large circle ss) nsst, suss, blnss, klnss, knss, pssv. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OP WORDS CONTAINING CIRCLE 8 on Z. 
 
 55. The circle s cannot he vocalized, that is, vowels can- 
 not be written to it. Vowels arc invariably written and 
 read according to their position to the consonant against 
 which they are placed, and not with reference to the 
 circle; thus, 
 
 x I 1 / _!_ ^ r \ ~ • 
 
 up, "/, ought, age, "<'/•, aim, ill, pay, may, ray, 
 
 \ f t •/ *■_ ^ c No ^ J 
 
 stir), sat, sought, sage, soak, same, sill, pace, mace, race. 
 
 The circle 8 at the beginning of a word is always read 
 first, ami at the end of a word last; thus, 1 sack, | not 
 ask]; \, pay8,\ • speak, ^ — o makes. 
 
 "ill. The BTROKE 8 Or •:• is used — . 
 
 i-m When .v is tin- only consonant in a word, as ) saw, 
 \ s, , : ami in derivatives, as ) ,' saw mill. 
 
 i/m When a word begins with a vowel immediately 
 
 followed by 8, as J ask, I espy, ) assume, i add,
 
 :>] 58 LOCALIZATION OF "s" OR ''/." 31 
 
 (c) When a word ends with a vowel immediately 
 
 preceded by a or z, as - ) mercy, \ /»/*//, <" / A'.://. 
 
 (</) When initial 8 is followed by two vowels, as 
 X-^ Siam, \_,, science, f sciatica ; or when final s 
 is preceded by two vowels in difiEerent positions ; as 
 ( joyous, I'y tortuous. [See 57 ('■.)] 
 
 (e) When a word begins with s, as \/ zero, y zeal, 
 ) o- zigzag, 
 
 (/") When a word begins with s, followed by a vowel 
 and 8 or e / as )_ cease, i society, X saucer, J^ season. 
 
 57. The CIRCLE 8 is used — 
 
 (a) When s begins a word, and only one vowel 
 occurs between it and the next stroke consonant ; as, 
 
 /\8oap, I said, L — '-^ sum. 
 
 (1>) When « or s occurs medially ; as .— ° — cash, 
 s~^' misery. 
 
 (c) When 8 or : ends a word, and <>nly one vowel 
 occurs between it and the preceding consonant ; as 
 ['i/iii/s, [ joys [contrast / joys with / joyous]. 
 
 c 
 
 58. The large circle represents 88 or sz only when 
 medial or final. This large circle may be supposed to 
 contain the second-place short vowel, and thus to repre- 
 sent 8es, sez, zes, or zez; thus: y (ses) necessity; 
 
 \o («''■") passes; o (zes) possessive; r~° (zez) causes. 
 Other vowels may be expressed by placing the vowel-sign 
 within the circle ; thus, | exist (eksist), ' exhaust, 
 
 •^<f exercise, q^J) census.
 
 32 
 
 EXERCISES ON CIRCLE "s" AND " Z.' 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 
 s. 
 
 u. 
 Ml. 
 I I. 
 
 EXKKCISE 17. 
 
 o 
 Gramrualoisrues as, has ,■ o is, his. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 Soap, soup, spy, stay, slow, seed, sawed, siege, sage. 
 Sake, seek, safe, sieve, SOOthe, size, Sam, psalm, sown. 
 Sign. soon, snow, sale, soul, seal, slow, slew,soaR,seaR. 
 Oaks, gaze, goose, face, thaws, shows, alms, mace. 
 Neighs, Dose, niece, awls, lace, laws, eaits, rose, rare. 
 Opposite, upset, opossum, passage, pacify, beset. 
 
 Beseech, bes , task, tacit, extensive, dusty, design. 
 
 Dismay.chas ten, cask, excite, oxide, oxen, gasp, gusty. 
 Physic, vista, visit, inside, answer, music, wasp, hasp. 
 A.sk, Esk, ash, espy, Ezra, essence, fussy, mercy. 
 Paces, races, faces, chases, necessity, science, assizes.
 
 33 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. On which side of a straight stroke is the circle a 
 
 written? 
 
 2. On which side of curves? 
 
 ;!. How is t lie circle a written between two straight 
 strokes? 
 
 4. J low between curves? 
 
 5. When a vowel is written before a straight stroke 
 
 beginning with the circle s, which is read first? 
 G. When is the stroke a employed ? Enumerate the 
 case-. 
 
 7. When is the stroke g employed? 
 
 8. When is the circle s employed initially? When 
 
 finally? 
 !». What is the limitation to the use of the large circle aa ? 
 10. What grammalogues are represented by the circle «?
 
 34 -- st" and "str" loops, and "sw" circle. 59-63 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 ST AX I) STM LOOPS, AND SW CIRCLE. 
 
 59. The frequently occurring combinations st initial, and 
 st and zd final, are represented by a loop made one-half 
 the length of the stroke to which it is attached. It is 
 written on the right side of straight strokes, above hori- 
 zontals, and on the inside of curves, in the same way as 
 the circle s; thus, *\ st-]>, \> p-st or p-zd ; f st-t, { t-st 
 or t-sd : V st-f, K^ f-st or f-zd. 
 
 60. As with the circle s, the loop st when written at the 
 beginning of a word is always read first, and at the end 
 of a word last. A vowel cannot be placed to the st 
 loop, bnl must be written and read with reference to the 
 stroke against which it b placed : thus, *| aid, -f staid, 
 
 \ pay, Xi paste, p^ cost, ^ caused, ^^ amassed, 
 
 *v*> amazed, ■.' raced or raised, \ enticed-. 
 
 61. The loop st is employed medially when convenient ; 
 
 thus. I, testify, /. , justify, V vestry. 
 
 62. A large final loop, extending two-thirds of the length 
 
 of the stroke to which it is attached, and written on the 
 
 same side of the consonant as the circle g and the loop ••-/. 
 
 represents str; thus, \> pastor, -^ master, ; c monster. 
 
 This loop is not used imti ILLY, but may be used 
 Mini ILLY. 
 
 68. ' s may be added to a final loop, or to the large circle 
 
 .-.v, by continuing the stroke of the loop or circle ; thus. 
 ^ lis/.\ [ <iust,rs. _,_ro gamesters, ^S exercises.
 
 (i 1-67 INITIAL " s\v *' CIECLE. 35 
 
 04. The st loop is generally used initially when a word 
 commences with st followed by a vowel and one or more 
 consonants; as, f steel, stupid. 
 
 li."). A vowel cannot be read before an initial circle or 
 loop, or altera final circle or loop; thus, ^v pasty [not H^] 
 
 musty | not • , |, l^p honest, v ' r y honesty. (See also 
 paragraph 55. 1 
 
 66. The loop st cannot be used if a vowel occurs be- 
 tween s and / .• thus, I satire. 
 
 Initial SW Circle (named sway). 
 
 67. The double consonant sw, when occurring initially, 
 is represented by a large circle on the same side of 
 consonants as the circle s ,• thus, ^ sweep, p sweet, 
 c swim, °*\ sware, CX' soiree. Sw, not joined to 
 
 another consonant, is written e as . sway. 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 1. <r ■ si cam *~*? mist or missed ^ ^ If 
 
 2. V I / <- - V Sll "^ sf c 
 
 3. ^ <* ^ > ■ K f r< \ x 
 
 4. v_^o <Ti ^ ^ j" ^ ^o L I b~ 
 
 III w 
 
 e. d- [^ r^ ^ w r ^ ^ ^ 
 t. t> ^ t- ^ -A- 'h -P -P cL 
 8. <T 5^ o> <*\ <i .P a- °^ Q>
 
 <36 exercises on " st," "str," and " sw." 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 1. Steam, step, steep, stoop, stab, statue, statute, staid. 
 
 •2. Stitch, stag, stake, stork, staff, stiff, stave, stem. 
 
 :!. Stall, stool, staue, stoite, steeu, starry, story. 
 
 I. Best, boast, taste, dust, chest, jest, laced, faced. 
 
 5. Const, ghost, kissed, feast, vast, lost, most, must. 
 
 6. Nests, vests, lasts, rests ; boaster, jester, muster. 
 
 7. Foster, duster, lustre, roaster ; pastors, masters. 
 
 8. SwoRe, swell, swelling, swathe, swig, swoop, switch. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 l.^^o.S,^ 2 . . ^ /• r° x 
 s. ). . r^ ^, c ° - ^ ' ^ ~ . v ^ 
 
 <;. . cL a^ . f r~ V J ' '^ N ). * 
 
 7. CTN . \>« 1.6 t^^ \ . ^_P \ X> x 
 
 s. ' V" w . r »r n h ' f ^ ^ ii ■ 
 
 io. o L, i- ) , " l { . *\_^ 
 
 u. • ^ v ~ )_ i^ l, s L' r ■ . i_* 
 i2.f i\ Lt, ^.^ r ,0 ^°. r 
 
 *-( * is. (; «^» ^-s L^ . I" v . I" ^ *
 
 37 
 
 Review. 
 
 1 . I low is the loop st written ? 
 
 2. W'lu'ii may the loop st l>e written in the middle of a 
 
 word ? Give some examples. 
 
 :;. How is str represented? Is the str loop used 
 initially ? 
 
 4. How may a final 8 be added to these loops ? 
 
 5. How is initial 8W represented? 
 
 (i. How is xtr written when not joined to another con- 
 sonant ? 
 
 7. Write some words illustrating the rule that a vowel 
 
 cannot be read before an initial, or after a final 
 circle, or loop. 
 
 8. Give several words in which the sw circle is employed. 
 
 449486
 
 38 INITIAL " R " AM> " L " HOOKS. G8-71 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 A AND L HOOKS. 
 
 08. The Liquids r and / arc often found following and 
 closely united or blended with other letters, forming a 
 consonantal diphthong : as in the words //row. y//ough, 
 drink, <//are. fry,Jly, douWe, maker, etc. In pronouncing 
 these words, the combination of the /• or I with the pre- 
 ceding consonant is uttered by a single effort of the 
 organs of speech. These consonant combinations are 
 represented in Phonography by adding an initial hook 
 to the simple letters to indicate their union with a fol- 
 lowing /' or I. 
 
 INITIAL Hook ADDING A' AND L TO STRAIGHT LETTERS. 
 
 (ill. A small hook prefixed to the left side of descending 
 
 Straight consonants, and UNDER horizontal ones, adds /■ ; 
 thus, 
 
 w n ; ; c-c- 
 
 pr, br; tr, dr; chr, jr; kr, gr. 
 
 TO. A small hook prefixed to the right side of straight 
 descending consonants, and to the upper side of hori- 
 zontal ones, adds / / thus, 
 
 w r r r r <^^_ 
 
 pi, bl; tl, dl; rhl, jl; kl, gl. 
 
 71. These honked letters should be considered as sylla- 
 ble-, and named accordingly; thus, \ should be called 
 
 per as heard at the end of paper, and not /-<< <</■. which is 
 written ^
 
 INITIAL " H AM) " I. 
 
 39 
 
 72. The following mnemonic aids will be useful for re- 
 membering the />/■ and />/ series of consonants. 
 
 7:5. If the Zeft hand be held up, with the first finger 
 bent, the outline of tl will he seen ; and if the /iMght 
 hand be held up, in the same way, the outline of tr will 
 he seen. By turning the hand round to the following 
 positions, all the straight double consonants of the j>l 
 and />/■ series will be formed by the first linger. 
 
 74. As an additional mnemonic, it may be observed 
 that a circle may be struck by turning the hand to the 
 Sight, as the hands of a watch move ; or, in the opposite 
 direction, by turning the hand to the Zeft. Circles and 
 hooks may accordingly be described as " right " or " left." 
 It will be noticed that the motion which makes a " right " 
 circle, forms the /■ hook, and the motion that makes a 
 " /eft " circle forms the / hook. The hook is turned to 
 the /light for /•, and to the Zeft for I. 
 
 75. These double consonants are vocalized like the single 
 ones ; thus, °\ pray, \ v apply, -] utter, \ tree ; and 
 are used initially, medially, and finally ; as, N plead, 
 "X/' prairie, V . replica, n^ library, /\ rip/'/'. 
 
 76. The letter r is not hooked for rr or /•/, as the charac- 
 ters and are employed for /r and y. 
 
 77. The /*/' and /// series of consonants are generally 
 employed as follows: — 
 
 (") Initially in words that contain no vowel between 
 the two consonants; as. \ pray, \ play. 
 
 (A) Medially and finally when they make a syllable; as, 
 ^>T ri-drr-less, \^ pa-per, \ bea-dle.
 
 40 INITIAL HOOK ADDING "R" AND " L." 78-7!) 
 
 78. In writing the following exercise, call the combina- 
 tions by their single names, and the words will then be 
 
 easily recognized; thus, °\ per-eh (pray), <— : ee-gel 
 [eagh i. 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 1. \ pray, K. pry, \s brew, | adder, ,__: eager,*\ play. 
 
 2. f 1 1- 1" U \_ V- ~\ \ 
 
 '• \ j ) v ^' ley ^ V V 
 
 ..\V,( V-i ^\ ^r ^ Y 
 
 -^ — ^S \ { K } ^ 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 1. Prow, upper, tray, cider, dry, drew, pauper, knocker. 
 
 2. Apple, plea, people, pupil, brew, breath, broom, bring. 
 ::. Fibre, robber, blow, table, double, battle, fiddle. 
 
 1. Uncle, clean, pickle, globe, bugle, Peter, crumble. 
 
 5. (Iiass. adder, drop, leader, preacher. 
 
 G. Trap, block, beggar, oblige, bless, butter, prison. 
 
 Initial Hook adding Ji and L to ( i rves. 
 
 7'.). As a CURVE cannot receive a hook on both sides of 
 the stroke (for such characters as \_ could not be 
 written accurately and quickly), and as the /•compounds 
 are much more fre<|Uent than the / compounds, a small 
 hook prefixed to a CURVE On the only available side (the 
 
 inside) adds /• ; thus, 
 
 V_ /. /A, ^ m, - — v, 
 
 when written with a small initial hook, become 
 
 V_ Jr. ( tltr, c -. utr, > ur.
 
 "-II 82 INITIAL hook ADDING "R" AND i- L." 41 
 
 80. The sign -_• following this rule would represent 
 the souud ",'/-/', as in singer. There arc, however, so few 
 words in which ng is followed by r, that this hooked out- 
 line is used to represent the frequently occurring sounds 
 of ikj-iji- and ng-kr, as heard in \^ finger, ( " linger 
 ^-^f^ monger, \_^ banker, I tinker, ^_^ clinker. Singer 
 and wringer must be written in full, thus, *"^ /^"^ 
 
 81. As the stroke 8 hooked thus *) , is not required for 
 sr, (the circle s joined to the upward or downward /• 
 
 a^ °^\ sr being more serviceable), and as the down- 
 ward r, hooked for rr °^ would be almost useless, the 
 two forms ^ *) are used for fr, lltr. and their heavy 
 strokes ^ ) for vr, thr, as EXTRA skins. The con- 
 sonant /"" is not hooked for r or I. The following curves 
 are hooked for /• : — 
 
 V^ V^ C ) C) J J 
 
 fr, vr ; Mr, thr ; shr, zhr. 
 <r-* mr, c^ nr, <^ ng-gr or ng-kr. 
 
 82. The duplicate forms ^ °\ V^ ( ') ( *) are * 
 used thus : — In words that contain no other consonant 
 
 stroke, the left curves V ^ C ( ari: USed when U VOWC - 
 p recede s ; as, '^_ offer, £ ether, V every, ^ affray; and 
 the right curves *^\ °^ *) ") are employed when no 
 vowe l precedes ; as, °A. V fry, )- throw, ) through. When 
 another consonant conies before or after, select that form 
 of fr, VT, thr, thr, which is most convenient for join- 
 ing; as, J diver, ^\ rover, ^-^ — Frank, ) gather.
 
 42 INITIAL HOOK ADDING " R "' AND " L." 83 
 
 If both forms are equally convenient, ^ ; should be 
 preferred, as agreeing with the 7i' series of straight 
 letters ; thus, "^n proffer, N> plover, K tetker, ^*\ bother, 
 r N\ Arthur. 
 
 s:'>. /. is added to the curved letters /, /•. sh, in, n, 
 by a large initial hook ; thus, \ baffle, V evil, 
 i J commercial, •—c/ initial, — c- camel, ^-, funnel. 
 
 Exekcise 24. 
 
 1^ ' v author, )- thro-iti, ) three, \ free, 'V_ offer- 
 
 ^ L ^ ^ b > ^ ^ 
 
 /^ ^y ^_y ^_ ^ ^ ^ v ^ 
 
 '^ S \ ") c V *S_ v. ^" 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 
 Flap, trifle, either, other, through, fry, Same, Friday. 
 
 Finger, banker, hopeful, dinner, Sock, funnel, banner. 
 .; Manner, thrust, oilier, frame, favor, leather, Anthur. 
 I. Mother, father, brother, evil, freak, fluency, Irian. 
 
 Fisher, adverse, eternity, burglan, bugle k, winner. 
 
 Ai;i;i\al, rather, rightful, Loafer, owners.
 
 EXERCISES ON INITIAL IK >< >Ks. 43 
 
 EXERCISE 26. 
 GUAMMALOGOES caU, = — COTS, | (Z«W, ? . for, 
 
 < ^\J'n>'n, i ///'/-. ///"/•', t_^ near, ^ //"/', 
 
 v ) //// //• or ///m, ^ eery. 
 
 1 S, 
 
 i v ■ /f v ^ v N r V ; 
 
 "^ o v ''""" ' ^-. V ( V V ^ • " ^~ 
 
 -( ^ ^ s "'* 3 . V o , ) o ' 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 1. The calmer ;i river appeals, the deeper it is sm id to How. 
 
 2. Honor thy father and mothe r ; love thy brother and 
 
 neighbor. 
 
 3. The Holy Hible should he youi: teacher; apply to it for 
 
 true wisdom. 
 •1. Try to spe^k the truth I pray you. and do no evil. 
 . r t. After the labor of the (lay. gather pleasure from leisure.
 
 44 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. Give examples of words containing a double consonant 
 
 formed by the combination of r or 2 with the preced- 
 ing letter. 
 
 2. How are these combinations represented ? 
 
 3. By what means is the pupil assisted in remembering 
 
 these hooks I 
 
 4. In what cases are the^r, pi series used ? 
 
 5. What does a small hook prefixed to a curved letter 
 
 represent ? 
 G. Write the two forms of /'/•, n: thr, thr. 
 
 7. When should the fr, vr, thr, thr, right-hand curves 
 
 be used, and when the left-hand curves? 
 
 8. What does a large hook prefixed to a curve represent ? 
 
 9. How are the double consonants pi, <pr, etc., to be 
 
 named ?
 
 84-85 
 
 IRREGULAR DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 45 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 IRREGULAR DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 
 Name. Power. 
 
 up 
 
 WII c^ whay as in whew 
 KW c hway " quick 
 
 GW ( j/"""// " anguish 
 
 MP / 
 
 Mil j 
 
 i nip 
 
 i i/lh 
 
 j, j empire 
 / < • ///A:i 1 1 ii 
 
 lr r 
 
 .Wo//* . 
 
 /rr 05 in 
 
 /'mil r. 
 
 ieeler 
 
 wl r 
 
 wel " 
 
 wail 
 
 up 
 
 WHL 6 
 
 //•//< / • ■ 
 
 whale 
 
 84. The double letters, except wl and whl are vocalized 
 like the /</ and pr series of consonants ; thus, <; % - whey, 
 
 f" quail, 5\ acquire, [^ tramp, (X^S — ^ languor, 
 
 feelers. The double consonant ^^ 
 
 "> 
 
 when hooked becomes mpr or rribr ; as. /^ hamper, 
 
 ^^ dumber. 
 
 y-"). Vowels placed to "/ and //■/// are read before or 
 after the f l„- tlius, (f well, '( wail, ( weal, 
 
 C (. wealthy, c woolly, 'X while, <', whale, (j\ whelp. 
 If a vowel occurs before | he w, write the full outline ; t hus, 
 ^f awhile. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 
 OS -^ c^ c/~ A 0"f 
 
 I. 
 
 2. r r 
 
 3. I— X-n 
 
 * 3 ^ ^ > > 
 
 4. Whisk, qualm, anguish, lamp, ambush [sh down]. 
 
 5. Feeler, well, wall, wool, woolly, while, wheel, "Willie. 
 
 6. Whether, quick, damp, nailer, equip, wile.
 
 46 circles and loops preceding a hook. 86-92 
 
 Circles and Loops preceding a Hook. 
 
 86. 8 is joined to hooked consonants thus, Xy supply, 
 ■[ settle, f saddle, <a_j sickle, x. suffer, v. civil, 
 csk summer, <s_> sinner, V passover, (^> peaceful, 
 
 I decipher. 
 
 87. From the y/' scries of straight double consonants, 
 a scries of treble consonants is formed by making the 
 hook into ;i circle ; thus, °\ spr, \ sbr ; *] sir, ^ ••«//•,• 
 a — skr, o — "'jr. [The forms ) <^ not being required in 
 this -erics are used for h. j 
 
 88. The treble consonants are used initially thus, 
 °X spray, }^-< supreme, \ straw, T_y strike, \ setter, 
 
 ^^^ scrape, <,— ^ seeh r. 
 
 89. When one of the/ or r hooked letters follows the 
 circle g medially, the hook is shown thus, extra, 
 /§ reciter, ' lisper, c^ whisper, \ explode, 
 
 I registry ; but when following a straight stroke 
 in THE BAME DIRECTION, ii is not necessary to show 
 the r hook ; thus, \ prosper, ' *■ .-- corkscrew. In 
 some cases the hook \w.\\ be omitted ; thus, \ \ sub- 
 
 scribe, %, superscribe. When the hook cannot clearly 
 
 be shown, write the separate letters ; thus " \ sensible, 
 [not \ sensible. ] 
 
 90. After / and d, the circle is written on the righl 
 
 aide to express skr, sgr; thus, | tasker, \-r> disgrace. 
 
 91. The s7 loop may be prefixed to the initial ///series 
 of letters ; thus. ' ' stopper, \ stutter, .' stoker. 
 
 92. 8Wis prefixed to the pr Beries thus, °\. sweeper, 
 
 U r, ■ Htrilrher, - — sirnggt >•.
 
 EXERCISES ON I tRCLES AND LOOPS. 
 
 47 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 L <\ % <\ V °V \- V^ *\ 
 
 2. T 1- .1 1* U ^ ^ U ^ 
 
 3 . ^ V V , t _r ' T /• — -^ 
 
 4. Ak \ U * -^ .? <N ->- — 
 
 V ^ \ L \ ^ i 
 
 Exeki ISE 30. 
 
 1. Supper, sapper, Cyprus, sprinkle, springe, sobriety. 
 
 2. Stress, strange, distrust, struggle, stripe, strong, cider. 
 
 3. Screw, scrap, scrimmage, scribble, scraper, scrivener. 
 
 4. Supply, sable, sidle. Miller, sooner, squabble, squall. 
 
 5. Possibly, squib, squine, sober, saddleR, designer. 
 
 ('). Sacred, scream, scrub, scruple, squane, cipher, sinner. 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 i ' ^ 'Ml ' ' f~ V . -~ N \ ' V, 
 
 ' r" 1 * 2, ni/ )" ,^. jf Ml, 
 
 r\ ^ /\ x t ./ ; <n s~ ■ ^ x • 
 
 v n . ■ - » ° (vr" t Y ' °-~ s J
 
 48 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 Exercisc 31 (continued.) 
 
 ' 1a o ij %s* s . ^ * 5,rj) f u 
 
 L, 
 
 Review, 
 
 1. Hive a list of the irregular double consonants, and 
 
 write words in winch they occur, vocalizing the 
 examples. 
 
 2. How is a joined to a hooked consonant, initially and 
 
 medially ? 
 
 :;. Give the scries of treble consonants formed by the 
 addition of 8 to the pr series of straight double con- 
 sonants, and the rules for their employment. 
 
 ■1. How are the / or r hooked letters written when follow- 
 ing 1 he circle s medially ? 
 
 ■"). How is sw prefixed to the pr series '. Give examples. 
 
 (i. Give examples of the st loop prefixed t<> the pr series 
 
 of letters.
 
 93-97 " n " axu "r" BOOKS. 49 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 N AND F HOOKS. 
 !);;. .V following :i stkaiciit letter is expressed l>y a 
 
 small final llOOK on the LEFT-HAND side of ;i down-stroke, 
 ami on the ONDER side of a horizontal or U[)-stroke ; 
 thus, 
 
 \ pain, J" lone, (/ chain, -^ cane, v turn, </? win. 
 
 HI. The // hook is written on the ENSIDE of all CURVES ; 
 
 thus, , ; shine, ^j feign, , 'lean, %_? fcnown, ^ mine. 
 
 95. For V, following a stkaioiit letter, is expressed by 
 
 a small hook mi the kioiit hand side of a downstroke, 
 
 and on the DPPER side of a horizontal or upstroke ; 
 
 thus, \» pf, [ lj\ / chf, _o If, ^ rf </> If; as in 
 
 X G puff, L~ tough, *\f proof, if turf [. art ire, 
 
 ■ [, native, [. motive, (\-^> lithograph/ T here is no 
 
 for v hook to curves. \ \- 
 
 tilt. The// and f hooks can be used medially, provided 
 a good angle is obtained ; thus, ,^> French, \ profit, 
 
 \ fancy, f agent, /^~- ransom, u David, s chiefly, 
 
 \ travel, r—> </roj>hie. {, i divine. 
 
 !i?. cf shl, J) shn, when written upward ; and ( } ( //,-when 
 written downward, must never stand ALONE, for it might 
 be supposed that^., had been written downward, and 
 4 

 
 56 *~' "n" and "f" hooks. 98 
 
 C upward. These letters are distinct when joined to 
 others; as, <_, '^" shilling, V-y official, \y Ly partial. 
 
 98. A final hook should be used only when it repre- 
 sents the last sound in a word ; as, ^, men, 3 cough; 
 
 but when a word ends with n or f followed by a vowel, 
 these consonants must be written by the stroke letters; 
 thus, ,-v^i many, ' ^ coffee. 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 i. ^ x ^ n j. j, j l j- j r 3- 
 
 2. \ i" /' V V ^ } I * ^ ^ 
 
 3. e^? o^> ^ cf **> /f s* 9 *? ^ *? 
 4.^ ks ^4, <"s> ^, ^ vjj> . ^ /<" ^ 
 5. \ \*« J. LjS «/ Zjf -" — -i "P — ^ 
 
 , v ^ r [. .- -v. -> ^v n. % 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 1. Pain, plain, pun, blown, brain, deign, train. 
 
 2. Tone, chin, bean, crown, cone, join, cam', grain, glean. 
 :!. Fine, vine, even, thine, nine, ocean, lane. 
 
 I. Puff, proof, beef, brief, Mull', rough, trough, deaf. 
 ."). ('hale, chaff, calf, cough, cave, cliff, grief, grave, reef. 
 
 (i. Hoof, huff, waif, turf, tariff, drive, derive, roof. 
 
 7. Bone, bony; spoon, sj ay; puff, puffy; Jane, Jenny. 
 
 8. Cone, coney; gun, agony; fan, Fanny; vain, avenue. 
 
 9. Man, many, manna, money; rave, review ; rain, rainy. 
 
 in. Buff, bevy; nine, ninny; pansy, iitouy, renew.
 
 99 108 CIRCLE "s" AND ••!•''■ AND "n" HOOKS. 51 
 
 Circle S added to .V and F Hooks. 
 
 99. S or z is added to the final hook of a straight let- 
 ter thus, 
 
 \ J J _ y° ./> <r x - \ ( . ." ^ ^ 
 
 pns, ins, chns, kns, rns, wne, 1ms: pfs, tfs, chfs, kfs, it's, wfs, hfs; 
 
 as in \ pains, r torn*, /• chains, ; — coins, ^° once, 
 X puffs, \f doves, _s coughs, , ? waves. 
 
 LOO. The na circle enlarged, becomes resa?; thus, 
 J- tenses, ! dances, • chances, ) glances. 
 
 101. S is added to the n hook after a curve, I »y making 
 a small circle or loop inside the hook; thus, Vs feigns, 
 
 V.. '''//*x, .',-, mines, ■^~s> nouns, f* lanes, « turns/" 
 
 102. Between two consonants the circle represents s 
 only; thus, ^jj-^ is not />»*-, ,, but p-S-m. 
 
 103. Thest, *</• loops may be combined with the final n 
 hook after straight letters; thus, \ bounced, J chanced, 
 
 <^, chiius, ,1, -_ against, ' , /nnixter, \b punsters, 
 VN,- spinsters. 
 
 ♦ The two methods "f writing a final ZVS after a i urved consonant 
 arc utilized thus: When the Bound is /'.\ / use the hook «; and when 
 the sound is ENS (anst , < nsi , inse,' or «/<<y, - net , inct ) use the stroke n; 
 thus, write fans, fines, rims, man's, thanes, Athens, assigns, shuns, 
 Romans, men's, moans, moons, mines, nouns, pronouns, with the hook n 
 and a small circle at the end of it; and write fence, affiance, I. ■ Vance, 
 tin in-, , essence, omniscience, mince, immense, romance, pronounce, per- 
 manence, with the stroke*! followed by ihe circles. The only exception 
 to this rule is. the upward / after another i onsonant, which is written 
 with a hook and 8 either for , m oi
 
 32 EXERCISES OX FINAL "n" AXD "f" HOOKS. 
 
 Exekcise 34. 
 
 1. Pence, beans, tunes, plains, spoons, brains, blains. 
 
 2. Fines, feigns, means, noun-, lanes, lines, eauns. 
 
 3. Dove-, chiefs, cuffs, calves, caves, gloves,waves,serves. 
 
 4. Pounees, prances, bounces, dances, chances, glances. 
 
 5. Instances, distances, trances, cleanses, princes. 
 
 6. Lances, offences, balances, romances, excellences. 
 
 7. Danced, chanced, pounced, dispensed, spinster.
 
 53 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How is the letter n expressed when it ends a word ? 
 
 2, I low is 8 or .: added to the it hook '. 
 
 ;!. What does a double-sized m circle represent ? 
 
 4. How is s or z added to the n hook following a curve '. 
 
 5. How is $8 written after n following a curve ? 
 
 G. When may the //, hook be used medially ? Give 
 examples. 
 
 7. How are the st and sir loops combined with the n 
 
 hook ? 
 
 8. How is a vowel after a letter with the // hook read ? 
 
 9. How is fox » expressed (a) when following a straight 
 
 letter, (b) when following a curve '. 
 
 10. How is s joined to the f or B hook ? 
 
 11. Which form of /"or /• is used when a vowel follows ?
 
 54 "-TION " HOOK. 104-108 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 TION HOOK. 
 
 104. The termination -tion, also variously written sion, 
 -dan, -tian, -sian, which ends over 2,000 English words, 
 is expressed in Phonography by a huge liii aliiojjk ; thus, 
 '\) option, \j edition, Kj fashion, ^ mission, ^ version, 
 
 \P Persian, -~p nations, [$ additions. 
 
 105. When -//«// hook follows a CURVE, it is written 
 on the INNER side, like the final n hook; thus, Vj vision. 
 
 10(5. After a STRAIGHT letter which begins with a hook, 
 circle, or loop, or springs from a curve, the -tion hook is 
 written on the OPPOSITE side, to preserve; the straight- 
 ness of the letter; thus. ' \} oppression, x .j suppression, 
 
 y c T2 circulation, J- station, J- citation, a _ section, , ? se- 
 cretion, u -5> execution, V ■ affection, i selection, 
 
 \j at t /-it i"/i. 
 
 107. After /, //, or /', not beginning with a hook, circle, 
 
 or loop, the -lion hook is written mi the RIGHT side; 
 
 thus, I , dictation, "{'j i<>iiiti<in, I — i degradation, 
 (^ magician. 
 
 His. W'lien -tion follows :i simple straight letter, the 
 hook is written on the side opposite to that on which
 
 ' \s\\_ krrK 
 
 109-113 , "-tion" 1K.0K. 55 
 
 the vowel (or accented vowel, if there is more than 
 one) occurs; thus, \ passion, /N v> option, ]_D occasion, 
 
 —^ action, \_ diction, \s> education, / \jt operation, 
 \Z* portion. This shows where the vowel, if omitted, 
 is to be read. 
 
 109. When two distinct vowel signs occur immediately 
 before -tion, write sh and the hook n ; thus {j^ valua- 
 tion, Ms-, extenuation, b tuition, t situation. 
 
 110. The -tion hook is used medially, as y addi- 
 tional, I ■ / dictionary, ~\ auctioneer, _5 cautionary, 
 —/' actionary, -\f actionable, V\ fashionable, 
 ^--^affectionate, '\S optional. 
 
 111. When -fo'ow follows the circle s or ?w, it is ex- 
 pressed by continuing the circle on the other side of 
 the consonant; thus, \> possession, \> position, ^ de- 
 cision, Vg,. physician, -—^ accession, c -^c acquisition, 
 
 \s& authorisation, JL dispensation, J, transition. 
 
 112. This back hook is vocalized thus: — With down- 
 strokes, write the vowel-sign on the left, or before tin* 
 
 hook, for a second -place vowel ; and on the right, or AFTER 
 
 it, for a third-place vowel. With horizontal and up 
 Strokes write it ABOVE for a second-place vowel, and 
 BELOW for a third-place vowel. The tirst-place vowel, 
 ah or 3, does not occur in any English word between 8 
 and the syllable -tion. 
 
 113. The circle 8 may be added to this hook; thus. 
 \> positions, -\, suppositions, -„s musicians; and the 
 hook may be used medially; thus, V positional, 
 
 J/ transitional.
 
 56 exercise ox the " -tion " hook. 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 1 . y> A/K ' 1789 ) . ^ x y r-^ ' 
 
 . /*" ^ % ') s • 'U> N A k^ ^ . 
 
 ^ x . /sy*' M- 2 " <-"/ \/> N . \^ 
 
 v ^> ) ^ ^ . 'V? '\s --,; W ' 
 
 ^ \ r \ . ^ ' v '^ L ^; ^ 
 ' J ^ ^; r- "^^ Er"~". ^; 
 
 /* s <-*> ' . v> s ^ r, ^ rl \ 
 
 ° -> N IP* 8. J* (, ^~ " % N /' 
 
 4 • i^ • r \- r , . ^ . _ w> ' ^ ^V 
 
 ( ^ N • -" J , % ' fc x ^ '■
 
 EXERCISE ON THE "-TION" HOOK. 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 1. Fashion, mission, motion, notion, nation, oRation, lotion, 
 
 evasion, vision, fusion, elation, solution, delusion, donation, 
 mention, invasion, dimension, nomination, invention, pen- 
 sion, relation, cremation, salvation, evolution, infusion, col- 
 lision, veneration, provision, pollution, ammunition, reserva- 
 tion, intimation, revelation 
 
 'J Suppression, attrition, Grecian, abrasion, suction, equa- 
 tion, accretion, secretion, expression, selection, location, 
 faction, fiction, vocation, vacation, approbation, illustration, 
 emigration ; addition, imitation, exhortation, deputation, 
 vegetation. 
 
 ;!. Option, potion, passion, auction, caution, cushion, ap- 
 parition, education, diction, duration, Egyptian, implication, 
 aberrat ion, appor! ion, coercion. 
 
 4. Evacuation attenuation, intuition : missionary, op- 
 tional, visionary, illusionary, occasional, educational, sec- 
 tional : passions, stations, relations, occupations, explana- 
 tions, gradations, divisions. 
 
 5. Possession, precision, procession, requisition, disquisi- 
 tion, inquisition, incision, authorization, sensation, evangel- 
 ization, cessation, transition; suppositions, accusations, 
 pulsations; positional,, transitional. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How is the termination -tion expressed ? 
 
 'i. How is the -tion hook written when following a curve ? 
 
 :!. How after a straight letter beginning with a hook. 
 
 circle or loop, or springing from a curve ? 
 t. How is the -tion hook written after t, d, or j .' 
 5. How is the hook written in other cases \ 
 (I. How is -tion written when two vowel signs occur 
 
 before it '. Write accentuation. 
 
 7. Give examples of the -tion hook used medially. 
 
 8. How is -tion expressed when following the circle .•>• 
 
 or n& .' 
 
 9. How far can this hook he vocalized \
 
 58 THE ASPIRATE. 114-119 
 
 CHAPTEE XII. 
 
 THE ASPIRATE. 
 
 114. H is represented in Phonography in four ways: — 
 (a) stroke h, written downward , (b) a tick (an abbrevia- 
 tion of the downward h) ; (<■) stroke //, written upward ; 
 and [<h a dot; thus, 
 
 il5. (a) By the character / written downward, in words 
 containing no other consonant than // ; as, /• hay, 
 f v high, and when h is followed by /■ or g ; as Zl hawk, 
 L hag. 
 
 11(1. {!/) By a Tick slanting downward to the left (aeon- 
 traction of ' by writing only the lower half of the sign) 
 before upward /, downward /•, stroke s, e, and m, ////* .- 
 thus, »/"" In///, f hail, f~ heel, y^~ hill, f whole, 
 
 <^ howl; ;, here, ^\ her, A hair, ^\ hoar, '^ horse; 
 j hiss, ) haze, t hum, h- hem, ■ hymn, <^ hemp. 
 It is written thus, r" hi, ■ hm ; [not / hi, v-> hm.\ 
 
 117. (c) By the character written upward, when 
 
 followed by all other consonants, and also when fol- 
 lowed by /and r with a vowel following ; as, tf*\ hope, 
 <f\ Jiaughty, $1 hatch, <f\* heavy, /y, heathen, 
 <s^ honetj, ,rf^ Henry ; <z * hallow, ,_ holly, e» holy; 
 <i^' Harry, ' Horace, ' luzggle, 5 c Hooker. 
 
 lis. 1,/ 1 r,\ a Dor before the \ owel sign ; thus. happy, 
 I had, ' hath, /" uphill, \ perhaps, J manhood, 
 
 I. handy. 
 
 ll'.i. The stroke //, when following another consonant, 
 must be so joined thai the upward h cannot be read as 
 
 8T, nor the downward // as sch; as. \ abhor, | not 
 
 \c^ abhor, 1 "Z M'tijlitii-, [not ;, Mayhew.] The ex-
 
 120-124 THE ASPIRATE. 50 
 
 amples given in the foot-note* show how to join // to 
 c\ w\ ni lii ir consonant. 
 
 120. The four curved consonants before which I he tick A 
 is used are the four consonants in the word smaller ; and 
 the fad thai the downward r h is made smaller, that 
 is reduced to a tick, before any one of these tour con- 
 sonants, forms a useful aid to memory. 
 
 121. The tick h is also used before a hooked letter 
 when it is convenient ; as, ^v hyperbola, >' Hebrew, 
 v 1 hydra, / hedger, ) hither. 
 
 122. The tick // is always read FIRST, like the circle s 
 in v, Saul, c_ sack; and the hook in v wall, C well, 
 
 C while. 
 
 123. The dot aspirate cannot be used before a vowel 
 not followed by a consonant ; thus \.v is Aj/jiii (A.cts 
 28. 15), not Ap-hy. 
 
 124. The dot h is only employed in a few words of 
 frequent occurrence — (a) where it may afterwards be 
 safely omitted and the word treated as a grammalogue, 
 and (&) in some long words in order to give a briefer 
 outline. 
 
 * A/- . ^T^"r?f /' K 
 
 upheave, Tahiti, Fitzhugh, adhere, dishearten, Jehu, Jehovah, 
 
 \^- ■' ^ : I y 
 
 Fbhi, Thahnsh {GenesisSZ. 24), Sihor (theNile), Soho, Sahara, Sheehy, 
 Mohawk, enhance, Nehemiah, l'.lilin, rehearse, racehorse, Eehum ( Ezra 
 
 i 8), Aarbuus (in Denmark), weigh house, warehouse, Yahoo, heigh-ho ! 
 
 In the example Fitzhugh, the circle .< and the circle of the upward h make 
 a large circle, which cannot be mistaken torftssr,tti which the ss circle 
 won hi be written on ihe other side of t. S and «A, preceding h. are wril 
 ten with the circle of the A inside the cmve because ilie combinations 
 #, »•, chi sh, s, ch ; do not occur in English.
 
 60 
 
 EXERCISE ON T11K ASPIRATE. 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 ° " <7 1 , v ^ - J^ s <d o ^x \ 
 C Ur . ^ "I J^ 7 ^ ^ .\p, ' A V. , . 
 
 — .« 3 *< , r ^ ^ ^ A \ K V, . C 
 
 \ % ; . ^ ^1 ; . o /V. </\ f ^ - Z_ 
 ^ ^^ . x I C Ur , cr^l n . <^> , ' JL 
 
 cA / ^ No- U^ \ I V^ . ^ vpx 
 
 * * " ^ ~l, x . -r a —L ' ' \J^ 
 
 
 u s 
 
 "1 >, x 6 
 
 O c! , .A \j I O \ f\
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ASPIRATE. 61 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 Downwa/rd H. Ha ! Hague, hock, hoax, haggis, huckster, 
 hexagon, hookah, hackney. 
 
 Tick If. — Ham, homily, hymn, hull, hump, horn, hare, 
 hire, hires, horse, hemp, Hymen, horror, hiss, hurl, hail- 
 stone, helm, hearty, hasty, harvest, harbor, hilarity, whole- 
 sale, hemlock. 
 
 Upward II. — Heed, hoop, hide, hatch, hung, hush, heavy, 
 Hannah, hamper, haddock, hazel, ahead, haggle, hardy, 
 hawker, hammer, hunger, hobble, Hindoo, hustle, husk, 
 bearth, harrow, hurry, Harry, hero, horizon, horrify, holly. 
 
 D<>t II. -Happen, happy, happily, happiness, perhaps, 
 uphill, heaven, handy, apprehend. 
 
 Medial II Behave, behead, upheave, outhouse, adhesion, 
 adhesive, Jehovah (up), Jehoiakim (down), coffee-house, over- 
 hauls, Nahash, rehearse, Yahoo, Sahara, coheRe, cohesion, 
 warehouse. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How is the Aspirate represented in Phonography ? 
 
 2. Give the rules for the employment of the different 
 
 forms of h. 
 
 3. What ride must be observed when It follows another 
 
 consonant ? 
 
 4. Name the consonants before which the downward It 
 
 is reduced to a tick. 
 
 5. When is the dot h employed '.
 
 62 
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD " B, " AND "L." 125-129 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD R AND L. 
 
 125. The following rules for the employment of the 
 
 upward and downward forms of /■, and tin: upward and 
 downward direction of / have been deferred to the present 
 chapter, because they were not necessary to the student 
 in the initial stages of his study. The pupil should 
 thoroughly master the rules for r before turning to 
 those for / : — 
 
 12(5. Initial R. — When /■ is tin' first or only consonant 
 in a word, it is written downward if a vowel precedes 
 and upward if a vowel does not precede ; thus, ~^\ air, 
 
 T arrow, ^. ray; '^ airs, ^ rose, ^ rise ; o earn, 
 "~^i arraign, <" reign, /r 9 run; ' & orations, "? rations; 
 "V earl, ^. error, / rock, /f rule. 
 
 127. When /• precedes t, </, ch, j, th, M, gl, write 
 the upward r; thus, /\j irritation, ■ aridity, 
 
 ■/j arch, A. earth, K—\ orthography, y* — oracle, 
 /~ argal ; and in ^Z^^^f ornamental. Outlines like 
 earth, \ oracle, impede the writer. 
 
 128. When r is circled or looped initially, it is written 
 Upward if a vowel follows, and downward if a vowel 
 
 docs not follow; thus, ." sorry, \ sir; , '■ series, 
 o*r serious, °'o soura ; v story, star; o stern. 
 
 129. PlNAL /.', in short words, is written downward, if 
 it ends ;i word, and upward if a vowel follows; thus, 
 
 |" Tory; ' fear,* . fury / s< ^ s pare, \/' perry ; 
 ~\ car, carry; / jury.
 
 1:50-134 UPWARD AMi DOWNWARD "li" AND "L." fi-3 
 
 130. When a word has two descending strokes before 
 the final r, the upward r is generally used ; as >^/ pre- 
 pare, L / debar, ' fairer, -£\> Shakspere. Write 
 kitiikk i\ irrespective of vowels, rather than an awk- 
 ward outline ; 1 1 1 us, / \^y [not ^Sj officer, .. answer. 
 
 131. The upward /■ is always written alter a single 
 Straight upstroke (/', n\ wh, y, It) ; as in ^^ rare, 
 c^ yore, (^ wore, c^ where. The upward m, final, 
 is generally more convenient than the downward one; 
 thus, S/" born, \/° turn, ^S mom. 
 
 132. Initial 7, is always written up, except 
 
 (o) When preceded l>y a vowel and followed by a 
 horizontal letter not hooked initially ; as, ^v alike, 
 (^ elm, (S alone, f^, almoner. 
 
 (5) When preceding sv, sn, sng, as -^ illusive, 
 (^ lesson, ([_, Leasing. In these eases it is written 
 down ward. 
 
 133. Final Lis always written down : 
 
 (a) After n. ikj, ns, ngs, fs, VS, //is; as J animal, 
 \^ strongly, ~J counsel, \<? vessel, Jo thistle. 
 
 (b) After the straight upstrokes /•, ir, wh, //, li ; and 
 after/', V, si; Jew, shw, if no vowel follows; as, ^f roll, 
 
 <rf Yale, s^( HoweU, > fool, > vale, f" skill, 7~ quail. 
 
 (c) After a straight downstroke, if two vowel-signs 
 Come between ; as, .}* toirel. .J^ <i 'tnl. J trial. In other 
 cases it is written upward ; as, \f~ Paul, J* fellow. 
 
 134. Final Li? can be used where a final downward / 
 would be written ; as > fowler, T In,, In: 
 
 \^ys> peninsular, -if roller, •/" scholar, f queller. 
 When a strongly-sounded vowel conies between I and r, 
 write the two letter.-, as ! ( ^failure.
 
 04 upward and downward " r " and ' , l." 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 C ^ ^ s 1. \ ^ /^?" ''^ . • 
 ). ) o v ^ - / • %.* C , A-* ° 
 
 c_^x ' ^_ 'Y\o N ^, / o _ N C ^ 
 
 n ) o ' a , u^ *) ^ sy c 
 
 ^ ). s ). w ' L, 7 tf ^ ' b - C- <^ .^ N 
 
 ° • 6 ( , ) ^ vv.^ir^,
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD "R" AND "L."' 65 
 
 Exercise 41„ 
 
 Initial R. — Row, wry, raw, roan, roii^h. rice, reuse, rage, 
 rich ; oars, ears, Arran, urban, Irish, arrear, orrery, aurora, 
 orb, arisen, arm: arise, arose, aura, amuse, erase; rob, robin, 
 Arab; room, aroma; rogue, argue; range, arrange; rival, ar- 
 rival: aright, arsenic, wrath, irritation. Sore. Sarah; sores, 
 series; sire; stare, store, starry; arrest ; stern, siren. 
 
 Final H. — Pair. Peru; liar, bury, bureau; tar, tarry, tyro; 
 core, carry, curry; gore, gory; fair, fire, fiery: four, foray; 
 share, shore, sherry ; mar, mare, moor, marrow; inure, narrow, 
 Nero; lore, lair. Laura, Iory;debar, aspire, transpire, tramp- 
 Ler; roar, rear: were, weir; tarn, torn, borne, cairn, return. 
 
 Initial /..-—Less. else. eels, lees: lack, alack, Aiick; lame, 
 elm: Lennie, Ellen; lamb, Alma, lane, Allan; location, alloca- 
 tion; leg, Olga; alcove, alkali, election, elocution, eliminate, 
 alchemy, almanac, almoner, Elgin. 
 
 Final I j. Feel, foil) : vale, valley; avowal, value; roll, rule, 
 rely, rally, only, feeler, ruler; Powell, towel, dial, dual, duel, 
 fuel. 
 
 Miscellaneous.- Apple, pall, plea, peel, pray, prow, power, 
 brow, bower, able, bale, tray, claw, coal, free, (ear, Haw. fall, 
 Luna. Luke, rubric, ruminate, rust, rustle, leather, leaven, 
 eleven, nasal, muscle, employer, silver, slavery, oppressor, 
 molar, timbrel, vessel, downhill, ruthless, ruddy, Priscilla, 
 rosemary, legatee, lesson, Alps, levee, level, liberal, instal, 
 extol, litany, Latin, lancers, ear-ache, tureen, retire, retrench, 
 rigor, ridicule, repose. 
 
 Review. 
 1. When should an initial /• be written upward, and 
 
 when downward \ Mention the exceptions. 
 •„'. When r is circled or looped initially, how i> it writ- 
 ten .' Write sere, Sarah ; sour, Surrey. 
 :'.. When is final /'written upward, and when downward '. 
 
 I. When /•// is final, which form should lie used '. 
 
 .">. When is initial / written upward, and when down- 
 ward '. 
 
 <>. After what letters i^ final I written cither upward or 
 downward, according as it is or is not followed by 
 a vowel '. 
 
 7. After what letters is/ always written downward '. 
 
 8. When may final //" lie used .' 
 
 5
 
 G(i THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 135-140 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 135. (.1) A single thin consonant, standing by itself, 
 and made one-half its usual length, indicates the addi- 
 tion of t ; and a thick consonant, standing by itself, when 
 halved, expresses the addition of <l ; thus, \ ]>, \ pt; 
 \ />, \ Id; V_ f, v_ ft ; ^-n m, ^ mt ; v. vd; _ Tct. 
 
 136. A vowel before a half-sized consonant is read 
 before both letters; as, 'V. oft, ^_ act, n thlml. 
 
 137i A vowel after a half-sized consonant is read 
 
 next to the PRIMARY letter; thus, \ pay, \ pate ; 
 
 \ tie, ' tight; ^^ may, . mate; \ die, died; 
 
 vc view, ^ vieioed ; oft ; ^ void ; .) east; <>- wit. 
 
 r \S would not be __/]. guilty, 'Kf'] faulty, but 
 
 'lilt/ faulit. 
 
 138. (A') The four half-length curves ^mt, ^nt, 
 r It, ~\ rt, are thickened to express d ; thus, >~«md, ^ ltd, 
 r lil [written downward], ■> rd ; as in ^ mate, ^ made, 
 a aimed, ^ mode, L tempt, L- deemed, &> sent, ^ send, 
 ^f felt, V, filed, \ heart, S hard, ^> moored. 
 
 139. The letters <~>md, ~ nd, may be used when a vowel 
 either precedes or follows tit or t> ; as i. aimed, T mode, 
 ~ amid, i owned, ^ mid, r annoyed ; but r Id, ~> rd, are 
 
 used only when the two consonants succeed each other 
 
 without a vowel between; as, v ' r fold, \ paired. 
 When a vowel comes between / <l or rd, the single 
 letters should We written; as, f\ laid, ^J^ followed, 
 \/\ parried, j read, \\ corrode. 
 
 1 K». I.i is written upward; as, \ /„-//, except, after 
 />. u\ ///', when ii is written downward ; as, knelt, 
 
 I ; dwelt, ' quilt,
 
 I 11-14-1 THE SALVING PRINCIPLE. 07 
 
 141. The consonants w ng, '-s mp, f lr, cannot 
 be halved for the addition of t or d, the half-length signs 
 being assigned to w nd, - md, r Id ; but ^~-, mpn may 
 be halved to add t or <// as, -, impend, -j impugned; and 
 «-* «0T and ~ mp* may be halved ; as, ^ angered or 
 anchored, ./ hampered, (^ slumbered, 
 
 142. Words of one syllable containing only one con- 
 sonant, hooked or circled initially, follow the rule that 
 by halving a thin consonant / is added, and that by halv- 
 ing a thick consonant d is added ; thus, Opiate, \ blade, 
 *< prate, \ braid, d. soaked, \ sobbed. 
 
 143. (<') Either t ok d is added by halving: — 
 (a) In words of one syllable when the letter ends 
 
 with a hook, or with a circle formed on a hook ; as, 
 
 pint or /'//in/: J tint or tinned; J tents or tends; 
 
 l dint or dinned; v /•</// or vend; - mount or mound ; 
 
 s> rent or rend; '! TVeni ov t/-///d ; , plant or />/unn<d. 
 
 (A) Generally in words of more than one syllable ; as, 
 
 '<l offered, -1 uttered, f seated, .,\ suited, •' stated, 
 
 rapid, N rabbit, rabid, I tepid, _J^ colored, 
 
 vr - ventured, v^ forward, [, ^contraction for -woreZj, 
 
 ^-^ di h r/ui/ii', x . between, / V_^ alphabet, ip occasioned, 
 
 J., disappoint, \ despond, [ distant, I destined, 
 
 ) detach, [. debate, %. trader, c ~\ free-trade. 
 
 144. (//) CIRCLE 5, at the end of a half-sized character, 
 is always read last : that is AFTER the f or </ added by 
 halving; thus, \ paJ, Sj pa£s (not past), \ pants (not 
 panst). The following examples show the steps from 
 the primary character to the half-length with * added : — 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 lr 
 
 y 
 
 i 
 
 /"<// 
 
 /in in 
 
 blown 
 
 tough 
 
 chin 
 
 frown 
 
 piltl 
 
 /mi/// 
 
 \ 
 blend 
 
 lr 
 tuft 
 
 chant 
 
 front 
 
 pates 
 
 paints 
 
 s 
 blends 
 
 lr 
 
 chants 
 
 fronts
 
 THE HALVIN't; PRINCIPLE. 
 
 145-151 
 
 The Past Tense ending in T on D. 
 14.j. Verbs ending in t or d, arc written thus, ' chat, 
 / chatted ; r nod ~- I nodd,ed ; \y part, \/' parted, 
 [net \| parted,] etc. 
 
 146. Verbs written by a half-length letter ending with 
 a hook are written thus, ; paint, X_ painted, print, 
 
 \_i printed, % plant, x (to preserve the straightness 
 of the stroke) planted, J stint, J stinted, c, acquaint, 
 C V^_- 1 acquainted, — grant, <= — — i granted, /^ rented. 
 Junction of Half-length Strokes. 
 
 147. Two half-length strokes, or two strokes of unequal 
 length, must not be joined together cnless they make 
 an angle; thus, / cht must not be joined to / cht for 
 chit-chat; nor — 1c to It in faetiex, nor -— s m to _< ?i£ 
 for minute. Take the pen off, or write the simple con- 
 sonants; thus, \. or chit-chat, N yr y< / [not %, 
 pr pt], propped, ' — i tactics, .1 minute. In i-^ ford, 
 
 .__ -^ named, etc., the junction being evident, is allowed. 
 
 lis. To avoid long strokes like 
 
 ,//,/, 
 
 /,/,/, 
 
 ilrdd, 
 
 write the half-length / or (7 at the side; thus, | edited, 
 . tided, \ dietetic, I dreaded, !, situated, 
 
 149. 7/ half-length, — Write the upward /> in words that 
 contain// halved with or without final a or n hook; as, 
 o x hat, i, J hats, ..• heat, ' hunt. Hants. 
 
 150. AI'tiT the -tion hook, the stroke st may be written 
 
 upward when if cannot be written downward; thus, 
 u \ excursionist, fi6 liberationism ■(, v3> Salvationist, 
 
 151. The half-length /■ | ] should never be written 
 alone, nor with 8 only | ■ | added. In rapid writing, 
 when vowels are generally omitted, ' rl would be 
 
 confused with the logograms for and, should. Write 
 /*1 [not . J rate, I [not | write, J, [not -£] writes.
 
 exercise on the halving principle. g9 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 Graminalogues • cannot, e- greatf, »o^ sAojtJ, 
 
 ///«/, ( without, f (Wi/, _ could, 
 
 cuU,( called), 1 toward, Cjirst. 
 
 a t \i| j "i rv. x,, , > x _ ^ 
 
 ' K * a| . ,. , | r d ^ ' \x 2 "\ /* 
 
 < o \ ^ .. I ° - --S N ~\ ^, ' )- 
 
 x i 
 
 - 
 
 us, )- . V v* : % ^ /y, ' ^ ^ s _^ x 
 ^ - \ . *, ' 1 ~ s . ^ L_x
 
 70 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 . I 
 
 Exercise 42 — {continued). 
 
 V^ , </^> 
 
 ^ r 
 c ^ 
 
 v, ' 
 
 9 <^> 
 
 
 M 
 
 ( r 
 
 < J s * i L. S, ; 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 . A, U 
 
 (.4) Pit, pate, pet, bed, bond, obeyed ; taught, added ; etched. 
 edged; ached, caught, guide; evade: thought; east, eased: 
 shot; meat; ant, neat; liijht,, alight; wait-, yet: heat; quote; 
 pots, eats, nets; God, gaudy; cat, Kitty; mote, motto: dado, 
 date; loft, lofty: abode, body; weight, weighty. 
 
 (li) Ailed, peeled, appalled, fold; mode, amid; swooned 
 send, sound, hand; hard, heard ; middle, palmed, bard, heard, 
 absurd: prate, plot; abroad, Made; treat, trite, straight, 
 dread; secret, glide; Eruit, flight, threat; plight, spite, split. 
 
 (( ') Pant, paint-, splint, proved, bend, abound, blind, brand : 
 Trent, Count; fount, fountain; mount, mountain; lent, land; 
 raft, rend, served: waved, cushioned: pack, packed; live, 
 
 lived; kept,, moved, robbed, patent , tickets, torrent , peopled. 
 
 invent, parent, ordered, assembled; beautiful, arithmetic, 
 
 indicate, backward, forward, Edward. 
 
 (/>) Drifts, accounts, friends, winds, proves, brands, lands, 
 mounts, finds, prints, pants, blinds, faints, minds. 
 
 Hand, handy; end, ended; need, needy; sport, sported; 
 pat-ted, pitted, appetite; start, started; coated: refuted, 
 
 melted, included, pocketed; piped, popped, bribed, judged, 
 effect, cooked, afflict, licked, select, looked, quaked, reared: 
 
 Card, named, discord ; attitude, sil ua.led, dreaded, illustrated, 
 obtruded ; hot, hate, hit ; fashioiiisl. libera) ionisl ; wrought, 
 rot, rat
 
 ;i 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. 'What consonants arc halved for t only, and what for 
 
 d only? 
 
 2. How is a vowel road before a half-sized letter? How 
 
 after? 
 
 3. How is the addition of t and d to m, n, /, r, represented? 
 
 4. When may a thin letter be halved to express d\ 
 
 5. When may a thick letter be halved to express tl 
 
 6. Under what circumstances may a full size ami a half 
 
 size consonant not be joined? 
 
 7. Illustrate the rule by writing cooked, midnight, fact, 
 
 liked.
 
 72 Table of Single and Double Consonants. 
 
 L hook. 
 
 R hook. 
 
 N hook. 
 
 Fund V\ „ ., . ,, 
 hook. Ha, f len 3 th - 
 
 P 
 
 B 
 T 
 D 
 
 CH 
 J 
 K 
 G 
 F 
 V 
 TH 
 TH 
 S 
 
 z 
 
 SH 
 ZH 
 M 
 N 
 
 NG 
 L 
 R 
 R 
 W 
 Y 
 H 
 
 \ 
 
 ( 
 ( 
 
 J 
 
 Is 
 
 pi \ 
 
 bl \ 
 
 ti r 
 ai r 
 
 chl f 
 
 jl / 
 
 kl ^_ 
 
 crl 
 
 v] 
 
 0. 
 
 upidown 
 
 ml C^ 
 nl o 
 
 pr \ 
 br \ 
 tr 1 
 dr 1 
 clir / 
 jr / 
 kr c - 
 gr — 
 fr ^ 
 vr O 
 
 Or n 
 
 thr () 
 
 sblr79 ! shr '' 
 
 zhr J 
 
 mr 
 n r 
 
 pn \ 
 bn \ 
 tn J 
 dn J 
 cbn J 
 
 pf\ 
 bf\ 
 
 tf I 
 df I 
 chf / 
 
 .in 
 
 J jf / 
 
 I'll ^ 
 
 kf 
 gf. 
 
 kn _, 
 
 £ii _, , 
 fn V^ 
 vn Vi 
 llnx L 
 tlin ( 
 sn ) 
 zn ) 
 shn c^yj' 
 zlm ,-V 
 mn ^_ 
 nn v_? 
 
 ln/T" 
 
 up, down 
 
 rn ^ rf 
 
 Wll 
 
 c^> 
 
 \\ £ 
 
 \\t </ 
 
 \" 
 
 s* 
 
 yf ** 
 
 yt ^ 
 
 hi! 
 
 s 
 
 bitf- 9 
 
 lit cT 
 
 pt 
 
 bd 
 
 tt I 
 dd l 
 cht 
 3d / 
 kt 
 
 gd - 
 ft 
 
 vd L 
 tht ( 
 thd ( 
 st ) 
 zd ) 
 
 sht ' 
 
 zlul > 
 
 j mt , 
 
 I .ua ~ 
 
 ( nt ^ 
 
 I It 
 ll.l ' 
 
 rt - 
 
 I
 
 152-153 "w" AM) "v" SERIES OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 73 
 
 CHAPTEE XV. 
 
 TFAND T SERIES OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 Wand Y prefixed iii the six simple vowels, both font/ and short. 
 
 152. When w or y is followed by a vowel, a diphthong 
 
 is formed, which is represented l>y a sign in the same 
 
 position as the simple vowel; thus, ; ah, witli w becomes 
 
 j wah, and with y ^ yah ; aw with w becomes 3 ; waw : 
 
 and so on. 
 
 W Series 
 Y Series, 
 
 wah. c . weh, t wee, j waw, 'j woh, j woo. 
 
 yah, u ; yeh, u i yee, j yaw, A i yoh, „ 
 
 yoo. 
 
 153. Tin' same signs written light represent wand y 
 
 prefixed to the SHORT vowels. 
 
 I/' Series. \ wa, ' : we, i wi', j wo, 3 | wti, ji woe. 
 
 T Sei 
 
 \ ya» l i ye, J yi, • yo, 
 
 yu, 
 
 yoo. 
 
 It is seldom necessary to make any distinct ion between 
 the light and heavy signs. The w signs r< present the 
 form of the mouth in pronouncing w or oo\ and the y 
 signs represent the shape of the mouth iii pronouncing 
 y or ee.
 
 74 "w" and "y" series of diphthongs. 154-157 
 
 154. Joined Vowei, Signs for Initial W. — The w 
 diphthong sign c may be joined to downward I; as, 
 
 (Z^ (^ William Wilson; and > may be joined to k, 
 g, m, to represent w ; as, a_=_ wake, i_L woke, j . wig, 
 
 .". woman, >— s women. The alphabetic form <^ w, 
 
 should be used when a vowel precedes ; as, y. awake, 
 </. awoke. 
 
 155. Joined Initial Vowels and Diphthongs. — 
 At the beginning of a word, the following vowels may be 
 joined : — 
 
 aw, o, oi, ow, before I ; as V awl, / (j alteration, 
 f oil, p* owl ; 
 
 waw and wo, before k, upward r, t>\ ehr, shr; as, 
 walk, >- war, | water, / watcher, y washer : 
 
 7 before /, p, f, th, s, sh, downward r; as, | i<llt. 
 \^ identify, \> ibis, Vj ivy, ) ice, \ ire; 
 
 wt before,/ and t, as \_ wife, "] or | white, | wide, 
 Y~ widely. 
 
 L56. The logogram air (oil) may be joined in the 
 
 compound words v | Almighty, .\:\.. always, s ! al- 
 ready, ) almost, (~ although, all-iris,. 
 
 157. Joined Pinal Vowelb. When a word ends 
 wiiliy, b, /, d, th, 8, n, the diphthongs u, ow, may be 
 
 joined ; as, ., pew, 1 rir//n\ L '/'", (, Matthew, 
 
 X issue, ^_j new (a part of the diphthong being writ- 
 ten), <■ sinew, \ &ow, vv about, \ doubt, . N raow 
 (part of the diphthong); and 7 may be joined to u ; 
 :is v nigh.
 
 EXERCISE ON THE " W " AND • , V*' DIPHTHONGS. 75 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 Grammalogues with, t when, what, > would, beyond. 
 
 1. ^ k . S6/ A , U s ,1 ^" / / 
 
 * ^l )& c^ . <r \ k s -fe c -c r- 
 ^ ' w ' ^S ^ v - ' ^ ^ x 
 
 j. _ \ ^ , / . o \ x v C y r 
 
 , Ay 
 
 " ft , . l. . v v s \ , x • (x 
 c . *\ (• ^ CY | ) .. / • )->
 
 TG EXERCISE ON THE "w" AND "y" DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 Exercise 44 — (continued). 
 
 5. r ) t K. ^ x /, . • f x "K_ c * r 
 
 \.\ ERCISE 45. 
 
 1. Twelve, twenty, wish, word, railway, frequent, Asia, 
 
 India. 
 
 2. Associate association, year, yearly, yard, period, folio, 
 
 ratio. 
 :!. Password, patriot, fuchsia, recreation, variation, various. 
 I. Superior, cameo, glorious, piteous, fume, alien, year. 
 5. Week, wax, wake, walk, Wilkinson, Wigan, woman, 
 
 walker. 
 (>. Alternative, water, icy, iron, eyes, frish, item, ivory, icicle. 
 7. Almost , already, lout , t issue, brow, endue, endow, dispute. 
 
 I!i \ ii.w. 
 
 I. Write the signs for wah, weh, wee, waw, woh, woo; yah, 
 
 yeh, yet . yaw, yoh, yoo. 
 
 '!. In what positions arc these signs written '. 
 
 3. To what consonants may the w diphthong he joined '. 
 
 4. What vowels maj be joined initially to consonants ? 
 
 5. What vowels may be joined Snail] to consonants ? 
 (i. Give examples of joined initial and final vowels.
 
 158-162 VOCALIZATION OF •• PL" AMI " I'R." 77 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 VOCALIZATION OF THE PL AND I'll SERIES OF 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 158. The /»/ and pr scries may sometimes be used to 
 obtain a good consonant outline, even although an 
 accented vowel comes between the two consonants. In 
 such a case the long vowels ah, eh, ee, between the two 
 letters, may be expressed by a small circle before or 
 \ i;< >\ i : the consonant-stroke; thus. J dear, c °j careless; 
 and the short vowels a, e, i, by a small circle placed 
 
 AFTEE or UNDER the consonant ; as, p tell, \ till, 
 
 iT parcel, /'' Charles, ['-. term,') third, &—* gardener. 
 
 159. In cases where it is inconvenient to observe this 
 rule, the circle may be written on eithek side, for either 
 a long or a short vowel; thus, /T regard, / engineer. 
 
 160. A stroke vowel is struck THROUGH the consonant : 
 thus, i court, i cold, i school, ^ record, ^ | soldier. 
 
 161. When a first-place vowel occurs between an in- 
 itial hook or circle and the character to which the hook 
 or circle is added, the vowel sign may be written at the 
 BEGINNING of the consonant; and, in like manner, when 
 a third place vowel occurs between a final hook or circle 
 and the preceding consonant, the vowd si^n may he 
 written at the END of the consonant ; as. p child, I , dor- 
 
 mouse, i quality, e-P' figuration, j-i> figures. 
 
 162. It is seldom necessary to vocalize the /</ and /</• 
 series to mark an unaccented vowel; thus, V, per- 
 mit, v£_ VOCtd; hut accented vowels should lie in-ei'ted; 
 
 thus, \j pervert, , pervert.
 
 exercises on " pl " and "pr" vocalization. 
 Exercise 46. 
 
 i- ■ |,x .n-^ N ^ nv j ' r-\ 
 
 v^« » i . ■ l Si, v ^, , ; 
 
 aUv ;/ — u.,°„ r i x ■ ( ^ 
 n - •■• ^ . , , a ^° s ^ - • v, ^ 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 1. Cheer, guard, verse, target, term, charm, jerk, germ, 
 German, garland, shirk, parley, garment, percolate, barley, 
 pilgrim, terminus, challenge, perfection, perverse, deliver, 
 parlor, telegram, perchance, martyr, darling, person, deli 
 cate, carnal (kr-nl). 
 
 2. Churl, journey, shorten (sft/p-tn), moral {mr-t), courage, 
 curtail, colony, corruption, coldness, portray, tolerate, tor- 
 ment, nurse, nuri lire (nr-t-u), dormitory [dr mt-r), Norman, cor- 
 rect, collect, golden (gld-n), portrait (pr-trt), church, Furnish.
 
 79 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How may the long dot vowels be indicated between 
 
 the two letters of the pr or pi scries of consonants? 
 
 2. How are the short vowels expressed in the same case? 
 
 ;!. When the position of the consonants renders it incon- 
 venient to observe this rule, how may the vowel 
 then be written? 
 
 4. How are the stroke vowels written, when occurring 
 
 between the letters of the pr or j>l series of con- 
 sonants? 
 
 5. When a first-place vowel occurs between an initial 
 
 hook or circle and the consonant to which the hook 
 or circle is annexed; and when a third-place vowel 
 occurs between a final hook or circle and the pre- 
 ceding consonant, how may these vowels be written?
 
 SI) 
 
 DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 1G3-16G 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 DOUBLE-LENGTH PRINCIPLE. 
 
 163. A cukved consonant written twice its usual 
 length, expresses the addition of tr, dr, or ////■ „• thus, 
 
 f letter, _^( shutter, \^_, inventor, ' ^^~\ re/porter, 
 niitrc or sender, (^ slaughter, \ cider, 
 
 £. dander, (- thunder, i mother.* 
 
 K>4. When doubled, ^-^ ng, ^ mp, become •» , ng-ger 
 
 or ng-ker, .- — ^ mper or m&^ry thus, ^ " longer, I rfw- 
 temper, l> — s/^ Chamberlain.^ 
 
 L65. A straight stroke, ending with a hook, or fol- 
 lowing another letter, when doubled, adds tr or </r ; thus, 
 \> printer, tender, > objector, . numerator, 
 
 \c/~ • evercirculator, ^ v proprietor, \ embroider. 
 
 166. The lengthening principle does not apply to an 
 initial STRAIGHT STROKE unless it ends with a hook 
 or the circle //.s ,■ thus, it, does not apply to \ p, \ pi, 
 \ /'/', Sp, etc | 
 
 * Use the double length Itr, when not joined t<> another i ettbr, 
 for ttr only ; us m latter, later, letter, these being very common words; 
 and « rite lead< r, oldt r, !■ atiu r, etc . by / dr, I thr, etc. 
 
 (■The hooked letters — mpr,mbr, _ /"/'//'. mikr.; :nv most conven 
 iciii for verbs, because iheycun be readily halved for the past tense; as, 
 
 encumber, - cumbered, '"-^ linger, - lingered. 
 
 X \ double-length straight letter, ending with n hook, has thus 
 two meanings, the alphabetic or scarce meaning, and the extra or general 
 
 aning; .-is. /, Jen and /, nil Thuy will be distinguished by 
 
 vocalizal [on ; ihus: - 
 
 / / 
 
 pippin, pounder, cocoon, canter, Teuton, tinder, jejuni', gender.
 
 167 168 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE DOUBLE LENGTH. 
 
 SI 
 
 167. When the present tense of a verb is written by a 
 double-length stroke, write the pasl tense by the halving 
 principle; thus, render, ^v rendered, c^" wander, 
 c^y wandered, \, ponder, > pondered, tender, 
 S tendered, \ encountered, '---1 sundered. 
 
 168. Tlie rules for the vocalization of half-length char- 
 acters apply also to double-length characters ; thus, 
 
 ^pain, : paint, '^painter; fen, 'V» offend, v. offender. 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 7* 
 
 I o 
 
 vr 
 
 
 I o 
 
 \\ 
 
 Y T 
 
 V<yv ■ 
 
 6
 
 82 EXERCISE ON THE DOUBLE-LENGTH. 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 1. Enter, another, Easter, oyster, loiter, latter, alter, shat- 
 ter, softer, fender, founder, offender, asunder, smatter. 
 smoother, mounter, psalter, slighter, Walter, slander, 
 islander, fomenter, Sunderland, bewilder (b, upward Mr, 
 vocalize with wi), remainder, reminder (show a slight angle 
 between r and mndr), defender (/ hook), wilderness, idola- 
 ter, pamper, temper. 
 
 2. Ponder, pointer, planter; bender, brander: tender, at- 
 tainder, tinder ; chanter; gender; counter, gander, grander, 
 grafter; ranter, rounder, rafter, winter, surrender: yonder, 
 hinder. 
 
 3. Acceptor, captor, rector, erector, persecutor, engender, 
 elector, discounter, nectar, darter, depender, curator, coun- 
 teract, detractor, Jupiter, prosecutor, vindicator, arbitrator, 
 participator, inspector, moderator, mitigator, distributor, 
 lubricator, litigator, liberator, deprecator, alligators, tor- 
 mentor, progenitor, pretender. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. What does a curved consonant written double its 
 
 length express ? 
 
 2. Write mother, loiter, murder, another, fender, softer. 
 :!. Write the words latter, ladder, letter, leather. 
 
 4 When may a straight stroke be written double-length, 
 
 and what is added thereby? 
 5. An initial straight stroke cannot be lengthened for //■ 
 
 or '//', except in certain instances. Name them. 
 G. How is a double-length consonant vocalized '. Give 
 
 illustrations.
 
 K'.!i-173 PR] i [xes. 83 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 169. The prefix con or com is expressed by a light 
 dot, written at the beginning of the word ; thus 
 J* contain, v comply. Winn preceded by a consonant, 
 
 either in the same or the preceding word, con-, com-, 
 COG-, or cum-, is denoted by writing t lie syllable or 
 word that follows UNDER or close to the consonant or 
 word that precedes; thus, I, discontent, J 3 inconstant, 
 /C\. reconcilable, .' \ irreconcilable, L misconduct, 
 ^ unconfined, |\^ decompose, Lx, discompose, r ^ just 
 completed, /•* recommend, - uncommon, /C_p recognize, 
 o/<^\ circumscribed, °\^ circumspect, rj rin-umstances, 
 \ incumbent, accompany, \ accomplish. 
 
 170. Inter (inter, inter), intro, enter w as, ^\^.inter- 
 view, ^Lij introduction, *} internal, ^ enterprise. This 
 prefix may generally he joined; thus, \ n introduce, 
 
 Vi intervene. 
 
 171. Magna, magni *—> as. ^-to magnanimous, 
 vv magnify, I magnitude. 
 
 1 72. Self o as, •-. self*<'i/i>, \" s, i f-r, mirol, { self- 
 conscious. 
 
 173. The prefix in before spr, sir. shr, and h, may 
 be expressed 1>\ a back hook ; thus, ^o inspiration, 
 
 [ instruct, ^~\i inscription, - inhabit, t-$ inhuman.
 
 84 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PREFIXES. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 \ . o V , ' x 2. o ' o^ 
 
 
 1 ^ ■ 'V ° .}' ' I • "i • ^ 
 
 i V ^ ^ 3 . 2K L * 6. ■ 1 . L- 
 
 \ \ V. I * 7. C. So 
 
 
 
 V*' i - . - -* 
 
 1 ' -t^ \~A «
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PREFIXES. 85 
 
 EXEHCISK 51. 
 
 1 Condole, -join, -vey, -veno, -vince, -eeit, -cede, -demn, 
 -fess, -found, -dense, -gratulate ; comply, -potent, -plete, 
 -pule, -pass, -pose, -pure, -promise, -(m)ence. 
 
 '2. Inconstant, -siderate, -testable, -ceivable, -elusive, 
 -junction, -sideration, -(n)ection ; incomparable, -patible, 
 -petent, -plete, -prebeusible, -(m)odious, -bent; unconflned ; 
 decompose, -position. 
 
 d. Disco- JLfit, -tinue, -(n)ect, -tent, -solate, -fort ; miscor u - 
 eeive, -jeelure, -pnte, -pnliil ion ; nonconductor, -tent, 
 -( missioned ; reconcile, -sider, -pense, -pose, irreconcilable. 
 
 4. Circumstantial, -ference, -vent, -cise ; recognizable, 
 -nizance ; accompany, -plice, -plisbed, -(m)odate ; will com- 
 menee, am content. 
 
 o. Intel 'fere, -pose, -cept, -diet, -ject, -val, -view, -cessor ; 
 enterprise, -tain ; introduce, -duction, -mission ; maginiy, -tie, 
 -licence, -loquent, -tude, -nimous ; self-love, -hood, respect, 
 -rigbteous, -conceit ; inspiration, -strument, -structor, -scribe, 
 scru table. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. How is the prefix eon <>r com written, and how may it 
 lie understood when preceded by a consonant? 
 
 •J. What are the prefixes for inter, magna, magni, self? 
 
 3. How may the prefix in, before the treble consonants 
 S/U-. str, sJcr, and the upward or downward h, be 
 expressed '.
 
 86 affixes. 174-176 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 174. Ing is expressed l>y a light dot at the end of 
 a word ; thus, .j cut ing, >_>\. hoping, \±. conduct- 
 ing, ^-v^> mentioning; or by t he alphabetic •w ; as 
 
 v writing, \s^> farting, V>_^ evening. Ings is written 
 by / or \ or by the alphabetic form o> ; .as, ^~^/ > morn- 
 ings, r-r>/ engravings, <1p sayings.* 
 
 175. Ai.ity, ility, aijity, etc., are expressed by dis- 
 joining the consonant that conies immediately be- 
 fore ality, etc. ; thus, ~" carnality, -^-^. formality, 
 \-^ venality, k stability, \v barbarity, <i^—sf sin- 
 gularity, \y^ popularity, /T" regularity, / majority, 
 s~^s> minorities. 
 
 176. Lt, r as e y- friendly, ^,- confidently. This 
 affix does not interfere with -<ilih/. lt is generally more 
 convenient to join the Z; as ^'goodly, /»' loosely. 
 
 \ii'i », /. c//. /'./,-, '/,/', /•. the downward r, circle as, and //, the 
 
 dot iny isDest. The Btr'oke - nff is i i convenient after the circle 
 
 8," as, ' _ facing; generally after 6, </; aa, \_, nil/hint/, \_ read 
 
 ingjAtter a Btraighl upstroke ; as, \ % w borrowing, -~ weighing. 
 
 s*** roaring; arter all curves except £ w, downward r, and upward 
 
 W .' as A_ bathing, •_ assaying, _ washing, * w following, 
 
 ,?- feeling, - i «w aiming, - annoying, — singing, ■ melting; 
 and after i he /< or ./' hook whenever the stroke -_ /•" may be joined t<> a 
 sharp and easily-written angle ; as, $_ printing, J^ lending, — count- 
 ing, — finding, - mounting, •_ paving, | . driving. The coo- 
 sonanl in this case represents I lie m llajble {«<?, and the vowel > need 
 no) be « i iiii-n.
 
 177-17!) 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE AFFIXES. 
 
 177. Mental, mentality, ^ as f instrumental or 
 instrumentality; [., insirumintoHties, -\ fundamental. 
 Xt may be employed as a contraction for -ment after 
 //. stroke ns, or n hook ; thus, ' ., . w imprisonment, 
 ^" resentment, - commencement, ' pavement, ^>- 
 refinement, (Ls achievements. 
 
 ITS. Self, o as, (° v thyself, selves, i as. ( .• themselves. 
 The affix may be joined in myself, ,<-& himself, 
 
 ! thyself, ... '.-'... n ti est In 8, ( I Ik ni selves. 
 
 179. Ship _y as |» stewardship. Sometimes sA-p is 
 preferable to a separate *A ,■ thus, >" friendship. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 
 % .A b_ ' ^r,^L v V| ^
 
 EXERCISES ON THE AFFIXES. 
 
 Exercise 52 — {continued). 
 ' . \o « 8. ' «t^ ) _ , ' . y 
 
 i T ^ l . vv,, , ^Z 
 I". <Y <•> \ ,V^ - 7.^~^ 
 
 EXERCISE 53. 
 
 [The dot and da.-h affixes for ing, ings, are denoted by 
 italics in this Exercise. Jn words not thus marked, use the 
 stroke ing, ings.] 
 
 1. Staying, weep/////, talking, dancing, catch/////, painting, 
 joining, printing, swaying, willing, borrowing*, sinning, com- 
 posing, v&ging, robing, waving, presiding, choosing; facings, 
 losings, paintings, plotting^, turnings, windings, sittings. 
 
 2. ApplicaA/7/7//, proba-, porta-, audi-, dura-, sta-, alia-. 
 no-, capa-; brutality, mortality', familiarity, peculiarity, car- 
 nality, originality, juvenility, gentility, barbarity, popular- 
 ity, secularity, majority. 
 
 :!. llcavcu/y, suddenly, instantly, confidently. 
 
 4. Detrimental, sacramental, monumental, instrumentality. 
 
 5. < 'Icrk.v/////, hard-, head- apprentice-, steward-, town-. 
 
 (i. Write //" folloioing words by tlu ir s< vi ral consonants, in- 
 stead of by the S affix : herself (tick h-rs-l-f), yourself, your- 
 selves. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. What are the signs for t he affixes ing, ingst 
 
 2. When is it most convenient to use the stroke ing, and 
 
 \\ hen 1 he dot ' 
 
 '■'>. Write the following words containing the ality or 
 arity aflBx : vitality, fidelity, jocularity, conviv- 
 iality. 
 
 4. What are the aflixes for ly, mental, mentality, self, 
 
 SI III s. s/i i/l .' 
 
 5. I low are the affixes ly and ship otherwise represented }
 
 180-182 ADDITIONAL VOCALIZATION. 89 
 
 CHAPTEK XX. 
 
 ADDITIONAL METHODS OF VOCALIZATION. 
 
 180. The scientific construction of Phonography ren- 
 ders it both a means of rapid writing (reporting) and a 
 complete recorder of spoken sounds. It may. conse- 
 quently, be employed for the representation of dialect-. 
 peculiarities of individual pronunciation, and, with slight 
 modification, foreign languages. In fully vocalized Pho- 
 nography it is, therefore, necessary to provide a con- 
 venient sign for every vowel and combination of vowels. 
 The following methods complete the phonographic sys- 
 tem of vocalization. 
 
 181. Dissyllabic Diphthongs. — The short vowel 7. 
 
 piece, lid by the six long vowels, forms a series of TWO- 
 syllable diphthongs, the accent being on the first sylla- 
 ble. These diphthongs arc represented thus: 
 
 1. H. J. i. I. 
 
 ah-i, tJi-i. ee-i, aw-i, nh-i. <»>-/. 
 
 as in ^ f\. ^ _jT_ ^- r 
 
 Kaiser, laity, howbeit, coil, Stoic, l/n/'w. 
 
 182. The four dissyllabic diphthongs eh-i, ee-i, <>li-i. 
 oo-i, may he used for diphthongs composed of a 
 
 lone- vowel and ANY short unaccented vowel ; thus, 
 c_ clayey, i <i<r<it<, ^ ] Umjomt. \ Hnitrlr,, 
 
 yf real, ^J <z realize, I realty, \ 'i<l<>i. J ideal, 
 
 ( theatre, // geological, •-* ■ museum, snowy, 
 
 ^S /„>,/, coalesce. When the accent is on the second 
 
 vowel use the yah series; a-, j beatitude, p creation, 
 ^ I reality.
 
 90 ADDITIONAL VOCALIZATION. 183-185 
 
 183. When two vowels occur in succession, not other- 
 wise provided for, write the separate vowel signs ; thus, 
 
 f\' Leo, y oasis, (\) Louisa, 7U Ohio, 7 Messiah, 
 
 ) Isaiah, f royal, I dewy. 
 
 184. Nominal Consonant. — Vowels may be written 
 without consonants by using ] | as outlines having 
 no specific values; thus J. a, j, eh, \ 1, \ ah-i (yes). The 
 stroke-vowels may be struck horizontally through the 
 nominal consonant, as J 0, \ u, 1 00. The initials of 
 Christian names should be written in longhand. 
 
 185. Foreign Consonants and Vowels. — The Scotch 
 guttural ch, Irish gh, (heard also in German, Dutch, 
 Welsh, and other languages,) is written thus, —5— ch: as 
 
 in C^ loch (Scotch, lake), /^ J *~'^' Loughrea, f - *"'" Glogher, 
 -s_ ich (German, /), \_ !< _ Buck (German, roof). The 
 Welsh //, (the whispered or breath form <>f the Eng- 
 lish I, like/' and v, ir/i and w,) by f II ; thus, f LUin . 
 French nasal -^ French and German vowels cA jeune, 
 ~\ Goethe, li 'I/'. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 A % o C W ^ ! . s ' r ' . I- 
 
 > )- f w ^ ( <<> v V, / ^ -p ~ x 
 
 1^^A1 ; .^^; ^ * . .P 
 
 > -^ ° 'li ■ > o ' -a • ^,/,r 
 ^> 1 s v \o-x ' ~ K </* r\ c-
 
 EXERCISES ON ADDITIONAL VOCALIZATION. 91 
 
 Exercise 54. — (continued). 
 
 Vl -76 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 1. Bayonet, gayest, sayest, idea, theory, real, ruin, toil, 
 lowest, agreeable, deist, solfaing, reality, laity, deity, snowy, 
 orthoepy, Owen, Lewis, Judea, Chaldea, realty, beatitude, 
 geology, geography. 
 
 2. Diary, lion, riot, violate, diamond, diameter, royalty, 
 Ohio, biography, iodine, iota, Ionic, oology, Jeremiah. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. Give the series of dissyllabic diphthongs. 
 
 2. Write real, seeing, being, theorem, museum, with the 
 
 dissyllabic signs. 
 'S. When two vowels occur cither before or after a single 
 
 consonant, how are they written .' 
 1. Write diary, oasis, Owen, Tona, mower. 
 5. Explain the nominal consonant, and state how the 
 
 dot and stroke vowels are placed to it. 
 (!. How is the German -7/ written '. How the Welsh // .'
 
 92 
 
 LIST OF GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 PHONETICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 Grammalogues marked " I " (first position) are written above the line. 
 Those marked "3" (third position) are written th>-ottgh the line. 
 Those not marked (second position) are written on the line. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 p 
 
 \ 
 
 pn 
 
 \ 
 
 pr 
 
 % 
 
 prt 
 
 <\ 
 
 B 
 
 \ 
 
 bv 
 
 \ 
 
 bn 
 
 \ 
 
 br 
 
 \ 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 
 tit 
 
 P 
 
 tr 
 
 1 
 
 trt 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 1 
 
 dl 
 
 [ 
 
 df 
 
 L 
 
 dn 
 
 J 
 
 dr 
 
 1 
 
 CH 
 
 / 
 
 J 
 
 / 
 
 jn 
 
 J 
 
 jnt 
 
 j 
 
 E 
 
 — 
 
 kt 
 
 
 knt 
 
 - 
 
 bappy 1 ; up ; put 3 
 upon 
 
 principal 3 
 particular 1 ; oppor- 
 
 L t unity 
 
 by 1 ; be ; to be 3 
 
 above 
 
 been 
 
 remember-ed,mem- 
 
 [lier; number-ed 3 
 at 1 ; it; out 3 
 
 told 
 
 truth ; true 3 
 
 toward 
 
 had i ; do ; different-ce 3 
 
 delivev-ed-y 
 advantage; difficult .'! 
 done; down 3 
 Dr ] ;dear; during 3 
 
 mui h i ; which ; each 3 
 
 Large l 
 genera] 
 
 j_r< 1 1 1 Leman 1 , gen- 
 tlemen 
 
 can 1 ; come 
 qtiite 1 ; could 
 cannot 1 ; account 
 
 ks 
 kl 
 kr 
 krt 
 G 
 
 gd 
 grt 
 F 
 ft 
 fr 
 fr 
 fn 
 V 
 vr 
 vr 
 Til 
 tin- 
 TH 
 tht 
 ths 
 thr 
 thr 
 
 thr 
 
 S 
 8 
 
 ( 
 ) 
 ( 
 
 ( 
 
 ( 
 c 
 
 because 1 
 
 call 1 ; equal-Jy 
 
 care 
 
 according: 1 
 
 go, ago 1 ; give-n 
 
 God 1 ; good 
 
 great 
 
 if 
 
 after 1 
 
 for 
 
 from 
 
 Phonography 
 
 have 
 
 over 1 ; ever-y 
 
 very; however 3 
 
 thanked 1 ; thiuk 
 
 through 8 
 
 though 1 ; t beni 
 
 that 1 ; without 
 
 those 1 ; tins; 
 these, 9 
 
 other 
 
 their, (here 
 
 therefore :? 
 
 (double length) 
 
 so, us; see, use (noun) 3 
 as, lias 1 ; is, his
 
 93 
 
 GKAMMALOGFES phonkticai-lv arranged. 
 
 st 
 
 " 
 
 tirst 
 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 sprt 
 
 <\ 
 
 spirit 
 
 Dub 
 
 | and (up) 
 
 sv 
 
 ^ 
 
 several 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 -- 
 
 a, an 
 
 Z 
 
 SH 
 
 ) 
 
 J 
 
 was; use {verb) 3, 
 
 [whoso 3 
 
 shall, shalt 
 
 ah 
 
 e 
 
 • i 
 
 ! 
 
 ah! 
 
 the 
 
 shrt 
 
 ZH 
 
 J 
 
 short 1 
 usual 
 
 eh 
 
 • 
 
 ehP aye 
 
 /.lir 
 
 J 
 
 pleasure 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 of 
 
 M 
 
 — 
 
 me,my l;him,may 
 
 
 
 on 
 
 mt 
 
 ^ 
 
 might 1 
 
 aw 
 
 \ 
 
 all 
 
 ms 
 
 S~b 
 
 myself 1; flimself 
 
 
 / 
 
 awe 
 
 mp 
 
 ~ 
 
 importance 1 ; hn- 
 
 [prove-d-ment 
 
 ii 
 
 1 
 
 hut 
 
 nir 
 N 
 
 
 more, remark -ed l 
 [Mr, mere 
 in, any 1 ; no 
 
 oh 
 Dasli 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 O ! oh ! owe 
 he 
 
 nt 
 
 *■* 
 
 not 1 ; nature 
 
 OO 
 
 s 
 
 to 
 
 nd 
 
 ~ 
 
 hand 1 ; under 
 
 
 / 
 
 should (up) 
 
 nn 
 
 v_3 
 
 opinion 
 
 OO 
 
 N 
 
 two, too 
 
 nr 
 
 <i-^ 
 
 nor 1 ; near 
 
 
 , 
 
 who 
 
 NO 
 
 ^ 
 
 language 1 ; thing 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 L 
 
 r 
 
 Lord 
 
 wo 
 
 <- 
 
 when 
 
 R 
 
 ^ 
 
 or 1 ; your ; year 3 
 
 Wl 
 
 c 
 
 with 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 are ; our 3 
 
 wo 
 
 
 what 
 
 rd 
 
 ■> 
 
 word 
 
 woo 
 
 > 
 
 would 
 
 w 
 
 c^ 
 
 Wl' 
 
 yo 
 
 
 beyond 
 
 wn 
 
 c/> 
 
 one 
 
 yoo 
 
 
 you 
 
 wl 
 
 c 
 
 will 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 1, eye 
 
 Wh 
 
 c/ 
 
 whether 
 
 ,n 
 
 ' ' 
 
 ay (broad ai, yes) 
 
 -whl 
 
 c 
 
 while I 
 
 ow 
 
 • 
 
 1 1 c I w 
 
 Yt 
 
 <; 
 
 yet 
 
 wi 
 
 
 why
 
 94 
 
 GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 ALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 \ 
 
 i 
 \ 
 
 A, an 
 
 above 
 
 according 
 
 account 
 
 advantage 
 
 after 
 
 all 
 
 and (up) 
 
 any 
 
 are 
 
 as, has 
 
 at 
 
 awe 
 
 be 
 
 because 
 
 been 
 
 beyond 
 
 but 
 
 by 
 
 call 
 
 can 
 
 caimol 
 
 care 
 
 come 
 
 could 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 dear 
 deliver-ed-y 
 
 different 
 
 difficult 
 
 do 
 
 Doctor 
 
 done 
 
 down 
 
 during 
 
 each 
 
 equal-] y 
 
 ever-y 
 
 first 
 
 for 
 
 from 
 
 general 
 
 gent leman 
 
 gentlemen 
 
 give-n 
 
 go, ago 
 
 God 
 
 g< >( >d 
 
 greal 
 
 had 
 
 hand 
 
 happy 
 
 V_ 
 
 .sy 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 have 
 
 he 
 
 him 
 
 himself 
 
 how 
 
 however 
 
 I, eye 
 
 if 
 
 importan« 
 
 improve-d-ment 
 
 in 
 
 is, his 
 
 it 
 
 language 
 
 large 
 
 Lord 
 
 may 
 
 me, my 
 
 member 
 
 might 
 
 more 
 
 Mr. mere 
 
 much 
 
 myself 
 
 nature
 
 
 
 
 
 95 
 
 ALl'HAliKTICAU.Y ARRANGED. 
 
 
 k^ near 
 
 J) 
 
 short 
 
 \ 
 
 upon 
 
 — 
 
 no 
 
 / 
 
 should (up) 
 
 ) 
 
 us 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 w" 
 
 nor 
 
 so 
 
 ")- 
 
 use (verb) 
 
 
 not 
 
 °\ 
 
 spirit 
 
 -)- 
 
 use (noun) 
 
 .y 
 
 number-ed 
 
 { 
 
 thank-ed 
 
 J 
 
 usual 
 
 X 
 
 ! oh ! owe 
 
 ( 
 
 that 
 
 °> 
 
 very 
 
 Of 
 
 
 the 
 
 ) 
 
 was 
 
 
 on 
 
 ) 
 
 their, there 
 
 </ 
 
 we 
 
 <^> 
 
 one 
 
 ( 
 
 them 
 
 > 
 
 what 
 
 — p 
 
 opinion 
 
 ) 
 
 therefore 
 
 
 when 
 
 <\ 
 
 opportunity 
 
 4 
 
 these 
 
 C? 
 
 whether 
 
 
 
 or 
 
 ^ 
 
 thing 
 
 1 
 
 which 
 
 c 
 
 other 
 
 
 think 
 
 C 
 
 while 
 
 ./- 
 
 our 
 
 4 
 
 this 
 
 , 
 
 who 
 
 t 
 
 out 
 
 over 
 
 particular 
 
 Phonography 
 
 ( 
 ( 
 
 those 
 
 though 
 
 through 
 
 L 
 
 c 
 
 whose 
 why 
 
 will 
 
 J 
 
 pleasure 
 
 \ 
 
 to 
 
 
 with 
 
 A™ 
 --V 
 
 principjj 
 
 put 
 
 quite 
 
 remark-ed 
 
 -V 
 
 p 
 
 i 
 
 4~ 
 
 to be 
 told 
 toward 
 true 
 
 ( 
 > 
 
 without 
 
 word 
 
 would 
 
 \ 
 
 remember-ed 
 
 1 
 
 truth 
 
 A 
 
 year 
 
 -)- 
 
 see 
 
 \ 
 
 t W< >. tOO 
 
 
 Vet 
 
 <L 
 
 several 
 
 - 
 
 under 
 
 
 you 
 
 J 
 
 shall, shalt 
 
 \ 
 
 up 
 
 A 
 
 your
 
 flfi GRAMMA LOG1 ES. 180-1 f»0 
 
 186. In tlie preceding Tables, some words are printed 
 with a hyphen, (as. give-ri) ; or, with a double termination, 
 (as, important). The corresponding logograms repre- 
 sent both givt and given, important and importance. 
 
 187. A logogram (or word-letter), may be used either 
 as a prefix or affix ; thus, //" Lordship, \^> after- 
 noon, "T undertake, \ hereafter, .^....indifferent. 
 
 188. The positions of the grain malogues, above, on, 
 and through the line, are in general determined by 
 
 their vowels ; and it' a word has more than one syllable, 
 by its accented vowel. For perpendicular and sloping 
 strokes, standing alone, the positions are : — 
 
 1. nli. aw, a, b", 1. oi, wl, above the line. 
 
 2. eh, oh, e, u, on the line. 
 
 3. ee, oo, 7. bS, ow, u, through the line. 
 
 189. Vowel logograms, and horizontal and half-sized 
 consonants have hut two positions: — 
 
 1. ah, a ir. Yi. Yi. I, ni. hi/, vol;* 
 
 2. <h. oh, P. U, ee, oo, 7. <5o, v. ow. 
 
 190. These rules do not apply to irregular gramma- 
 
 logues, namely : — 
 
 1. Those of frequent occurrence, written on- t hi line 
 for convenience: — advantage, are, be, been, dear, deliver, 
 do, for, from, have, if, it, Lord, Phonography, shall, think. 
 upon, usual, was, we, which, will, your. 
 
 2. Those which, in their proper position, would clash 
 
 with some others: any, go, ago, in, me, more, much, num- 
 ber, 0, over, particular, this, those, though, truth, with. 
 
 *The -i'_'n An. signifying^*, should be placed, to the nominal consonant 
 (par, 184), to avoid clashing with the grammalogne, on t/u (see p.-ir. 194).
 
 101 EXERCISE OX THE URAMMALOGUES. 97 
 
 191. 8 may be added to a logogram to mark the plural 
 number or the possessive case of a noun, or the third 
 person singular of a verb ; as, _ good, _; youth, ( Lord. 
 f° Lord's, — come, comes, {, advantages. 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 F.ii nj nind in this F.crris, , e.ir, /,/ inapt r names, is a Grammalogut, and 
 oil tin (iriuiiiiniliiiji.es in the preceding Table are introduced. 
 
 1. My dear Tom, — I shall give you my opinion on Phonog- 
 raphy. I think it is an important improvement, and that 
 it will be a very good thing for myself, and equally so for 
 every gentleman who would improve himself in the nature 
 and spirit of those tilings which are good and true. 2. lean- 
 not see why more '1" nol think of the general use and impor- 
 tance of it, and how much it would improve them heyond 
 others, as it ever will improve all who have pleasure in it, 
 and whose usual principle it is to think things out, and put 
 them down with their hands. 3. Think how good you, too, 
 might have been at it, if you had improved every particular 
 opportunity that you have had during the year. It will give 
 me much pleasure, and Oh, how very happy I shall be, to see 
 thai you do what you can to improve in your Phonography. 
 4. There is a great advantage in it, because if you go on with 
 it, ami do not give it up. after a short while you will have 
 much good from it. However, you may not see the truth of 
 this remark at first. 5. A while ago, I was told by Dr. T., 
 Mr. .1., your principal, and other gentlemen, that it was so 
 very difficult that several of their members could not, and 
 would on no account , go on with it. (!. 1 was not told whether 
 or no these gentlemen are near Glasgow. But though one, 
 two, or any large number may call it difficult, yet the truth 
 is given to US that we should use it, and ever do according to 
 it. ?. Do you think t here is a difference of opinion as to how 
 it is to be done? Eh? If we go through it with care, and do 
 what we can, we shall see that our opinions are not so very 
 different from each other, but, on the other hand, quite equal. 
 8. Ay, think upon these things, therefore, and above all, re- 
 member the language of truth as it is delivered to us in the 
 Word of God, without which we cannot he. nor do. as we should. 
 0. When it is remembered that the Lord overall is He whose 
 word to us is, " Come to Me," thai to Him we owe all that 
 we have, and that lie will deliver us. we will call upon Him 
 with awe. and thank Him by whose mete good pleasure it is 
 that we can, under lliin, go on toward every improvement.
 
 98 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. Give- some examples in which s may be added to a 
 
 logogram to express the plural, the third person 
 of a verb, or the possessive case. 
 
 2. How are the positions of grammalogues generally 
 
 determined ? 
 
 3. When perpendicular and sloping strokes, standing 
 
 alone, are used as grammalogues, how are their 
 positions determined '. 
 
 4. How many, and what positions have vowel logograms 
 
 and horizontal consonants ? 
 
 5. Copy the Irregular Grammalogues of the 1st (Mass. 
 
 and state why they are not written in position 
 according to their vowels. 
 G. Copy the Irregular Grammalogues of the 2d Class, 
 ami state why they are irregular.
 
 192-193 CONTRACTIONS. 99 
 
 LAW'/: • 
 CHAPTE R X X DALLAS, TEXj . 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 192. Phonography has now been presented to the stu- 
 dent in detail, as an alphabetic, or phonetic, system of 
 writing. By means of the twenty-four consonant strokes, 
 supplemented by a circle! for the oft-recurring sound of s, 
 by an elongated circle or loop of two sizes for st and str, 
 by a honk on each side of a straight stroke at the begin- 
 ning and end, by an initial and final hook on the inside 
 of a curve, by a large final hook to straight strokes, and 
 initially and finally to curves, by writing a letter half- 
 length to add / or il, and by doubling its length to add 
 //•, <//•. or (fir — the outline, or skeleton, of every word in 
 the language may be written with marvelous brevity. 
 As a further principle of abbreviation, the writer may, 
 as in longhand, omit the latter part of a long word, or a 
 medial consonant that is lightly sounded: thus. \ for 
 
 "\ X 
 
 probable, \ for arbitration. 
 
 193. The following letters may be omitted without 
 danger to legibility: — - 
 
 P between m and * ; thus, t-S. temptation, \X pumped, 
 
 {x thumped, c-, stamped I from a^ stump), c — -> cramped. 
 /'between m and sh ; thus, • 'j presumption. 
 
 T between g and another consonant; as, ^C mostly, 
 y honestly, X-^ post-card, ^ postage stamps, 
 /"* lastly, q . fastness, ,.;■, .V'" - Testament, j^.^. tes- 
 timony, etc. 
 
 A' or ;/ between ng and / or sh ; as. t~^| distinct (dis- 
 tingi't), ^, anxious, ~<j> sanction, tr7 distinguish.
 
 100 CONTRACTIONS. 194-196 
 
 194. Tick THE.—TJie, the most frequent word in the 
 English language, may he expressed by a short slanting 
 stroke / joined to the preceding word, and generally 
 written downward ; thus, in the, \ for the, 
 --b"... oy the, > of the, 5 with the, > to the, as the, /> is the; 
 but when more convenient, it is written upward ; thus, 
 
 _Jr... at the, ^\ before the, A on the. The first stroke 
 of on the is made sloping to keep the sign distinct from 
 v /. The tick the should never begin a phrase. 
 
 195. Op the. — The phrase "of the," may be intimated 
 by writing the words which it connects NEAR to 
 each other, showing that one is of the other ; 
 thus, f\^^ love of the beautiful, \\_ plan of the 
 work, <5~v-^ some of the indications, /^'~y result of the 
 //unsure, if\ _/ a statement of the actual condition of 
 the country. The method of intimating con or com can- 
 not he mistaken, in practice, for this mode of expressing 
 of tin-. When of the is followed by con, write the dot 
 for con ; thus, ^_o[ close of the contest. 
 
 196. These contractions should not be used after a 
 dot or dash vowel sign ; J -, a condensed account, 
 <2\- ^-a two of the principal nan, would not. be distinct. 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 1. Stumped, prompt, tempt, encamped, damped, exempt, 
 exemption; post-office, post-paid, post-free, listless, celestial; 
 distinction, injunction, distinguish, extinguish, languish, 
 j u nil ion. 
 
 2. By the, at the, which the, if the, for the, from the, thai 
 the, in the, of the, all the, on the, to the, bul the, and the, 
 
 wit li the, as the, is the, what the, would the, at the same 
 
 time (/, upward the tick, smt m). 
 
 :;. Rights of the subject. Attribute of the soul. Loss of 
 the money. Some of the men of the present day. Copy of 
 the petition of the committee, opinion of the majority of the 
 deputal ion,
 
 LIST OF CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 101 
 
 Words marked (*) are 7vritten above (he line. 
 
 Acknowledge-d 
 
 altogether * * 
 anything * 
 architect-ure ' — i 
 Catholic ( 
 character * 
 Danger y 
 destruction 4 
 difficulty Y _ 
 doctrine V 
 domestic Us— 
 Enlarge-d h V" 
 especial-ly } 
 essential-ly \_^ 
 establish-ed-ment 
 
 Govern-ed 
 
 -ment k, 
 
 Immediate -~^ 
 immediately 
 
 impossible * *"* 
 inconsistent 
 influence * 
 influenced * ^ 
 influential * — O 
 information * 
 
 instruction Xj 
 interest-ed | "f 
 
 irregular "^ 
 
 Kingdom * 
 knowledge V 
 
 Magazine /-- 
 
 manuscript 
 
 messenger / 
 mistake*n* /r _^ 
 
 more than * 
 and so with 
 better than \ 
 
 rather than 
 Natural-ly ...y.... 
 neglect-ed* 
 never ^V. 
 nevertheless *■*<. 
 next -^> 
 
 nothing • 
 
 notwithstanding 
 
 Object \ 
 objection / 
 
 Parliament -a rv 
 
 V 
 
 peculiar-ity \ 
 perforcn-ed 
 
 Phonetic Journal 
 
 Phonetic Society 
 
 phonographerVjf 
 phonographic^ — 
 practice-cal-ly 
 
 probable-bly or 
 probability \ 
 prospect *Na 
 public-sh-ed \. 
 publication V 
 Rather or 
 Tvriter „ 
 
 reform-ed 
 reformation 
 
 reformer 
 regular /~ 
 remai-kable-lv 
 
 \ 
 
 represent-ed 
 
 representation 
 
 representative 
 
 republic ' \^ 
 respect-ed /\ 
 Reverend /V_ 
 Satisfaction £
 
 102 
 
 EXERCISE OX THE COXTRACTIOXS. 
 
 satisfactory <r 
 something a-^^ 
 Spelling reform 
 
 w 
 
 stranger J? 
 subject \ 
 subscription V^ 
 
 surprise * %> 
 
 it) Transaction should be written at length, 
 traded form might clash with transgression. 
 
 Temperance Soci- 
 ety l^ 
 
 Thankful * ^ 
 
 together > 
 
 transcript J-^ 
 transfer 1 
 transgress 3-" 
 transgression (t) 
 
 Unanimity or 
 
 unanimous <T~ 
 understand ~f 
 understood "f 
 uniform-ity <T~ 
 Whatever v. 
 whenever - -v- - 
 
 Yesterday <f\ 
 
 because the con- 
 
 V, 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 
 The following Exercise contains all the above Contractions. 
 
 1. My object is to call your immediate attention to a subject 
 of remarkable interest to every member of the Phonetic So- 
 ciety, and especial/i/ to every Phonographer whose practice it 
 is to write manuscripts, transcripts, or transfers, with 'pho- 
 nographic characters. For your especial information, i may 
 remark that Phonography was first published in 1837. or 
 rathi r its publication dates from 1840, when it received its 
 piculiar and distinctive name. 2. The Phonetic Society was 
 establislied in 1843, and lias received the unanimous support 
 of Rev. gentlemen, writers in magazines, architects remark- 
 ably skilled in arcJdtecture, public messengers, those who are 
 i nte rest t a" in and t/orcm the Temperana Society, and other 
 respected Reformers, who, thankful for such a regular and 
 
 natural way of spelling, gave their influence to spread a 
 knowledge of Phonography, and to establish the essential 
 principles of the Spelling Reform, whenever they had an 
 opportunity. :i. Nothing can be more simple, uniform, and 
 natural than the primary doctrim of the Spelling Reform, 
 
 I hat every sound should be 7*1 /</r,v, ///'•'/ by only one Sign, and 
 that, each sign should //«/•,/• represent more than one sound : 
 
 but in Phonography some exceptions are allowed, and every 
 letter is made the representative of some common word. 4. 
 There is something in this system which immediately and 
 especially commends itself to all who acknowledge this true 
 principle of spelling. The annual subscription to the /7/u- 
 //(//-• Society is 2.")C., and those who neglect to pay this,
 
 KKYM'.W. 103 
 
 transgress the laws of the Society ; the danger of which 
 transgression is, that their names will be removed from the 
 list of members. 5. I have always regarded this Society as 
 an establishment of great importance, governed in &n essen- 
 tially catholic and practical spirit, and thought it was impos- 
 sible for anyone to object to it ; but to my surprise I found 
 yesterday that I had made a mistake, when I understood that 
 some strangers, certainly not very influential, had raised an 
 objection to the Society, or rather, had remarked " What 
 good has it performed?" 0. Anything so inconsistent was 
 altogether more than, I could understand. Nevertheless, it 
 should be understood that such men, notwithstanding their 
 knowledge upon other subjects, and irli<it,rer others may 
 think of them, are greatly mistaken in this respect. 7. Prob- 
 ably their minds have been influenced in a wrong /•<////( r £AaH 
 in a right direction, but 1 expect they will now take a more 
 enlarged view of the subject, and try to gain a satisfactory 
 understanding of it, and the objects for which it was estab- 
 lished, and thus be led to see what a r< mark-able advantage it 
 would be as a means of instruction in the principles of speech, 
 and as adapted to reform the representation of the English 
 language. 8. If they would do this, in all probability we 
 should //^.i'£ have the satisfaction of hearing that they were 
 giving their influence, together with their subscription, to help 
 it forward, and to publish a knowledge of Phonography in 
 every kingdom and republic in the world. 9. To enla/rge on 
 the probable results and prospects of thisreform is a task 1 
 am unable to perform. Its great p< culiarity is, that it would 
 make a thorough reformation in our spelling, and introduce 
 a uniformity which would practically Lead to the destruction 
 of our irregular and falsi' orthography. 10. So many donas. 
 tic and other blessings may naturally be expected to arise 
 from reformed spelling, that I hope the subject will no longer 
 be neglected, but be brought under the notice of Govern- 
 ment and occupy the attention of Parliament. 11. I think 
 it more important and better than many matters of Parlia- 
 mentary discussion. There is no real difficulty in the study 
 ot Phonography, as has often been acknowledged with w»o- 
 nimity in the Phonetic Journal. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. When may />, /, £, ,'/. be omitted in Phonography 1 
 
 2. How is the connective phrase o/' £& indicated ' 
 
 3. Write mj tin. far the, of the, on the, with the, to the, at 
 
 the, and the, from the, or the, but the, is the, as the. 
 
 4. Copy distinctly the list of contractions on pages 101-2.
 
 104 
 
 1'IIKASEOCRAPHY. 
 
 197 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 PIIRASEOGRAPIIY. 
 
 197. In longhand, swift writers join sill the letters of a 
 word together, and sometimes write several words with- 
 out lifting the pen. In Phonography also several words 
 may often be united. This practice, called Phraseogra- 
 phy, gives great assistance in following a rapid speaker. 
 The shorthand signs for phrases and sentences are called 
 Phraseograms. Phraseograms should never go too far 
 below the line, present difficult joinings, be too long, 
 difficult to decipher, or liable to be mistaken. In these 
 cases, time will be saved by lifting the pen and commenc- 
 ing afresh. Words that form a phrase of frequent occur- 
 rence, present easy joinings, and would not be mistaken 
 for some common word, may be united; thus, L^j^/* ^ * s 
 not necessary that. The following examples show how 
 other phraseograms may be formed. 
 
 Phraseograms marked (*) arc written above the line. 
 
 V and have 
 
 and the* 
 
 C as well as* 
 
 _^ could lint 
 J do not* 
 
 PHRASEOGKAPHt 
 
 7ji_s for lllis 
 ^"^ reason 
 
 I did not, 
 
 J had not* 
 
 lias not* 
 
 i-^ lie may 
 
 !> 
 
 he would 
 
 I am* 
 1 [do 
 
 V 1 have 
 i I will*
 
 198-201 
 
 PHRASEOGRAPIIV. 
 
 
 105 
 
 Qs 
 
 is not 
 
 T 
 
 should do 
 
 I 
 
 who have 
 
 I 
 
 it is 
 
 I 
 
 so that 
 
 < 
 
 who would 
 
 I 
 
 it is not 
 
 (, 
 
 that is* 
 
 n 
 
 you can 
 
 \ 
 
 it is said 
 
 (r 
 
 they will 
 
 ^-3 
 
 you cannot 
 
 K 
 
 it should be 
 
 <o 
 
 this is 
 
 ^ 
 
 you may 
 
 k 
 
 it would be 
 
 ^ 
 
 we are 
 
 -^ 
 
 you must 
 
 ^\ 
 
 may be 
 
 c/*<-^ we have not 
 
 ^ 
 
 you must not 
 
 v-" 
 
 of course 
 
 A«_^ we have seen 
 
 ,/N 
 
 you will be 
 
 .../>.. 
 
 Our own 
 
 ) 
 
 when lie was 
 
 /I 
 
 you will do 
 
 -Ac- 
 
 should be 
 
 4 
 
 which cannot 
 
 
 
 198. / may be abbreviated by writing only the first 
 stroke, when it, will join easily to the consonant. (Seelam, 
 I trill.) Most of these phrases may be vocalized ; thus, 
 | n / tin. „Q;„. as well as, etc. 
 
 199. The first word in a phrase must occupy its own 
 position ; thus, \, can be, A of your, n_ you can, 
 
 _^_^ could not /" : but a logogram in the first position 
 
 may l>c si.k.iitly raised, or lowered, to suit the position 
 
 of a following one ; thus, I _ / "had, .* / had not, 
 
 j / ilnl not. 
 
 200. A logogram or phraseogram may be written over 
 or close to a word to express con or com ; thus, , you 
 trill comply, J / a at content, \ j mul contrive, ~~ ^ and 
 connected, ' and consented, -1 has commenced, and 
 is contt at. 
 
 201. There or their may be added to a curved full- 
 length logogram by doubling it : thus, ' fur linn, 
 
 \from their, in their, V^_ if there.
 
 106 EXERCISE ON PHRASEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 
 The hyphen shows when words may be joined. This exer- 
 cise contains all the phrases in par. 197, and some others. 
 
 Uncle Sam to-his Nephew Tom. 
 
 1. My-dear Tom. I-am-glad that-you have come to Glas- 
 gow, and-have resolved to pursue your studies at-the Acad- 
 emy. This is right, and-as it-should-be; you-could-not have- 
 -done better, and I-do hope that-you-may-be successful, and- 
 -that you-will-do as-well-as you-can, so-that you-may excel 
 in every department. 2. It-is-said, and of-course we-are all 
 aware of-it. that- we- have- not all-the-same capacities for re- 
 ceiving instruction; it-is-not-necessary that -we should-have; 
 tlud-is-not a matter of consequence, but it-is of -great impor- 
 tance that all who-have talents should use them to-the best 
 advantage. 3. I-shall-be-glad to assist you when I-have an 
 opportunity; I would-have-done so had-not you asked me; 
 but-you- must remember that- we-cannot obtain any great ben- 
 efit without individual exertion on-our-own part. 4. You- 
 -must-not forget this and-the other maxims we-liave so often 
 talked about, for-we-have-seen that-they-are {tht-thr) princi- 
 ples which cannot fail to be of good service, yea even, that- 
 -they-will-be essential to-your success. 5. Be constant and 
 persevering, that-is, do-not study merely by tits and starts; 
 lor-t hat -is-not wise, and-has-not a beneficial effect, 6. It- 
 -would-bc for-your interest that-you-shonld-be uniformly 
 steady, and you-should-do what you-can to-gain a character 
 for diligence and perseverance, tf-you do so, I-will give 
 you a reward. ?. Eor-tbis-reason alone it-may-be, indeed, 
 it-should-be. your desire to achieve success, for-is-not it a 
 source of-pleasure to-receive marks (of the) approbation of - 
 -those interested in our welfare. 8. Many a youth when-hc- 
 -w:is at-your age had no-such incentive, and I-will-say lliat- 
 - the re are. lew who-would-not-have-been delighted to-have- 
 had it. 9. If-you-will (com)ply with my desire, and (con) 
 
 I rive lo-do well ii)-the session tint-has (eoin)inenced. I am 
 
 (con)tent to wait the result, which-cannot but be satisfac- 
 tory, and-with-which you-cannol but be pleased, 10. Your 
 
 brother John may do as-well il'-he would but try: and-if-lie 
 sh luld-do-so, and should-be successful, it may-be that-he- 
 
 ■may also will-he a credit In mil-own family, for-there-is 
 
 little reason to doubt his abilitv. 
 
 Four affect ionate Uncle, etc.
 
 202-206 PUNCTUATION, ETC. 107 
 
 PUNCTUATION, Etc. 
 
 202. Stops should be written as usual, except the 
 Period, for which a small cross is used ; thus, x The 
 HYPHEN is written thus, <T% xL^ well-spoken ; the Dash 
 thus, *.-, ; A Smile thus, ^ ; used in correspondence, but 
 not in printing. The Parenthesis stroke should be 
 made a little larger than a double-length upright conso- 
 nant. 
 
 203. ACCENT may be shown by writing a small cross 
 close to the vowel of the accented syllable ; thus, 
 
 *^f arrows, 'V arose, /^t renew. 
 
 201. EMPHASIS is marked by drawing one or more lines 
 underneath : a single line under a single word must be 
 made wave-like, . , to distinguish it from h. 
 
 205. To Mare an Initial Capital draw two short 
 lines under the word ; thus, L->f The Times, \ Abel. 
 
 200. Figures are written as usual. When one and six 
 are written by themselves, form them thus, /, f, that 
 they may uot be mistaken for shorthand characters. 
 
 Review. 
 
 1. What is Phraseography \ 
 
 2. State the characteristics of a good phraseogram, and 
 
 give a few illustrat ions. 
 
 3. Copy the brief list of phraseograms given on pages. 
 
 104-"), in shorthand, then shut the bonk and write 
 the longhand. 
 
 4. How is /, in some cases, attached to a phraseogram '. 
 
 5. When logograms are united, which determines the 
 
 position of the outline '. 
 G. How may a logogram be written in relation to another 
 
 word so as to indicate <•"// or com .' 
 7. In what way can then or their be added to a curved
 
 108 METHOD OF PRACTICE. 207 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 METHOD OF PRACTICE. 
 
 207. The student, having made himself familiar with the 
 principles of the system as presented in the preceding 
 pages, should take every opportunity to practise writing. 
 As much time, however, should be spent in reading as in 
 writing Phonography. Printed Phonography is better 
 for this purpose than manuscript. One or two short- 
 hand volumes should be read before a rapid style of writ- 
 ing is cultivated, so that it may be formed on a correct 
 model. Preference should be given to those books which 
 contain a key to the shorthand. The " Phonographic 
 Reader," " Talcs and Sketches," " Selections from Popu- 
 lar Authors," or the shorthand portions of the Phonetic 
 Journal or Pitman's Shorthand Weekly, will l>c found 
 especially useful. The following is a good method of 
 practice : — Take a specimen of printed shorthand, and 
 read it over two or three times. Then write it in short- 
 hand from the shorthand copy, pronouncing every word 
 aloud while writing it. Nexl take the key in the com- 
 mon print, and write the passage in shorthand without 
 
 looking at the printed shorthand. Then compare the 
 written and printed shorthand, and correct anj errors. 
 Write the correct mil line for every word wrongly written 
 at lirst several times on a separate sheet, or in a note- 
 book, filling a line with each word, and pronouncing it 
 aloud while writing it. This practice should be continued 
 
 until a correct style is obtained. In writing from a book
 
 208-210 METTIOD OF PRACTICE. 100 
 
 printed in Phonography, to which there is no key, the 
 learner should write out the longhand on every other line 
 of his note-hook. After filling in the Phonography on 
 
 the vacant lines, he should compare what he lias written 
 with the book. 
 
 208. The hooks mentioned above are printed in the ( !or- 
 responding or full style of Phonography, as developed in 
 the preceding pages of this book. This style of writing 
 is chiefly employed in correspondence between phonog- 
 raphers, in making extracts from books, and for other 
 purposes for which longhand is generally used. The 
 Corresponding Style of Phonography can be written two 
 or three times as fast as longhand. It is to the practised 
 reader more legible than quickly written longhand. 
 
 209. It must be remembered thai the saving of time and 
 great ease in writing are not secured by using hooked, 
 grouped, or half-sized letters on all possible occasions. 
 A long and flowing outline is better than one that is 
 short but cramped, with joinings that check the pen. 
 For instance, the outline ""J minute (sixty seconds) is 
 briefer to the eve than minute, but is not so quickly 
 written: and the two strokes in mental take more 
 time than the three strokes in 1 mental. The rule 
 for choosing outlines should be SHARP ANGLKS and 
 FORWARD ! 
 
 210. As in rapid writing from dictation it is impossible 
 to insert many vowels, and as the ability to follow a public 
 speaker should he the goal to which every phonographer 
 should aspire, the student, as soon as he can write with 
 accuracy, should accustom himself to write onlj the out- 
 lines or consonants of words, and go over his work a 
 second time to insert vowels. This will train his hand to 
 reporting, and accustom him to read unvocalized Pho- 
 nography.
 
 110 
 
 
 ADVANTAGES 
 
 OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 
 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 
 ADVANTAGES 
 
 OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 1. 
 
 L N 
 
 
 
 ^p c . ^ s 2, s ~> ^ % 
 
 x 
 
 n< 
 
 > 1 
 
 r 
 
 x ^^o^U" 
 
 
 ir \ 
 
 (A • 
 
 ,v. 
 
 ^ ' C^ .Tfc. , n) • ^1 
 
 "a 
 
 
 .., t " 
 
 '/w ^ . %, : ) / ^ 
 
 > 
 
 / 
 
 * 
 
 ^l 
 
 j- 
 
 ^ rv>V 3 > v \ 
 
 \ 
 
 • ' ^-^. 
 
 (? . 
 
 < 2. 
 
 u v-.yr, a u, 
 
 / s 
 
 _ c 
 
 ^~ 
 
 ^, 
 
 ~ \ ^ * ° ^. \ -i 
 
 - i^i, 
 
 '.VL^ 
 
 ^,- -^rx,^^ 
 
 X 
 
 X/? N 
 
 ) P 
 
 \3 
 
 -%, 
 
 x 'V 
 
 ( v,, 
 
 c \ £ / Q ^^ < V 
 
 ^ 
 
 .1 3- 
 
 ° Jr 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^\t ( —- L - 
 
 / 
 
 N s 
 
 ,r"V^% 
 
 ^ ^ V, L , ' ( . 
 
 ) 
 
 ^f N 
 
 u 
 
 \. . 
 
 v^ v . <^ r™ ^rJ 
 
 N 1 " 
 
 b ck-> 
 
 °\ . 
 
 \_ N . - ,•>> . \ N ^ 
 
 n 
 
 ' * V) 
 
 - 1 
 
 V V^* :) ■ : 
 
 4. 
 
 « ^ 
 
 .-y 
 
 ^~ 
 
 ) k v Vp ~ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 j; 
 
 rx./ 
 
 \ 
 
 O 
 
 / t^ y\ . - v «| , ( i - 
 
 J' 
 
 
 - N °So 
 
 ( | ' 
 
 ~ V^^f'U' S 
 
 c~^ 
 
 /^ 
 
 -l" c 
 
 -w - 
 
 VI ^, C^ -\ a '
 
 Ex. 60 ADVANTAGES OF SHORTHAND. Ill 
 
 jT ^ • ' k / c~ • ~U* .rp. \ I, (^ 
 
 A *S\ I • "' L ~1 ' ^ ^ x 6. . ^ 
 
 • ^ N • V v ~ ...... v, ' ' / s 
 
 L ^ \ / f ' . - , : i ^A. \ 
 
 -'U^x't. v_^\ ■■■ v^/'" ; 
 ' ^7 -L * J... • ^v N .^. ^ ^ >-, 
 
 ^'U^x 8. V. ^ V. ' <\ ^ T J) -p t N 
 -**-' • ^ > ' ^ ■ \ C ° JL n/y' 
 
 £ x 0. w *, N c v ' «?\ v^ / . <$ s . v 
 
 u x n r m/ / • % J, v ) e ^ ^ 
 ri , ^ -n . ^o ' -t, e • r N • # v., > 
 
 UTCv > ; , '^ /" V n ,-- I 
 r \ L • VL. V/i n ) <V^ S l x io. ^ 
 
 . -\* v .1. / v ■*» -**- c "\ 
 
 ^ ' J> y N 
 
 w' , \
 
 112 
 
 ADVANTAGES OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 Ex. 61 
 
 Exercise 61. 
 
 Written with Phraseography. 
 /^('Ild^^x 1. « ~ W V, 
 
 4. " . ^s o n ^ .\. v_ N c ~^v. x • 
 
 U^ l 
 
 
 -/x 6. ' k
 
 Ex. 6] 
 
 I 
 
 ADVANTAGES OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 
 113 
 
 S 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ /L \ ' ~\ \ 
 
 V 
 
 ( 
 > 
 
 <V- 
 
 c^r-^ 
 
 > C 
 
 ^r /—\ < c «~ 
 
 c 
 
 V^ 
 
 l ~ C i-w 1 
 
 \ _ 
 
 1 s 
 
 v w U - N >.. -)- * - 
 
 ' X 
 
 
 
 6. " 
 
 K 
 
 ^ ' v .j N * ' * -1- 
 
 > \ 
 
 V^ 
 
 tc 
 
 i \ 
 
 ?> 
 
 ■""b • C-i > -^ • / > b* 
 
 • t 
 
 s. 
 
 7. " 
 
 
 1 I S > *- N ^ "I 
 
 \ 
 
 ' 1 ' ^s 
 
 L, N lx \ A ^3 
 
 
 \ s- 
 
 i>, °V*, L , o \ } 
 
 \ * 
 
 
 X 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 "J" O yi J ' <* ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^a 
 
 . ^L 
 
 ^T^b> 
 
 s rj, ' s (s ^ \ ' 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 7 ^ o 
 
 ^' 
 
 -?x 
 
 9. M ( ' *=£. \ 
 
 ^^■^ 
 
 . J 
 
 " -\ 
 
 \ <_ 
 
 
 \ x <f b ^ \^ " 
 
 "\> 
 
 ■>-■ * 
 
 "1 
 
 "N 
 
 VL 
 
 ; ' .£ ^ y\ , \ . 
 
 > 
 
 "7t> 
 
 V* 
 
 •L 
 
 N •* ^ 
 
 N S". b ^ ^ 
 
 
 L N 
 
 ^ 
 
 W ' 
 
 r 
 
 M 7^^io.. 
 
 1 
 
 ; ia," 
 
 %^ 
 
 s 
 
 ^t S /^X 11. -V -o 
 
 v > 
 
 ) z 
 
 ° : 
 
 > 
 
 ^—r 
 
 
 - v 
 
 / Y 
 
 !_*) 
 
 / 
 > 
 
 ^ <r \ - " s ( v 
 
 "*" ^ 
 
 ' ** 
 i 
 
 -~\
 
 114 
 
 ADVANTAGES OF SHORTHAND. 
 
 Ex. 61 
 
 rx is. ^ r" ^ ^ „l x <v ...)... ^ 
 ' " ~, '-.).-— r L % -j- • u N u, J 
 
 i/r' va ° n w i4. c k_. v^ %, 
 
 r, • "" v. - 4 ~ -f i ° -^ o, 
 
 / ^i N - o O n 6~- I S 
 
 v,« -<^ n /^, ~- ~ n i, >'\ N ^i . 
 
 is." - v> / - .V* Zp v ^_ 1 »\^-^r 
 , ) ^^,> 1 i i ° v ^ i Vx 
 
 \ > Vp^/-^ N \ ~» , * ^ 
 
 N \r- \; H 1 I j^ V i
 
 211-212 SPEED PRACTICE. 115 
 
 PART II. 
 
 SPEED PRACTICE. 
 
 21 1. Presuming thai the student has followed the advice 
 given on page 108, and is able to write about sixty words 
 per minute, he should now commence the study and prac- 
 tice of ilie "Reporting" or Abbreviated Style of Pho- 
 nography. A speed of sixty words per minute may be 
 attained by any person of ordinary capacity and manual 
 dexterity in from three to four months, by practising a 
 few hours daily. To write at the rate necessary to report 
 an address deliberately uttered, will require a longer 
 period of time and the employment of additional princi- 
 ple of ril >]>i-c \ ial ion. 
 
 2 1 2. The secret of rapid writing may be said to consist in 
 two things, practice, and the use of judicious abbreviations. 
 The student must furnish the first requisite ; and for the 
 second, he will find in the following pages the most efficient 
 help that over fifty years' experience of the most skilful 
 phonographers can supply. Of these two essentials the 
 greater is practice, by dint of which alone, in the full 
 style of Phonography, illustrated in the precediug pages, 
 
 100 words per minute may be written. As the greal 
 Grecian orator, when asked what was the most important 
 requisite in elocution, said, " Delivery," | meaning t hereby 
 not merely attitude and evsture, but the correct utter- 
 ance of every word, attention to emphasis, tone, inflec- 
 tions, pauses, etc..) and when asked what was the next 
 essential, replied. ''Delivery," and still gave the same 
 answer to the query as to the third essential in the art — 
 so we may say of " that much-coveted art by which the
 
 116 SPEED PRACTICE. 213-215 
 
 orator's eloquence is caught in its impassioned torrent, 
 and fixed upon paper, as a picture of his rich and glowing 
 mind," the first, the second, and the last essential is, 
 practice, practice, PRACTICE. 
 
 213. There is, however, a practice that will hinder the 
 student instead of forwarding him. This is the habit of 
 writing carelessly in order to gain speed. Badly formed 
 characters become illegible, and speed without legibility 
 is worthless. The student should never let his desire to 
 write swiftly overcome his determination to write cor- 
 rectly. The same rule holds in shorthand as in long- 
 hand : he who first learns to write well, may, in course of 
 time, write both well and quickly; whereas he who aims 
 first at swiftness, regardless of accuracy, will never 
 write well; and though he may learn to write quickly, lie 
 will not be aide to read what he has written with rapidity 
 and certainty; and if he cannot do this, he might almost 
 as well not write at all. 
 
 214. Mere copying from a book is worth little as re- 
 porting practice. The best practice is that of writing 
 from another person's reading. An hour's practice in 
 this manner is better than several hours' copying from 
 a book. The reader should read as slowly as the writer 
 requires; and, if a useful and interesting book lie chosen, 
 the practice may lie made beneficial to both. 
 
 21.1. In choosing matter for dictation practice, regard 
 Should, of course, be paid to the particular purpose for 
 
 which the art is being acquired. A book of commercial 
 
 letters and luisiness forms* will provide the most advan- 
 tageous practice for the young shorthand correspondent ; 
 the private secretary should select such works as are 
 likely l<> prove useful in his daily work; and the embryo 
 
 *" Business Correspondence in Shorthand," containing actual letters 
 dictated in American business offices. Keyed in ordinary type, and mat- 
 i.i divided into sections for testing of speed in shorthand or typewriting. 
 io pages In cover. Price, 80 cent-. Isaac Pitman A: Sons. 33 Union 
 Square, New York.
 
 216-21? SPEED PRACTICE. 117 
 
 reporter should follow the dictation of speeches, lectures, 
 and parliamentary debates. In tins way the beginner 
 will accustom himself to the language he will hear when 
 professionally engaged. 
 
 21G. It is sometimes difficult to find a friend who will 
 patiently undertake the office of reader, but an intelligent 
 boy or girl can generally be obtained; who, for a trifling 
 remuneration, will gladly read for an hour or two daily. 
 If a Stenographer's Association or School of Shorthand is 
 within reach, the student will probably find there suitable 
 facilities for dictation practice at different rates of speed. 
 
 217. Wlien the student can follow a reader at from 80 
 to 100 words per minute, he can attempt note taking in 
 public. Slow preachers afford the best practice to the 
 sindent ; rapidly-delivered sermons, especially when read, 
 are very trying to the inexperienced reporter. At the 
 outset of his practice, the writer will, of course, be unable 
 to keep up with a fast speaker; many, indeed, in their 
 firsl attempts, despair of ever being able to accomplish 
 the task. A few trials, however, will render the labor 
 less irksome, and increase the speed of the writer. The 
 object, at first, should not be to write as rapidly as pos- 
 sible, but rather to take down only so much of what is 
 said as can be readily deciphered afterwards. The young 
 reporter should be cautioned against leaving off writing 
 ie the middle of the sentence, and commencing another 
 with tiie speaker. His object should be to secure as 
 many complete sentences as possible. If necessary, these 
 may be curtailed, to enable the writer to keep up with 
 the speaker, and to preserve the drift of his discourse. 
 Where only detached words and parts of sentences are 
 written, no sense can be made of the report, but if care 
 lie taken to put down as much as possible of the sense of 
 the speaker, the mind will be called into more active 
 exercise, and the art of verbatim reporting will be more 
 speedily attained. If there are no other opportunities
 
 118 SPEED PRACTICE. 218-219 
 
 for practice, the phonograph er may sometimes write 
 down t lie conversation of those around him, or at least 
 as much as he can catch. This, however, is the most 
 difficult of all kinds of reporting, as the conversational 
 style is excessively rapid, (though it may not appear so,) 
 and the writer is often puzzled by several persons speak- 
 ing at the same time. In reporting speeches, the writer 
 should accustom himself to be several words behind the 
 speaker. With rapid speakers he will often be neces- 
 sarily behind, and, if he has not accustomed himself to 
 be so in his usual reporting, he will find some difficulty 
 in recovering lost ground. A practised writer should be 
 able, in an emergency, to write twelve or fifteen words 
 behind the speaker. 
 
 218. The writing should not be too large; and outlines 
 that check the hand, and therefore lead to loss of time, 
 should be avoided. No exact size of the shorthand char- 
 acters can be prescribed for all. No one style of writing 
 suits all alike; some find it easier to write the characters 
 small and neatly, while others, with a freer hand, are 
 more at ease in writing large, and with less regard to 
 exactness of outline. There is a general tendency among 
 beginners to increase the size of their outlines as they 
 increase their speed, and to run into an awkward and 
 "sprawling" style. This tendency should be resisted. 
 The writer, if he is careful, will soon ascertain what size 
 suits his style best, but, as a general rule, it may be said 
 that the lines of a note-book .") inches wide, should not 
 
 contain less than an average of twelve words, or more 
 than an average of t wenty. 
 
 219. The mind and the hand of the phonographic stu- 
 dent should lie constantly engaged in forming and writ 
 ing outlines, and as they are mentally conceived the hand 
 can trace thein on imaginary paper. The follow Jul;' plan 
 
 has been recommended for this kind of practice: Take 
 an\ interesting book, and with a blunt-pointed piece of
 
 220-201 WRITING MATERIALS. 119 
 
 wood, or the end of a penholder, trace the shorthand 
 outlines for the words as they are read, under them 
 or on the opposite page. A better plan is to take a 
 book, the pages of which have a wide margin, and, while 
 reading, write the words in shorthand on the margin 
 of either side, or under the lines, placing a tick in the 
 margin whenever a difficult word occurs, and consulting 
 the Shorthand Dictionary * at the end of the practice. 
 
 220. It should always be remembered that facility in 
 reading is as essential as rapidity in writing; the latter, 
 indeed, is worth nothing without the former. Everything 
 that is written should be read afterwards, and all the 
 errors carefully marked, so that they may be avoided in 
 future; if necessary, the words maybe more fully voca- 
 lized, so as to render the notes easily decipherable at any 
 distance of time. The notes should also be occasionally 
 written out in longhand, for practice in easy and rapid 
 transcription. 
 
 WRITING MATERIALS. 
 
 221. The importance of suitable writing materials for 
 aote-taking cannot be over-estimated. No shorthand 
 writer should ever trust to chance supplies of pencils, 
 pens, ink, or paper, but should make a careful selection, 
 and take care to be well equipped for any professional 
 work he may undertake. For all descriptions of note- 
 taking, the pen is more suitable than the pencil, on 
 account of the permanence and superior legibility of the 
 notes, both important considerations when the transcript 
 is undertaken. A suitable pen is also far less fatiguing 
 to the note-taker than a pencil, a great advantage when 
 writing for a lengthened period. But, as it sometimes 
 
 * A Phonographic Dictionary of the English Language ; Containing the 
 Shorthand Forms for 55,000 Words, and 5,000 Proper Names. Sixth edi- 
 tion. 300 pages, crown 8vo, handsome cloth binding. Price, Si. 25 ; 
 "Library Edition," half roan, beveled boards, gilt, $1.50. 1-aac Pit- 
 man & Sons. 33 Union Square. Now York.
 
 120 WRITING MATERIALS. 222 
 
 happens that the use of a pen is undesirable or impos- 
 sible, the note-taker should accustom himself occasion- 
 ally to report with a pencil. In order to be prepared for 
 any unforeseen difficulty or accident, the phonographer 
 should never be without a case of thoroughly good lead 
 pencils, sharpened ready for immediate use. The pencil 
 should be used in preference to the pen for note-taking 
 in the open air in wet weather, or when writing in semi- 
 darkness, as at illustrated lectures. These remarks apply 
 chiefly to public note-taking; for office note-taking, 
 which is not done under such exacting conditions, the 
 shorthand writer will find that ordinary pens and ink fur- 
 nish satisfactory writing materials. 
 
 222. Fountain pens have of late come into general use 
 among shorthand writers in the law courts and reporters 
 for the press. The fountain pen should be provided with 
 a thoroughly strong and flexible nib. During rapid note- 
 taking the strain on a nib is very considerable. If it is 
 stiff and unyielding, the labor of note-taking is seriously 
 increased, and, on the other hand, if it is not a strong 
 pen, it may speedily become useless. For these reasons 
 a fountain pen with a gold nib is strongly recom- 
 mended, and the shorthand writer who lias one thor- 
 oughly suited to his hand will possess the best writing 
 instrument it is possible to have. Some shorthand writers 
 prefer an ordinary penholder with gold nib, and a pocket 
 inkstand, and, where they are always certain of the ac- 
 commodation of a table, the arrangement is a good one. 
 Here again a word of caution may be given as to ink- 
 stands, many pocket inkstands being entirely unsuited 
 for constant use. For note-taking, paper with a smooth, 
 hard surface, not too highly glazed, will be found most 
 suitable. The elastic bound books which open llat on 
 the desk are the best, though the note-books bound in 
 the CUStomar; way are suitable tor ordinary work. For 
 a list of approved fountain pens, inkstands, ink, note-
 
 223-224 WRITING MATERIALS. 121 
 
 books, etc., the shorthand writer is referred to the Cata- 
 logue at the end of this volume 
 
 223. The phonographer may write steadily on the knee 
 by placing aboard about sixteen or eighteen inches long, 
 five inches broad, and {j inch thick, under his reporting 
 book. This portable writing desk, as it may be called, 
 supports the weight of the upper half of the note-book 
 when open, which, otherwise, drops inconveniently over 
 the knee. 
 
 224. Much time is sometimes lost in turning over the 
 leaves of note-books. The following plan is perhaps the 
 best that can be adopted: — While writing on the upper 
 half of the leaf, introduce the second finger of the left 
 hand between it and the next leaf, keeping the leaf which 
 is being written on steady by the first linger and thumb. 
 While writing on the lower part of the page shift the 
 leaf by degrees, till it is about half way up the book : 
 when it is convenient, lift up the first finger and thumb, 
 and the leaf will turn over almost by itself. This is the 
 best plan when writing on a desk or table. When writing 
 on the knee, (lie firsl linger should be introduced instead 
 of the second, and the leaf be shifted up only about two 
 inches. The finger should be introduced at the first 
 pause the speaker makes, or at any other convenient op- 
 portunity that presents itself. Other shorthand writers 
 adopt another method of turning the leaves. They take 
 hold of the bottom left-hand corner of the leaf with t he 
 finger and thumb, and on reaching the bottom line the 
 leaf is lifted and turned over. Some reporters prefer a 
 reporting book that opens as a printed hook dors. In 
 this case there is less difficulty in turning over the leaves 
 with the left hand. Whichever form of book is used. 
 the writer should confine himself to cur side of the paper 
 till the end of the book is readied, and then, turning it 
 over, begin at the other end, and write in the same man- 
 ner on the blank pages.
 
 122 PHRASEOGRAPHY. 225-226 
 
 PHRASEOGRAPHY. 
 
 225. It is not necessary that the Lists of words aud 
 phrases that follow should be written out before com- 
 mencing practice, but they should all be copied at as 
 early a period as possible. A good method of doing this 
 is to get a book of ruled paper, and write out the several 
 contractions and phrases, one on each line, at the left- 
 hand side of the page. Each phrase and contraction 
 should then be copied over and over again. By persever- 
 ing in this way they will become indelibly fixed in the 
 mind, and facility in writing them will be attained. The 
 Exercises at the end of this book should be written from 
 dictation till a speed of 120 or 150 words per minute has 
 been acquired. 
 
 220. The student will derive considerable assistance 
 from an extensive and judicious use of Phraseography. 
 This branch of reporting practice is fully dealt with in 
 the " Phonographic Phrase Book," which is recommended 
 to the reader's attention as soon as he has mastered the 
 principles of the art as here explained. From the pre- 
 face to the "Phrase Book" we quote the following 
 
 remarks on the advantage which a judicious employment 
 
 of phraseography secures : " Phraseography maybe re- 
 garded as an ars iu<irl<, lan art .wit bin an art . ) ami it. 
 requires some special attention and practice before ii 
 
 can he judiciously used. It is chiefly useful in reporting, 
 where the least saving of time in writing is often of the 
 greatest importance ; il need not, however, be confined 
 
 to this bianch of Phonography, but may frequently be 
 used in the Corresponding Style, for, with very little 
 practice on the pari of the reader, the phraseographic 
 combinations are found to be as legible as ordinary Pho-
 
 PHRASEOGR \i'!IV. 123 
 
 nograpby. Indeed, Ave think that when combinations are 
 
 well chosen, and correctly written, the words are more 
 easily read when united than when written separately. 
 There is something characteristic about a phraseogram, 
 which usually distinguishes it, from single words ; and 
 the very compactness of its form enables the eye to de- 
 cipher it in less time than would he required to take in 
 several separate words, which occupy so much more 
 space. In the one case the eye rests upon a single out- 
 line, and in the other it has perhaps to travel over half a 
 line before it can seethe whole phrase. The phraseogram 
 will most probably be written more carefully than the 
 separate words, as it requires less time. More space is 
 saved by phraseography than would be imagined ; and if 
 the characters employed are carefully formed, they are 
 as legible as they arc compact and brief."' Ask any ex- 
 perienced phonographer whether he would rather read 
 the following sentence thus : — 
 
 v ~ J „ r \ H , r^ ( 
 s N '^ ° \ V 
 
 or grouped in a few compact phraseographic forms, thus: 
 
 r> /\ ^ j- % 
 
 In this, as in many other instances which mighl be given, 
 
 a marked benefit accrues both to the reader and the 
 writer from the use of Phraseography. 
 
 *The "Phonographic Phrase Book," containing above two thousand 
 useful phrases in Phonography, with a Key in the ordinary type, and an 
 Exercise on all the Phrases. 132 pages Price, 85c; cloth, 5<ic. I-:ui<- 
 Pitman & son-. 83 Union Square, New York.
 
 124 WRITING IN POSITION. 227-229 
 
 WRITING IN POSITION. 
 
 227. When writing rapidly it is impossible to insert 
 many vowels. If the position of a consonant outline indi- 
 cates the vowel or principal vowel of the word, it can be 
 easily read. A word containing only one or two consonant 
 strokes, whether full-length or half-length, is usually 
 written in position, as determined by its vowel, or ac- 
 cented vowel. (See page 96.) Position need not he 
 observed with respect to most words containing three or 
 more consonants. 
 
 228. The student has hitherto written all words on 
 the line, except those grammalogues that go above 
 or THROUGH the line. lie should now begin to write 
 in POSITION all words that contain only one stroke, 
 and most words that consist of two strokes, and bring 
 into use the list of Reporting Grammalogues given on 
 pages 12S-129. 
 
 229. A word formed by a horizontal and a down or up 
 stroke, has its position determined by the down or up 
 stroke. "When a word consisting of an initial horizontal 
 letter and a downstroke is placed in the ii rst position, 
 the initial letter must be written a little higher than 
 usual to accommodate itself to the position of the fol- 
 lowing stroke; and when placed in third position, the 
 initial letter must be written a little lower than usual; 
 thus, I gaudy, <■<,<!,, i giddy. In words in 
 which an initial horizontal letter is followed by an up- 
 stroke, the initial letter is written lower than usual for 
 first position, and below the line for the third position; 
 
 thus, / mil,, , male, mini. Derivative 
 
 words should commence in the same place, with re- 
 port to the line, as their primitives; as, care 
 
 (grammalogue), e careful, sir, °~i> xi,rtcni, ■ > si.rfy.
 
 230-286 writing in msiTioN. 125 
 
 230. Double-length perpendicular strokes and 
 straighl sloping down-strokes take only the third posi- 
 tion, through the line; as, ._\_ ponder, -N^- plun- 
 der, pounder, ••••■-- tender, --)-- ((sunder. A double- 
 length curved sloping stroke, or a straight upstroke, 
 can be written in the three positions; as, _v~_ father, 
 _V_ fetter, \ future; .... hitter, L...... letter, 
 
 .,^77- litter ; <£_. wander, c^<^. wonder, ..y? winter. A 
 double-length horizontal stroke takes only two posi- 
 tion-,, VBOVE and on the line ('par. 189). 
 
 231. Words that contain only horizontal and half- 
 sized letters, and an accented third-place vowel, as en,,/,-. 
 king, antique, cubed, canoe, music, are written on the 
 line, in accordance with paragraph 189. On unruled 
 paper the third position for horizontals and half- 
 sized letters, cannot he distinguished from the second, 
 unless the words he written so low as to interfere with 
 the characters in the line beneath. 
 
 232. The rides as to position should not be applied to 
 such words as have outlines of their mm, (no other words 
 being written by the same consonant skeleton form.) 
 because the inconvenience in writing words like derive, 
 dogmatic, Trafalgar, etc.. in the first position, and disci- 
 pline, newspaper, Peterborough, etc.. in the third position, 
 in accordance with their accented vowels, would not lie 
 compensated by greater ease in reading. 
 
 233. In words having a vowel before and after a single 
 consonant, both should be written if possible; if only 
 one can be written, the most prominent one will afford 
 
 the best clue to the word; thus. \ obey, , <rl,,,. 
 
 In words containing two or more consonants and vowels. 
 the initial or final vowel, whether accented or not, 
 usually affords the greatest facility in reading; as, 
 
 L^ atom, I attack, ^-v emollient, VC pillow, [\_ lady.
 
 126 EXERCISE OX WRITIXG IX POSITION. 
 
 This rule does not apply to outlines in which the method 
 of writing the first or last consonant indicates a pre- 
 ceding or following vowel ; as, ~\_ erect, /~ react, 
 
 ) n esculent, ~\_ argued, /~ rugged, f- fail, \f~ follow. 
 
 Exercise: 62. 
 
 Tht words in italics are to be written in position, above, on, 
 or through the line; words not in italic* arc Ghrammalogues. 
 1'h is and the following Ext rcises should be practised until they 
 can be written at 100 words per minute. 
 
 If you (h sire to write at a high rate, you must read and mas- 
 ter the rules so as to follow them fully, and be able to apply 
 them on all occasions. I feci that you cannot fail to fall into 
 the true and proper way if you will only try. The race is to the 
 sure and not to the strong. Do not tarry by the way. Re- 
 member the fable of the feeble tortoise that outstripped the 
 /////■«. Master one thing at ixtime. and you are awe to win. 
 Set apart ior study a smallportion of each day. I fave patience; 
 Rome was not />«?'// in a day. //'///' fttZ?* arow teas as we 
 ascend them. That which is lightly a< t is little rain, it. If you 
 would get gold, you must dig deeply : it is not dug on the sw- 
 /ace. Please note thai the rw?e oi position applies chiefly to 
 short words, and. thai the pfoce or position otlong words is 
 generally on the line. /.</ your letters be »eai and light; a 
 large and heavy stylt wastes time. StUlyou must not wm7< 
 too small. The bestplan is to '■"/>// the plain models in the 
 " Phonetic Journal. Tah care thai your outlines arc /n-/7 
 spaced. Crowded writing is nol easy to /cr/. 1'akeposses- 
 sionot these //////* withoul opposition. They are mean I for 
 you. It is my intention to maAre you a good writer. Keep 
 
 your outlines near t lie ///c. 1 >o not ?ea« loo lieaeili/ OD the 
 
 </r.s/.'. A', ep your "v/V up and resi <»n the middle of the "/•//>. 
 This is a matter upon which you will do ireZZ to pander with 
 care. The line upon which you wnYe is & royal road along 
 
 which iri/i a a/V< / pi // can hare/ in _/?ne .v //,7c. It is enjoyable 
 
 to /'v//rA a pen ////al'ii-ra good speaker. Sec how it keeps pace 
 with the steady flow of words, and stopssA a women lory pause 
 
 Marl* how the nimble steji inert as, 8 to a //W, breaks in/a a 
 
 ea nter. loiters, makes another pau8( ; ai ' £Aen, as if suddenly 
 
 taking leaee of reason, goes raring aieaij in a mad mooil. with 
 /iv///.s- and bounds, for xd'ir/ ///'r, /V/.v a liiinlnl iln r In for, the 
 
 hounds [ daresay that you will smile al my choice of simile, 
 but you will, if you choose, know the excitement of the elms,.
 
 234-235 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 127 
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 234. The following list of words contains only 26 
 additional grammalogues that need be committed to 
 memory : 18 of these are contracted, belief-ve, Christian- 
 ity, generation, glory-ify-Jied, holy, itself, larger, liberty, 
 
 outfit, religion, religious, Sttrioitr, Scripture, signify, speak, 
 special, strength, whither; and 8 are exceptional as to posi- 
 tion, approve, house, met, most, oiring, sent, thus, ye. All 
 the other words, such as see, thy, etc., are single-stroke 
 OUTLINES that express all the consonants of the word, 
 PLACED IN POSITION, except approve, not. most, oiring, 
 sent, and thus, placed OUT OP POSITION to prevent their 
 
 clashing with prove, meet, must, young, send, this; and 
 house, ye, written on the line for convenience. Of the 
 irregular grammalogues as regards position. 7 of the Cor- 
 responding Style Grammalogues, and :! of the Reporting 
 Grammalogues, contain the vowel oh, and are placed in 
 the first position, instead of the second, to accommodate 
 other words that musl be written on the line. They are: — 
 ago, don't, go, more, most. Of owing, over, those, though. 
 
 2o.">. The past tense of a verb thai LS expressed by a 
 logogram, or by a contracted outline, may usually be 
 written in the same way as the present tense; thus, the 
 logogram \ l>r. may represent both remember and 
 remembered, /\ represent and represented. When the 
 writer thinks that possibly kitiikr tense might be 
 read, the sign of the past tense, d, may be added sepa- 
 rately, or the word may be written in full; thus. — I or 
 
 < __/ v glorified. Logograms that represent the whole 
 of the consonants in a word, should be shortened for the 
 past tense; as, c — aire. _ cared; ~ call, '_ called; 
 | ><U. p told; c — equal, = equalled.
 
 128 
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 ARRANGED PHONETICALLY. 
 
 CONSONANTS 
 
 \ 1 happy, 2 up, 3 put 
 \ 1 happen, 2 upon 
 
 ^ 1 happened 
 <\ 3 principle, principal 
 
 \ 1 particular. 2 opportu- 
 1 approve | nity. 
 
 \ 1 
 \= 2 
 
 \ 2 
 
 \2 
 s 2 
 \ 1 
 
 r 2 
 
 by, 2 be, 3 to be 
 above 
 been 
 
 able, 3 belief, believe-d 
 build-ing, able to 
 liberty, '2 member, re- 
 member-ed. 3number-ed 
 
 at, 2 it, 3 out 
 
 itself 
 
 at all, 2 tell, 3 till 
 
 told, till it 
 
 truth, 3 true 
 
 i ried, '-2 toward, trade 
 
 out of 
 
 J 1 
 
 had, 2 do, 3 different 
 did [-ence 
 
 advantage, ■'> difficult 
 
 done, :! down 
 
 had not, do not, don't. 
 
 •2 did not 
 Dr., 2 dear, 3 during 
 deliver-ed-y 
 niiicli, 2 winch. 3 eai h 
 which have 
 child 
 
 chair, :'. cheer 
 
 large 
 
 religious 
 
 general-ly, 3 religion 
 
 gentleman, 2 gentlemen 
 
 larger 
 
 generation 
 
 - 1 can, 2 come 
 
 1 quite, 2 could 
 3 1 because 
 
 1 cannot, 2 account 
 
 1 call, 2 equably 
 
 1 called. 2 cold, equalled 
 
 1 Christian. Christianity. 
 2 care 
 
 1 according,according to, 
 cart. 2 cared 
 
 go, ago, 2 give-n 
 God, 2 good 
 glory, glorify-ied 
 
 gold' 
 
 guard, 2 great 
 
 1 half, 2 if 
 1 alter. 2 if it 
 
 1 often, 2 Phonography 
 
 2 for 
 
 from 
 
 have 
 
 heaven 
 
 over, 2 ever-y 
 
 very, 3 however 
 
 evil 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 thank-ed, 2 think 
 thought [3 you! h 
 
 through 
 
 third" 
 
 though, thy. 'J them, 
 that. 2 without [they 
 those, thyself, 2 this, 
 
 :: thus, these, youths 
 t hemselves 
 within 
 other 
 
 there, their, they are 
 therefore
 
 REPORTING (MtAMMALOGUES. 
 
 129 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ) 
 
 2 
 
 ol 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 \ 
 
 2 
 
 •\ 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 o— 
 
 1 
 
 o_ 
 
 1 
 
 L2 
 
 o. 1 
 
 lias, as, 2 his, is 
 
 so, us, 3 see, use (mottfa | 
 
 as is this, or has), has 
 
 his, -J is as, {or his), his is 
 
 first 
 
 special-ly, 3 speak 
 
 spirit 
 
 strength 
 
 Scripture ; a- 2 secret 
 
 signify-ied, significant 
 
 several, Saviour [-ance 
 
 scut ; q, 2 send 
 2 somewhat 
 
 2 was, 3 whose, use (verb) 
 2~ 
 3 
 1 
 
 1 in, any, 2no, know, 3 own 
 
 ~ 1 not, 2 nature 
 
 w 1 hand, 2 under 
 
 -'■' 1 information, 2 nation 
 v - p 1 influence 
 --» 2 opinion 
 =-^ 1 nor, 2 near 
 
 _ I language, owino-, 
 2 thing, 3 young 
 
 f 3 Lord 
 
 1 light, 2 let 
 
 r 
 
 sliali, sliall, :J wish 
 
 sure 
 
 short 
 
 j 2 usual-ly ; ) 2 pleasure 
 
 1 me, my, 2 him, may. 
 1 might, met, 2 meet-ing 
 1 myself, 2 himself 
 1 most, 2 must 
 1 important-ance, 2 iui- 
 prove-ed-ment. 
 
 1 impossible, 2 improve- 
 
 ments 
 
 2 may not, amount 
 
 - 1 more, remark-ed, 
 2 Mr. mere 
 
 "M 
 ^2 
 
 ■> 1 
 
 -> 1 
 
 or, 2 your, 3 year 
 are, 3 our, hour 
 art 
 
 yard, 2 word 
 
 cS 2 we, way, away 
 " 2 wait, weight 
 </* 2 one 
 
 ^ 1 want, 2 went, won't 
 C 2 will, well 
 
 
 whether, 3 whither 
 while 
 
 ^2 
 
 „^2 
 
 ye ; <r 2 yet 
 yes 
 
 / 1 
 ^2 
 
 high 
 
 holy 
 house 
 
 Vowels. 
 
 Dots, a, an, • the, ah! . aye, eh? 
 
 N I / 
 
 Dashes. of, on, and 
 
 \ i / 
 
 all, (>, OD ! OWe, awe, onghl 
 
 x fro, i but, / should 
 
 \ two, loo, i he. , who 
 
 When I he and I did follow each 
 other, vocalize I Sid, 
 
 9 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 
 t * L 
 
 I. eve, ay, ,\ how, why, 
 
 With, c When, what, ;> would, 
 
 beyond, n you. 
 
 In I'hraseopraphy mi, 'ind (written 
 upward i. hui, are used ouly Initially, 
 and medial, is, - or
 
 130 
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. 
 
 A or an, * 1 
 able, bl 2 
 able to, bid 2 
 above, bv 2 
 according, fcrt 1 
 according to, krl 1 
 account, Tent 2 
 advantage, dr 2 
 after,// 1 
 ago, q 1 
 ah ! ; 1 
 all, N 1 
 
 amount, mnt 2 
 an, • ] 
 
 and, / (up) 1 
 any, n 1 
 approve, prv 1 
 art, rt (down) 1 
 are, r (up) 2 
 as, s (circle) 1 
 as has, (large cir.) 1 
 as his, (large cir.) 1 
 as is, (large cir.) 1 
 at, / 1 
 at all, // 1 
 away, w 2 
 awe, ' 1 
 ay, (ai, yes) /■ 1 
 aye, (ever) . 2 
 Be, b 2 
 because, ks 1 
 been, bn 2 
 
 belief, bl 8 
 
 believe, bl 3 
 believed, bl 3 
 
 bej "nil, n l 
 build, bid 2 
 building, bid 2 
 but, I 2 
 by, b 1 
 Call, II 1 
 called, kid i 
 can, /• l 
 cannot, hat 1 
 care, kr 2 
 cared, krd 2 
 curl. /./■/ I 
 
 chair, <■///■ 2 
 cheer, chrS 
 
 child, »•///</ 1 
 Christian {.adj.), kr 1 
 Christianity, kr 1 
 cold, £/d 2 
 come, k 2 
 could, jfcd 2 
 Dear, dr 2 
 deliver-ed-y, dl2 
 did, oW 2 
 did not, dnt 2 
 difference, c/ 3 
 different, d 3 
 difficult, <//■' 3 
 do, rf 2 
 do not, (/id 1 
 Doctor, dr 1 
 done, dn 2 
 down, dn. 3 
 during, dr 3 
 Each, c/i 3 
 eh? -2 
 equal-ly, kl 2 
 equalled, //</ 2 
 ever-y, vr 2 (1, curve) 
 evil, vlZ 
 eye, v 1 
 
 First, st (loop) 2 
 Cor,/r2 (left curve) 
 from,//' 2 (r. curve) 
 General, ,/'// 2 
 generally, jn 2 
 generation, ,/sAn, 2 
 
 g( ntlcman, ,/'/*/ 1 
 
 gentlemen, ,//// 2 
 give-n, f/ 2 
 glorified, gl 2 
 
 glorify, f //2 
 glory, r// 2 
 
 go, r/ 1 
 God, gd l 
 
 gold, gld 2 
 
 g 1, (jd 2 
 
 great, r/r/2 
 guard, prd I 
 Ibid, (/ 1 
 hud DOt, did 1 
 
 half,/] 
 
 hand, ml 1 
 
 happen, />/< l 
 
 happened, pnd 1 
 happy, p 1 
 
 has, s (circle i 1 
 has his, (large cir.) 1 
 have, v2 
 he, i 2 
 
 heaven, vn 2 
 high, h (down) 1 
 him, in 2 
 himself, ms 2 
 his, x (circle) 2 
 his is, (large cir.) 2 
 holy, A (up) 2 
 hour, r(up) 3 
 house, hs (up) 2 
 how, A 2 
 
 however, w 3 (r. cur.) 
 I, v l 
 if, f2 
 if it, ft 2 
 
 importance, »ip 1 
 important, mp 1 
 impossible, mps 1 
 improve, mp 2 
 improved, //;/< 2 
 improvement, mp 2 
 improvements, mp« 2 
 in, n 1 
 
 influence, ns l 
 information, «sA« l 
 
 is, g icircle) 2 
 is as. (large circle) 2 
 is bis, (large circle) 2 
 it, t 2 
 itself, to 8 
 Know, ii 2 
 Language, hq 1 1 
 large, j 1 
 larger,,/'/ - 1 
 
 let, Ii 2 
 
 liberty, br 1 
 light,"// 1 
 Lord,/ 2 
 May, m 2 
 may not, ?««/ 2 
 me, in 1 
 meet, nd 2 
 meeting, •//</ 2 
 member, lir 2
 
 REPORTING GRAMMALOGUES. 
 
 131 
 
 mere, m/' 2 
 met, mt l 
 might, mt 1 
 more, mr l 
 most, mst 1 
 Mr, mr 2 
 much, ch 1 
 my, //< l 
 myself, ids 1 
 Nation, rc«A/a 2 
 nature, nt 2 
 near, ///• 2 
 no, n 2 
 nor, in- 1 
 not, n< l 
 number-ed, br 3 
 O, 1 
 of, n 1 
 
 often, fn 1 
 
 oh, II 
 
 on, i 1 
 
 one, an 2 
 
 opinion, ran 2 
 opportunity, /)// 2 
 or, r (down i l 
 other, thr2 
 ought, / 1 
 our, ■;• (up) 3 
 out, / 3 
 out of, to 3 
 over, vr 1 
 owe, I l 
 owing, >ig 1 
 own, ii 3 
 Particular, jtrt 1 
 Phonography,./^ - 
 pleasure, zhr 2 
 principal, pr 3 
 principle, pr 3 
 put, y; 3 
 Quite, £/ 1 
 Religion, jn 3 
 religious, ;g :! 
 remark ed. inrl 
 
 remember, br 2 
 
 remembered, &/• 2 
 Saviour, ge '.' 
 Scripture, skr 1 
 
 secret, fkrt 2 
 see, «3 (stroke 
 send, gntf2 
 
 sent, g«.< 1 
 several, sv 2 
 shall, *// 2 
 shalt, ,?A2 
 short, >■///■/ 1 
 should, ' (up) 2 
 signiflcanl ce, sg l 
 signified, sg l 
 signify, ggr 1 
 SO, s 2 (stroke) 
 somewhat, smt 2 
 speak, gp 3 
 specially, ty>2 
 spirit, */«•/ 2 
 strength, str 2 
 sure, gAr 3 
 Tell, «2 
 thank ed. tli 1 
 that. tht\ 
 the, . 2 
 their, $7-2 
 them, /// 2 
 themselves, thss 2 
 there.////' 2 
 therefore. \ 
 
 these. //,,<;! ' 
 they. /// 2 
 
 they are. tin- 2 
 thing, //// 2 
 think, tii 2 
 third, tli/// 2 
 this. ths2 
 ill"-.'. ///< 1 
 though, tli 1 
 thought, th/ 1 
 through, tlw-3 
 thus, tin 3 
 thy, //i 1 
 thyself, ths 1 
 till,// 3 
 till it, tit 2 
 to, \ 2 
 to be, b 3 
 told. //// 2 
 too, \2 
 
 toward, /r(/ 2 
 
 tried, /;•// 1 
 
 true, trS 
 
 truth, //• 2 
 
 two, \ 2 
 
 Under, nd 2 
 
 up, p2 
 
 upon, //// 3 
 
 us, x2 
 
 use (noun), g 3 
 
 use (verb), z 3 
 
 usually, -// 2 
 
 Very, vr 2 (r. curve) 
 
 Wait, ict 2 
 
 want, wnt 1 
 
 was, s 2 
 
 way, w 2 
 
 we, "• 2 
 
 weight, «•< 2 
 
 well, wl2 
 
 went. /'7// 2 
 
 what, 3 1 
 
 when, c 2 
 
 whether, u 7/ 2 
 
 which, era 2 
 
 which have, cAt) 2 
 
 while, /c/i/ 1 
 
 whither, irli 3 
 
 who, ' 2 
 
 whose, z 3 
 
 why, l l 
 
 will. wl2 
 
 wish, g/] 3 
 
 with, c i 
 
 within, t/ui 3 
 
 without, /A/ 2 
 
 won't, ir nt 2 
 
 word, / // 2 
 
 would, ' 2 
 
 Yard, rd 1 
 
 ye, y 2 
 
 year. /• (down) 3 
 
 yes, y$ 2 
 
 yet. /// 2 
 
 you, - 2 
 
 young, ////3 
 
 your, /■ (down) 2 
 
 youth, th3 
 
 It assists in the reading of Phonography if the final vowel of — '■ any be 
 inserted. Own I n . so »a sn I, young ng), may be written okdbb the lixe, 
 the ends of the letter touching the line, to distinguish these words from no. 
 sin, thing. Vocalize , j notion lest It should be read as nation or opinion.
 
 132 SIGNIFICANT MARKS. 236->:!'.t 
 
 SIGNIFICANT MARKS. 
 
 236. When the reporter is uncertain whether he has 
 
 written the proper word, not having heard it distinctly, 
 he should draw a circle round the word, or place a cross 
 under it. If a word has been lost to the ear, a carei 
 should he made under t lie line to denote the omission. 
 If part of a sentence should be thus lost, the same mark 
 may lie made, and a space left proportioned to the num- 
 ber of words omitted. 
 
 237. A perpendicular mark in the left-hand margin 
 may be used to point out an important sentence or para- 
 graph, such as the heads, or the principal points, of a 
 speech, lecture, or address. This reference mark is use- 
 ful when a verbatim report is taken, and only a con- 
 deused report will lie required. 
 
 238. A quotation known to the reporter need not he 
 written at Length. The commencing and concluding 
 words, with a long- dash between, will be sufficient. The 
 letters rih (not heard) in longhand, may mean that, to 
 the extent of a sentence or more, the speaker was not 
 audible. 
 
 239. When reporting the examination of witnesses, 
 the name of each witness should form a fresh head- 
 ing and he written in longhand, the distinctive char- 
 acter of which increases the facility of reference to the 
 notes. The name of the examiner placed under that of 
 the witness may he written in Phonography. If (he 
 judge or other person interferes and asks a question, the 
 name of t lie interrupting party should precede the ques- 
 tion. If lie asks several questions, his name need not he 
 repeated after the first ; but care must he taken to inserl 
 the name of the original examiner when he resumes 
 his interrogations. When a document is put in, write 
 " document " between parentheses, thus, ( I _, ) When a 
 
 document is put in and read, write [ I /]
 
 240-242 TRANSCRIPTION. 133 
 
 240. A long dash may be employed to denote the repeti- 
 tion of certain words, instead of writing them every time 
 they occur, such as in the sentence, "Whatsoever things 
 
 are true, honest, just," etc , in Philippians 4. 8, 
 
 which is repeated six t imes. 
 
 241. Signs of approbation, dissent, etc., interjected by 
 the audience, or descriptive of their feelings, should be 
 enclosed between parentheses of a large size, ..S... 7iear, 
 
 "■^er" hear, hear, _, no, ^_^_> no, no, <i_a sensation, 
 ..„?„ applause, / chair, ...I., cheers, /A^^ laughter, 
 
 \s^ uproar, ^ hisses. In describing the kind of ap- 
 plause, laughter, etc., the adjective is written last when 
 reporting. Thus, what the reporter, when writing out 
 his notes, would describe as "loud and continued ap- 
 plause" would be written .. JS_. .^1_. L- < in reporting, for 
 
 he will not know that the applause is continued till it has 
 
 lasted for some time. 
 
 TRANSCRIPTION. 
 
 242. A shorthand writer should be able to make a ver- 
 batim transcript of his notes at the rate of from 20 to 30 
 words per minute. The secret of writing longhand 
 rapidly and legibly is to move the whole hand with each 
 stroke of the pen. Nearly all persons use the little finger 
 as a fixed prop, and in forming the letters move only the 
 first two fingers ami thumb ; when the fingers will 
 stretch no further the hand is shifted over a space of 
 from half-an-inch to an inch, three or four letters are 
 written, and the hand is again moved. The hand thus 
 makes a scries of jumps, and, unless slowly executed, the 
 
 writing generally shows great irregularity in the distance 
 and inclination of the letters. To write rapidly, and at 
 the same time well, the arm. hand, and lingers should 
 move simultaneously. The middle of the forearm should
 
 134 
 
 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE WORDS. 
 
 243 
 
 rest lightly on the table or desk; and the hand resting 
 lightly on the end of the outside edge of the little finger, 
 should glide over the surface of the paper as each letter 
 is formed. The wrist must not touch either the paper 
 or the desk. The pen should not, as a rule, be lifted 
 until each word is finished, and the writer should seek to 
 acquire such a command of hand that he could, if need- 
 ful, write a whole line of words (except the dotting of 
 i, j) without taking the pen off the paper. By using a 
 typewriter, a shorthand writer, provided that he is an 
 expert operator, can produce his transcript at a much 
 more rapid rate than by employing the pen. Still better 
 results may be attained by dictating notes to an expert 
 operator. 
 
 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE WORDS. 
 
 243. Negatives of words that begin with /, m, n, are 
 distinguished from the positive by repeating the first con- 
 sonant; thus, 
 
 I 
 
 legal 
 
 illegal f* 
 
 legible f] 
 
 illegible ^ 
 
 logical / 
 
 / 
 
 illogical i J — 
 
 material 
 
 immaterial 
 
 Words commencing with r follow the rule for upward 
 
 and downward r, without repeating the first consonant; 
 
 as, J resolute, \ irresolute; -^ respective, \^^ ir- 
 respective; -^ resistible, ( irresistible; ^ ° rele- 
 vant, V^° irrelevant. When this rule cannot be ob- 
 served, repeat?-; as /i rational, ""V* irrational. 
 
 moral 
 immoral ^-< 
 
 mortal <-~y' 
 immortal 
 noxious ^\y 
 innoxious ^~7 
 
 necessary ^j> / 
 unnecessary _^_cy
 
 EXERCISE ON POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE WORDS. 135 
 
 Exercise 63. 
 
 Morality has been the subject of much discussion. The 
 Moral Laws are thought by some to result from a natural 
 sense. They consider that we distinguish between right and 
 wrong respectively as we do between colors. Man would, they 
 believe, exercise this faculty irrespective of education ; its 
 possession distinguishing rational from irrational beings, and 
 those who are deficient in it being necessarily unnatural. 
 Those who follow this line of thought, produce a mass of evi- 
 dence in support of their theory, from which they draw many 
 logical and relevant conclusions. A second class of thinkers 
 aver that morality, as distinguished from immorality, is sim- 
 ply that line of conduct which the teaching of ages has shown 
 to be best for man. They hold that mortals are born with 
 little or no innate perception of right and wrong — that they 
 are in fact naturally immodest and evil — and that the mora' 
 sense depends upon education, and is independent of instinct, 
 and irrelevant to religion. In support of their position they 
 advance many irrefutable facts and what appear to be irre- 
 sistible arguments. They state that morality declines as we 
 descend the human scale, that what, is legal to savages is il- 
 legal to the race above, and that the mora! sense becomes liner 
 as the degrees of en ilization advance and education becomes 
 more liberal. Religious and reverent thinkers incline as a rule 
 to the first line of thought, and irreligious and irreverent to 
 the second, but many of the former may be said to be respon- 
 sible fora position of their own. They advance thai the moral 
 laws owe their origin to Revelation, and that the moral sense 
 is an immortal monitor. These thinkers are met by others 
 who declare that Revelation is irresponsible lor morality, and 
 that the illiterate Ulogically draw the immature conclusion 
 that, because certain precepts are true, the narrative in which 
 they are set must likewise; be beyond reproach. It is miner, s- 
 sary and immaterial to enter here into these questions. Let 
 us lead modest and irreproachable lives, and avoid illiberal 
 aud immoral thoughts.
 
 13G 
 
 OMISSION OF "CON" AND " COM " PREFIXES. 
 
 244 
 
 OMISSION OF CON AND COM PREFIXES. 
 
 244. The clot for the prefixes con, com, may sometimes 
 be omitted without danger of illegibility. In the follow- 
 ing words and a few others, the dot for the prefixes con 
 and com may generally be omitted with safety. 
 
 Combine a 
 
 combined 
 combination 'Vj? 
 commandment ]_, 
 communicate ^_^- 
 
 company \ , 
 
 comparative \^^ 
 comparatively ^ 
 complete <\ 
 compliment '\^ > 
 conceive .j?^ 
 coiiccni-ing ^ 
 
 concerned °i 
 conclude c_ 
 conclusion *—} 
 
 confidence ^ 
 conjecture / 
 
 conscience < /^ 
 
 J 
 
 conscientious 
 conscientiousness <^; 
 
 consciousness cj_y 
 consequence rjL -o 
 
 consequent &, 
 conservative 
 consider °j 
 considered 1 
 considerable J 
 consideration % 
 consist °! 
 consistence 1_p 
 consistency «— ^ 
 consistent \, 
 consonant o_~ 
 consonantal Q ~y 
 contemplate L— ^ 
 contemplation L-t 
 continual <y- 
 continue l_, 
 
 contracted I 
 
 contrariety |/| 
 contrary ]/ 
 
 convenience V^—P 
 
 com enient V>- 
 conversation V^
 
 omission of "con" and " com " prefixes. 137 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 In this age of political freedom, men combine with confi- 
 dence, and by continual efforts seek to promote the object for 
 which their combination is tunned. Jf unable to meet for 
 conversation, they can exchange views, by means of the 
 post, with comparative ease, and in comparatively little time 
 on the subject under consideration. After full contempla- 
 tion, and all to xh.e contrary having been urged, they can come 
 to a conclusion concerning any matter with great conveniens , 
 and without having to communicate personally. Even when 
 they do not conclude the discussion in which they are con- 
 cerned by this means, the consequence is not serious. Their 
 leaders have the consciousness that the subject is no longer one 
 of conjecture, and to a conscientious man this will give consid- 
 erable pleasure. It would he well if all leaders would do their 
 work with, conscientiousness, and remember that the public 
 contemplate with pleasure the consistent and continual dis- 
 charge of duty. They should keep before their conscience, 
 xaA ever consider the commandment, "Thou shalt not bear 
 false witness," and only bestow a compliment where they 
 conceive it can be given with consistency and is not in con- 
 trariety to the truth. If they do this, in whatever company 
 they find themselves, whether Conservative or Liberal, the 
 consequent result will be that they will continue to be consid- 
 ered men who will not utter a convenient falsehood, even 
 though their popularity should be contracted. As our country- 
 men admire consist, nc, iii this matter, it is difficult to under- 
 stand why they tolerate an alphabet, the consonant or conso- 
 nantal pari of which is so misleading. An alphabet should 
 con sis/ of letters each of which represen ts one sound only, and 
 should be & complete phonetic alphabet. Such an alphabet is 
 found in Phonography, and the consequence of the present 
 considerable study of the art by all classes must lead to a 
 
 consciousness of the convenience <>f an orthographic reform, 
 consistent with spoken sounds. Continual use renders 
 Englishmen less mindful than foreigners of the contrariety 
 of the ordinary spelling, hut if they give il quiel contempla 
 /ion, or engage in conversation about it. they will have less 
 confidence in the value of the presenl alphabel for the com- 
 pter and correct representation of the English language.
 
 138 
 
 INTERSECTED WORDS. 
 
 245 
 
 INTERSECTED WORDS AND MISCELLANEOUS 
 PHRASES. 
 
 245. Official titles, names of public companies, and any 
 words or phrases that do not otherwise admit of brief 
 easily-written forms may be abbreviated on the principle 
 of intersection, that is, by writing some one prominent 
 letter across another, or by writing the words in juxtapo- 
 sition, as in the following examples. When the positions 
 of the letters do not admit of intersection, the second 
 litter is written under, or at the side of, the first. 
 
 Act of Assembly 
 " " Congress 
 Adams' Express Co. U-<\ 
 Agricultural Society <r ~^~ 
 American Bank Note Co. ^-^y^- 
 
 Express Co. *~V- 
 Assembly Chamber )^ 
 At owner's risk ^Z — 
 " sender's risk b^^ 9 — 
 Bankrupt-cy X s X) 
 Bill of lading \dl. 
 Board of Aldermen \s^~ 
 •• Directors ^o 
 •■ Education \j 
 ( lapital punishment ^ 
 Capt. < laxton J 
 
 '■ Reynolds t^~^ 
 < lhamberof < !ommerce^ 
 
 City and ( 'mini \ of 
 
 N'\v STork 
 
 City, County, and State 
 of New York 
 
 Coal Co., Ltd. _^ 
 
 Col. Dixon Hl«_^ 
 
 Company's risk ---~ 
 
 Conservative party <X 
 
 Custom House i-^ 
 
 Delivery ofiice \o 
 
 Democratic party |>^. 
 
 Embankment \ as in 
 Sea embankment )v-- 
 
 Equitable Life Assur- 
 ance Society Ny^" 
 
 Express Co. % — 
 
 Parmer's Loan and i ,-] 
 Trnsl Co. 
 
 < General Manager ^~~) 
 
 " Bcofield °^\ 
 
 < lerman American In- 
 
 surance Co. f~^j> 
 
 Sigh water mark ..A...
 
 House of Represent- 
 atives cT^ 
 Internal revenue """VV. 
 Last year's report rW 
 Life department /^|_ 
 '• Insurance Co. C ^-v_r 
 
 Local Government Board ~f~f\ 
 
 Local traffic i~\ — 
 Major Jones -g^ 
 Managing Director ^^ 
 Manager's office 
 
 Matter of form " ^ 
 Mutual Life Ins. Co. 
 
 National Bank of 
 
 Commerce ^y^-trt 
 
 National Express Co. ^3^ 
 New York Life 
 
 Ins. Co. v_r 
 
 ED WORDS. 
 Northern Pacific R. II. 
 
 139 
 
 Passenger dept. y 
 People's party \N 
 President of the U. S. V 
 Prohibition party \- 
 Professor Morgan %fS 
 
 " Thompson IH^ 
 Quinquennial valuation "-V. 
 Railroad // as in 
 
 Grand Trunk R. R. *^\// 
 Republican party / As s> 
 Senate Chamber / 
 Stock Exchange / 
 Union Trust Co. <T^\- 
 CJnited States of America f~~$~^/~ 
 - Exp. co. <^Sr- 
 " Senate .. ^ 
 Vice-President Vo
 
 140 THE REPRESENTATION OF FIGURES. 24G-247 
 
 THE REPRESENTATION OF FIGURES.* 
 
 240. Many attempts have been made to utilise short- 
 hand alphabets for the expression of figures, but there 
 are several objections to this mode of representation. 
 In the first place, it is easier to mistake one shorthand 
 letter for another than to mistake the ordinary figures, 
 which, being each composed of several strokes, are rarely 
 liable to clash, and as great exactitude is especially 
 necessary ill dealing with figures, this is an important 
 consideration. In the ne:;t place, alphabetic, shorthand 
 characters for figures resemble in appearance the other 
 writing surrounding them, while the ordinary Sgures are 
 so distinct in character that they readily catch the eye, 
 and can be easily referred to when necessary. Although, 
 therefore, the shorthand forms are briefer than the com- 
 mon figures, the latter are more definite and legible, and 
 will be found far preferable for reporting purposes. 
 
 217. Wh'en several noughts occur, the number repre- 
 sented by them should be expressed in Phonography, 
 thus: 30 L ; M C \ rather than 30,000, 44,000,000. 
 " Thousand dollars " should be expressed bywords, thus: 
 
 150 £ = $150,000; 15 £=$1,500,000. This saves 
 
 the writing of the noughts at the end, and the % at 
 the beginning. In reporting, the following shorthand 
 letters, written in the third position close to the figures, 
 will be found useful : ^_/ hundred, or hundredth, 
 ///mis, mi/, million, -—y hundred thousand -_^-^ hun- 
 dred million, \ billion; as :; ( 3,000, 5 w 500,000, 
 1 s 100,000,000, :; , 3,000,000, 7 ^-s 700,000,000, 
 1 \ I. 1,000,000. 
 
 ♦ Amore elaborate system <<( reporting figures fractions, measures, 
 ct.., is given in " Technical Reporting," by T. A. Reed. 60 pages. Price, 
 ■(Hi-. ; cloth, .".or.; n, !„■ obtained from tin- publishers of this work.
 
 248 THE REPRESENTATION OF FIGURES. 141 
 
 248. iii reporting sermons, indicate the Book or Epistle, 
 Chapter, and Verse, in quotations from the Scripture-. 
 thus : — Place the figure for the Book or Epistle in the 
 first position, for the Chapter in the second position, and for 
 the Verse in the third position ; thus. Cor. iv., .. By this 
 met hod the hook, chapter, and verse may be written in any 
 order by means of the figures only, and without danger of 
 ambiguity. 
 
 Exercise 66. 
 
 The total area of the United States approaches in round figures 
 4 million (4,000,000) square miles, but of this aggregate over 55 
 thousand (55,000) square miles are covered by water. Its great- 
 est length i- 1,6 hundred (1,600) miles, and greatest breadth 2,7 
 hundred (2,700) mile-. According to the census of 1889, the 
 I'"], uiation approached 63 million (63,000,000), of whom I be whites 
 numbered nearly 55 million (55,000,000) and the colored the re- 
 maining one-eighth. The proportion of the sexes is 32 million 
 (32,000,000) men and 31 miUion (31,000,000) women. In a single 
 year the number of immigrants has been between 4 hundred thou- 
 sand (400,000) and 5 hundred thousand (500,000). The entire 
 strength of the United States Army is nearly 29 thousand (29,000) 
 men, and the Navy is manned by between 8 thousand (8,000) and 
 9 thousand (9,000) men. 
 
 The net revenue of the United States has almost reached 4 hun- 
 drcd million ,l„ll,trs (slUO.OOO.UOO). In 1S92 the net National Debt 
 amounted to 801 million dollars ($801,000,000). There was an 
 expenditure for pensions in 1889 of 95, 6 hundred thousand dollars 
 ($95,600,000); the cost of printing the Congressional Record is 
 350 tftousand dollars ($250,000). 
 
 In 1890 the mineral products of the United States included 
 over 16 million (16,000,000) tons of iron ore. and in 1892 over 
 1 hundred million (100,000,000) tons of bituminous coal was pro- 
 
 dueed, against over 52 million (52,000,000) tons of anthracite. 
 The value of American gems in the rough state amounted in 
 1887 to ss .c> hundred dollars ($88,600), besides gold quartz for 
 specimens and gems, valued at '•'> thousand dollars ($75,000). 
 
 There are over :.' hundred (200) electric railways in existence in 
 the United State-, operating some 2 thousand (2,000) cars. In 
 the New York Post Office the number of improperly addressed 
 letters annually dealt with is over 6 hundred thousand (600,000), 
 and of these over ."> hundred thousand are corrected and for- 
 warded. Nearly 3 hundred million (300,000,000) items of mail 
 matter are handled by carriers. 
 
 The minister's text was taken from the 1 .St. John, 1,9,10; and 
 he referred to the following passages of Scripture : — Isaiah, 4'.', 
 G ; 1 John, 2, 8; Luke, 19, 14 : Acts, 13, 16 : and Romans, 8, 15.
 
 142 
 
 LIST OF REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 LIST OF REPORTING CONTRACTIONS* 
 
 (Words marke.l ( * ) are written above the tine.) 
 
 circumstantial (\y 
 
 1 
 
 Administrator \~./ 
 
 administratrix L~. n 
 advertise-d-ment J 
 agriculture-al* 
 antagonist-ic-ism* 
 applicab]f ity \ — 
 appointment* ^ 
 arbitration *| 
 aristocratic-acy 
 archbishop ^ 
 assemhlj," 1 )-^ 
 astonish-ed-ment* < — 
 a t '/', M ment L 
 
 bapti^f m \ 
 
 l>el]eVole||,',,. Vi 
 
 i ant x 
 
 l>enign ity \_ — 
 
 ( labinet \ 
 Calvinism V_ 
 capable ~\ 
 < laptain* 
 celestial f° 
 !•< rtincate oa 
 characteri si ic* 
 circumstance / 
 
 commercial* ~~ 
 
 constitution-al J 
 
 construction \j 
 
 contentment l, 
 
 contingency L^ 
 
 conti'oversy-sial J 
 
 covenant V_ 
 
 cross-examine-d \ ( 
 cross-examinatif >n ) 
 
 December J-^ 
 
 defendant y 
 
 deficiency \y 
 
 degeneration J 
 
 democrat U< — 
 
 description I — 
 dignif£-fied L_ 
 disappointment 1^ 
 discharge X 
 
 disillterested-liess 
 displeasure I 
 
 dissimilar J-s 
 distinguish-ed fc— ' 
 Ecclesiastic-al ^^ 
 efficient-cy V_y 
 
 it 
 
 * The student «ill find in "Technical Reporting," 60 pages of Pbooo- 
 graphii \ I breviations for words and phrases commonly met with in report- 
 ing Legal, s. ientific, and other Technical bubjecis.
 
 LIST OF REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 143 
 
 entertainment T-, 
 entlmsiasm-ast-ast ic 
 episcopal-ian 
 esquire ) 
 evangelical 
 
 example* 
 exchequer ~f 
 executor — / 
 executrix „ n 
 expenditure — S 
 expensive ~ \ 
 extemporaneous ~U^ 
 extinguish [_, 
 extraordinary 1^ 
 
 extravagant-ance ~~\ 
 Familiar-ity 
 financial 
 friendship J? 
 Generalization J 
 Henceforth Z^^. 
 holiness /^ 
 Imperfect-ion 
 impracticable* 
 impregnable 
 imperturbable 
 improbable 
 incapable 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 *=> 
 
 inconsiderate \, 
 inconsistency j 
 
 indefatigable S 
 indenture ^^ 
 independent-ce* ° 
 indescribable ^r- v 
 
 indigna^ > 
 
 indiscriminate fc — 
 indispensably *\ 
 individual* 
 inefficient-ly-cy 
 inform-ed 
 inscribe* 
 inscription* 
 insignificance* 
 insignificant* 
 inspect-ed-tion "~\ 
 insubordinate-tion % 
 
 insufficient-cy ^ — J 
 intelligence 7 
 intelligent "V 
 
 intelligible / 
 intemperance l^s 
 
 investment S 3 
 January (_^ 
 journalism /-^ 
 jurisdiction </
 
 1 
 
 ^r 
 
 144 
 
 jurisprudence </ 
 Lieutenancy ( 
 
 Lieutenant-Col. ( 
 Magnet'/^* ^~ 
 majesty / 
 
 manufaeture-d 
 
 manufacturer "">> 
 
 mathematic-s-al ( 
 
 mathematician 
 
 mechanic-al ' 
 
 melancholy 
 
 Methodism* 
 
 metropolitan 
 
 misdemeanor 
 
 mortgage* <r ' — 
 
 Non-com m is- \^~f / 
 sioned officer ) ^^ 
 
 noncoiiformist V^ 
 
 nonconformity V_ 
 
 Novemher ^~V 
 
 Objective / 
 
 obscurity \ 
 
 observation x^ 
 
 organize-d \_> 
 
 organizal ion ~^-e 
 
 original ^/ 
 
 orthodox-y A 
 
 LIST OF REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 Passenger \ 
 perform| IR . e \y\, 
 perpendicular \/\ 
 perpetual-ly X/^ 
 philanthropy-ic Vy° 
 philanthropist Vy%, 
 plaintiff ^ 
 plenipotentiary \ 
 prejudice-cial ^ 
 
 preliminary *V^ 
 Presbyterian-ism "N? 
 preservation V^ 
 professional 
 proficiency %< 
 proportion-ed ^ 
 proportionate 
 Recognizance /~ 
 regeneration ^6 
 relinquish -^ 
 repugnant-ce /^ 
 resignation / 
 respectively /\. 
 responsible 
 resurrection ^^ 
 revenue /V. 
 Selfish-ness J/ 
 
 A
 
 sensibij-ty ^\ 
 
 
 September ,; ^-- 
 
 signification* 
 
 ^-> 
 
 singular v— — 
 
 
 subscribe 
 
 V 
 
 subservient Ss 
 
 substantial 
 
 Y. 
 
 substitute N> 
 
 
 Bufficien cy 
 
 <u 
 
 superscribe-d 
 
 V- 
 
 superscript ioi 
 
 v> 
 
 suspect-ed 1 
 
 suspicious 1 
 
 \ 
 
 Tabernacle 
 
 k 
 
 temperance 
 
 k 
 
 thanksgiving 
 
 c 
 
 k 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^f 
 
 LIST OF REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 145 
 
 transcribe 
 
 transcription 
 
 transmission 
 
 transubstantiation 
 
 tribunal 
 
 Unconsl it ut ional 
 
 unexampled* 
 
 unexpected-ly 
 
 uninnuential* 
 uninteresting 
 
 unquest Lonable-y 
 unsatisfactory r' 
 unselfish J 
 unsubstantial V ~ J S> 
 Wondi rt'ul-ly c ^° 
 
 In words ending in -action, -ection, etc., omit h when 
 the outline thus obtained is a convenient torin, and 
 docs nnt interfere with any other ..inline. In words 
 ending in tive, the t and /, can both be emitted, thus: 
 subjective (adding the » hook after the italic letter, 
 abstractive, architective, circumspective, destructive, 
 intro</uctive, irrespective, obstructive, productive, per- 
 spective, prospective, protractive, respective, restrictive, 
 retrospective. In other cases omit the syllable -tivt : 
 as, defective {>\( k), prerogativi (pr r g). When str 
 follows mn, it may be written thus, i ministry, 
 L administrate, i-^ demonstrate.
 
 146 exercise on reporting contractions. 
 
 Exercise 67. 
 
 It is unquestionably a characteristic of modern journalism, 
 and an indispensable condition of success, that every notable 
 circumstance which happens in the commercial, the aristo- 
 cratic, the financial, and the professional world, should be 
 reported in a circumstantial, sensible, and intelligible manner, 
 and at a length proportionate to its importance. A mere 
 generalization will not suffice. The political department of 
 a newspaper must contain intelligence relating perhaps to the 
 construction of a new Cabinet, the unexpected, resignation of 
 one of its members, and the chances some other statesman 
 may have of an appointment in the ministry as a substitute, 
 and of thus obtaining recognisance of his services and a sub- 
 stantial political reward. The newspaper must give an 
 intelligent description of the movements of our plenipoten- 
 tiaries abroad and distinguished individuals at home (includ- 
 ing those of Eer Majesty, our constitutional sovereign), and 
 prominent members of our aristocracy. Every political con- 
 troversy must be touched upon with dignity. The condition 
 of the national excJiequer, the slate of the revenue and ex- 
 penditure, must each respectively be matters of observation. 
 Extravagance or inefficiency in any public department must 
 be exposed, and the writer should </< inonst rate that lie is 
 
 famihar with the topics he treats upon. If an imperfection, 
 deficiency in the accounts, insujficu ncy of funds, or any other 
 unconstitutional ana. unsatisfactory feature in a democratic 
 
 Or any political onja nidation is detected, which renders it, 
 
 incapable of <.///V/i rci work, it. is an indispt usable and unques- 
 tionable duty of the editor to discharge his responsible duty 
 
 and inform his readers in a disinterested and independent 
 
 manner of it, qoI seeking to distinguish himself, but needless 
 whether he provokes the antagonism and displeasure of the 
 democracy or not. His disinterestedness and indept nrf, nee 
 will unquestionably seldom go unrewarded. 
 
 Ecclesiastical matters should no! be ignored in a news- 
 paper. When such a contingency occurs as the death of an 
 t pise,, p<ilian archbishop, the claims to the vacanl appoint- 
 ni, ni of a dignified ana capable ecclesiastic, noted Eor Ins mm 
 periurbable i>< nignity, and likely to dignify the office and 
 always ad in a benignant manner, may justly '»• urged. 
 CoftfrMJtffw'aJ subjects- such. Cor trample, as the differences 
 between Episcopalian, Presbyterian, Baptist, and other iV^- 
 conformist and Evangelical Churches, on Mich almost w/r- 
 
 eerilialili points as baptism, transubstantiation, atom mint.
 
 EXERCISE OX REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 117 
 
 the resurrection of the material body, regeneration, original 
 
 sin. what, is or is not antagonistic to orthodoxy and holiness, 
 tlic transmission of sin. national degeneration, and similar 
 subjects, are besl Lefl alone in newspapers, whose writers 
 generallj have nol sufficient familarity with these matters to 
 treat them with efficiency. It is improbabU thai a knowl- 
 edge of the celestial regions would be assisted by such discus- 
 sions. Calvinism, Methodism, Presbyterianism, and nearly 
 all kinds of Nonconformity have done good, ami it is melan- 
 choly work to encourage jn rp. hml wrangles on Christian 
 doctrines. Such conduct is almost a misdemeanor, and 
 must be antagonistic, unsatisfactory, repugnant, ami pri ju- 
 dicial to veal orthodox religion. The press should lie inca 
 pabl of it; it should rather seek to organize schemes which 
 will cause the different sects to relinquish insignificant con- 
 troversy of this kind, and axsembl together in unselfish 
 friendship and contentment. If tin- unity and Christian 
 enthusiasm could lie broughl about, many good and benevo- 
 I ni objects, such as i he promotion of temperance, the aboli- 
 tion of selfishness and intemperance, the adoption of arbitra- 
 tion for settling international disputes, and other similar 
 schemes of Christian benevolence, which many think at pres- 
 sent impracticable, would soon be found easy of attainment, 
 and those who advocate them would not lie looked upon as 
 solitary enthusiasts, many persons would soon become equally 
 enthusiastic. Many a Christian philanthropist would he 
 encouraged to greater efforts in philanthropy if the press 
 took notice of and gave a kindly word to Ins self-denj ing ami 
 philanthropic efforts; it is wrong to ignore work of this kind. 
 Military intelligence claims notice in the newspaper. In- 
 subordination of a singular, extraordinary, unexampled, and 
 un xpected kind, which it is necessary to extinguish, is sus 
 ju di d in the army. The editor is inform^ '/that the tribunal 
 before which the insubordinate was tried, acted in an indis 
 criminatt manner; t hey asst mbled together with closed door-, 
 and the facts of the case are veiled in oils,- ii ri/i/. Me thinks 
 the reasons for this secret military jurisdiction are insufficient 
 and unsubstantial, and believing a report would no1 he 
 repugnant or uninteresting to those who subscribe to or 
 advertise in Ids paper, his preliminary step is to send a 
 reporter, of whose proficiency for the task he ha- no doubt, 
 to interview the Lieutenant-Colonel or Captain of the regi- 
 ment. The officers may he selfish, inconsiderate, &n6 sus- 
 picious pei-sons. who though they have no substantial grounds 
 to suspect the reporter, nevertheless do so. and to his aston-
 
 14S EXERCISE OH REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 ishment, refuse him any information. Their reticence is 
 impregnable. The reporter is naturally indignant, and feels 
 the disappointment keenly: his sensibility is injured; but, if 
 he is indefatigable, in his calling, he must control his indig- 
 nation and make his pride subservient to his judgment. He 
 will perhaps discover an uninfluential personage — ^non-com- 
 missioned officer perchance — and cross-examine and take down 
 in shorthand all the substantial lints he can glean from his 
 cross-< .lamination. He must then transcribe all that is 
 applicable, and send his transcription by the post-office tele 
 graph fco the office of his paper. Of course this is expensive, 
 but it is an investment which pays. The presi rvation < > !' the 
 independence of a uewspaper should be studied, and nothing 
 antagonistic allowed to prejudice it. Incidents not very dis- 
 similar to the one we Save just related, occur nearly every 
 month of the year — from January to December. In fact, 
 last September ox November, one something like ittookplace, 
 but our readers will not be astonished it we inform them that 
 a, large proportion are hushed up. Military officials are fre- 
 quently jealous of what, they consider their prerogative; they 
 seem to fancy that the publication of reports of their pro- 
 ceedings might be introductive of results which would prove 
 destructive to discipline; consequently, they evince their 
 
 repugnance by putting every obstruction possible in the 
 
 way of reporters. 
 
 It will astonish most | pie to learn that the London news- 
 paper press, which usually reports every dramatic performance 
 and musical entertainment, imperfect and trivial though it be, 
 and sometimes even reports lectures on magnetism, seems to 
 consider pulpit discourses as of such insignificance that to 
 notice them would be an unpopular feature. This is an incon- 
 sisti ncy, I he signification of which it isdifficull to understand. 
 One is almost led to think that journalists have entered into 
 
 an organ! ed covenant that religious services shall not be 
 advertised h\ them. The late Mr. Spurgeon had great mag- 
 netic power over his congregation, but even his extemporaneous 
 ermons, delivered ai I lie Metropolitan Tabernacle, YfereineM- 
 ciently reported. The decorations at Harvest Thanksgiving 
 
 Services sometimes have but a. line or two given to them. 
 
 Henceforth, however, wo hope this will be altered, and so much 
 
 inefficiency will not lie exhibited in this respect. In America 
 
 reports of religious matters are verj far from being defective, 
 
 and adrertisi n/cuts of religious services frequently appear in 
 
 i he columns of newspapers. 
 
 Tin' press frequently performs g I service both to the
 
 249 EXERCISE ON REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 149 
 
 manufacturt r and the mechanic by directing their attention 
 to the progress and applicability of mechanical skill as applied 
 to new and wonderfully manufactured goods, of late years 
 there has been a perpetual increase in the manufacture of 
 machinery employed in agriculture, as one may sec if he will 
 inspect the exhibits a1 agricultural shows. The mathematic 
 exactness of the different parts of some machines is wonder- 
 ful. An inspection of them shows that the designers must 
 have been good mathematicians; their work is a good cer 
 tificateoi the sufficiency of their mathematical knowledge, for 
 persons not well up in mathematics generally produce ill pro- 
 l>t>rtii>>it(l and inefficient machinery. It. is not an extravagant 
 statement to say that such men could raise a considerable 
 mortgage on their brains. 
 
 Jurisprudence also claims attention in our newspapers. 
 Curious cases are somet imes reported. Some time ago, Thomas 
 Jones. Esquire, who a1 one time filled a lieutenancy in the 
 navy, died; he had bequeathed his property to a distanl rela- 
 tive, a clerk in the passenger department of a railway com- 
 pany. An executor or executrix was appointed to carry out 
 the provisions of the will, and the indenture seemed valid 
 An antagonist, however, unexpectedly appeared ; an action at 
 
 law was brought by one of the other relatives of t he deceased 
 gentleman, who contended that the will was not properly 
 inscribed and superscribed ; it was clear, too. that tne testa- 
 tor did not understand the objectivi case. The superscription 
 was particularly faulty. The plaintiff was severely cross- 
 exammed bj the defendant, but the Court gave judgment 
 
 that the document was not legally executed, and appointed an 
 
 administrator or administratrix to take chargeof the prop- 
 erty in dispute. 
 
 One of our public buildings inclines considerably from the 
 perpendicular. Tins is noticeable to everyone who looks up 
 
 to read the inscription over it. 
 
 COMPOUNDS OF HERE, THERE, WHERE. 
 
 2 L9. Write the com pound words, fa re, tfa re, wht re, joined 
 to at, i", of, with, in. on, thus: 
 
 Here -^ ^ -^ ^ -V 
 
 There J ? 'I v ^ D 
 
 Where lS[ o^ ^V ( A </ c/°
 
 150 
 
 LIST OF GENERAL PHRASEOGRAMS. 
 
 250 
 
 LIST OF GENERAL PHRASEOGRAMS. 
 
 250. The following list, though extensive enough for 
 ordinary reporting, is merely suggestive, not exhaustive. 
 Additional phrases — the list being extended to above 
 two thousand —are given in the ''Phonographic Phrase 
 Book " (30c.) The student should endeavor to grasp 
 the principle of uniting words which will admit of easy 
 recognition by the reader, rather than endeavor to 
 commit phrases to memory. Thus, the contraction for 
 rather (r r), ending with the hook n, represents rather 
 than, omitting the first consonant of than (th). This 
 phrase will naturally lead him to adopt > more than, 
 <s_3 sooner than, etc. The first word in a phrase must 
 occupy its own position, and unimportant words, such 
 
 as the, of, or, etc., may 1 mitted: thus t on {the) other 
 
 hand, ',, for (the) sake (of), s -*"*'' in (the) way (of ) 
 V) two (<</■) three, — ■=_, again (and) again, p„. side (by) 
 side, ^ on (the) part (of), \ fact (to) face ; and words 
 m;i_\ be contracted; thus, \^~^ Prime Minister, 
 \ in ij brethren. 
 
 > 
 
 ABLE to make S 
 ABOVE the V 
 
 Absolute!} neces ■ > r \ 
 
 ALL its 1, 
 
 all its bearings \, — p 
 
 all lien 
 
 all i hat has been \ 
 
 all that is said X 
 all that is to be ^ 
 all t hat yon call *> — 
 
 all tl 
 
 all these (, 
 
 all i imes l-o 
 all j our own i 
 
 f\7>all A 
 and as if "V 
 
 ami believe \ 
 
 and complained $r 
 
 ami composed X> 
 ami have been ^^
 
 LIST OF GENERAL 
 
 and have done X 
 
 and have their v^^ 
 
 and in 
 
 and is not 
 
 and need not ~^ 
 
 and never V 
 
 and that 
 
 and the 
 
 and the contrary y 
 
 and the present n^, 
 
 A S far as ^-—^ 
 
 as good us 
 
 as if there .X^. 
 
 as long as (^> 
 
 as man; as possible 
 
 as mucli as 
 
 as soon as ^- p 
 
 as soon as possible <^ 
 
 as the 
 
 as to 
 
 PHRASEOGE LMS. 
 
 151 
 
 AT hunt I - (In at Jr»s/ in- 
 sort the vowel.) 
 
 at their Jv- 
 at the present day -Kqv 
 at some time ?XZ>. 
 because, it is {, 
 BY means of ._^_ 
 
 by them ^ 
 
 1 >y which they are "-?'•" 
 
 C. , e T j P (and so with 
 
 ity of London^ othel . places) 
 
 COMMON-PLACE *""%. 
 
 DAY after day || 
 
 from day to day || (and so 
 
 with other similar phrases thai 
 admit of being Urns written.) 
 
 FOR ever V 
 
 for liis Vo 
 
 for his own sake V_p_ 
 
 for instance Nj; 
 
 for my own part 
 
 for the S 
 
 for the most pari 
 
 for the purpose of \,/\ 
 
 for the sake of Va 
 
 for this reason \ a, 
 free trade >| 
 free t rader >j 
 
 freedom of t rade c>v ~ y ) 
 FROM me or my °V^ (In 
 
 from him insert the vowel of him.) 
 
 from the ^V 
 
 great deal <ry^ 
 great extent ef 
 great many c-^*-'
 
 152 UST OF GENERAL 
 
 HA YE had ^j 
 
 have not V^ 
 
 having regard to the v^p 
 
 HE has been k 
 
 he is (or has) not L. 
 
 be would no doubt ^ (Al- 
 
 ways join the vowel in no doubt, 
 to keep it distinct from indeed.) 
 
 bon. gentleman "S/ 
 
 honorable member C_J \ 
 
 hon. and learned member 
 
 hon. member for Bristol 
 
 House of Commons <f~~ 
 House of Lords <j^° 
 House of Parliament </\ 
 HOWare >/ 
 how could you ^ 
 bow many of such *«— ^» 
 how must /v-i 
 how will they H ( 
 
 /admit i. 
 
 I am glad 
 
 I i ertain that you are ^° in/" 
 
 I ;i in inclined toi bint 
 I am very glad 
 I believe ..^.. 
 
 I < .m 
 
 piikase(h,i;a.ms. 
 
 cannot do | 
 dare say V) 
 did not i 
 expect ^\ 
 fear you will have 
 
 fear you will think me 
 
 go 
 
 had ...]... 
 
 had not 
 
 have been V. 
 
 have been told ^\ 
 
 have done S 
 
 have bad many 
 
 have indeed 
 
 have said \" 
 
 have suggested V 
 
 hope \ 
 
 hope you are v/ 
 
 „ you are satisfied ^^\ 
 
 hope you will v/ 
 
 know that you may 
 
 know they will \j^ 
 
 may (or am) 
 
 may as well 
 
 may be told that ^ 
 
 may not be \ 
 
 may perhaps be
 
 LIST OF GENERAL PHRASEOGRAMS. 
 
 if those who can V 
 
 153 
 
 I must be v "*\ 
 I must see ) 
 income-tax 
 
 I need not 
 
 I need not point out 
 
 I never V. 
 
 I shall y 
 
 I shall be s{ 
 
 I shall esteem ^ 
 
 I shall not 2 
 
 I think X 
 
 I think it is impossible ] 
 
 I think so \ 
 
 I think there is 1 
 
 I think there will 
 
 I will ^ 
 
 I will not be .._„>.. 
 
 I will say 
 
 I will try ^ 
 
 I wish it y 
 
 I wish there _y 
 
 IF ever \- 
 
 if it is said ^> 
 
 if it be not v^ 
 
 if such \o 
 
 if that V^ 
 
 if the V^ 
 
 V 
 
 if there is V^ 
 if t here is to be 
 
 ^A^So 
 
 X> 
 
 V^ 
 
 IN any 
 n all 
 
 n all respects 
 n all their ) 
 nasmuch as I 
 n comparison with 
 n consequence of 
 n fact 
 n its 1, 
 n like manner 
 n my 
 
 n my opinion 
 n order to 
 n proportion 
 
 11 reference tn 
 
 n regard to 
 
 n relation to 
 n respect to "\ 
 n so many 
 nsomueli as 
 n such V 
 d such a manner as ^7^ 
 n support of ~^ 
 in the first
 
 154 LIST OF GENERAL 
 
 n the first instance 
 n tlic first place ~^° 
 n the main 
 
 n the next place ^n> 
 n the second place *"" ^\> 
 n the third place £ 
 n the last place <T 
 n the same 
 n their 
 
 n this country \^y 
 n this instance '"--p 
 n this neighborhood Vi_^ 
 ntothe 1 
 
 n which it has appeared \^ 
 IS to ^ 
 
 is t lie fi 
 
 IT can L 
 it could not lie 
 
 il has I n ^ 
 
 it, has been suggested 
 
 it is impossible J-» 
 
 it i: many \-~~~s 
 
 it i must certainly ,\-/y 
 
 it is most important that I <— 
 
 it, is my opinion d~^> 
 it is necessarj I hat \ < _ i y< 
 
 \ 
 
 PHRASEOGRAMS. 
 
 it is no L^ 
 
 it is not so U 
 
 il is quite certain that you should 
 
 it is surely \ ™~~t* 
 
 it is said that P 
 
 it is well known a^ 
 
 it may U-s 
 
 it seems impossible &-rrb 
 
 it seems to me cK>^~, 
 
 it would not [_, 
 
 Ladies and Gentlemen (jo 
 
 mber of Parliament *\\ /-" 
 
 more and more 
 
 my dear sir X 
 
 my dear sister A 
 
 my fellow eiti/ens N» 
 
 my own opinion 
 
 of course it is h, 
 
 ,, ,, it is 1 1 < > t expected I 
 
 Of course t hey will S ~V 
 of course it will not lie <s\ 
 of his 
 of importance 
 
 of it I 
 
 of it own ]., 
 
 of life
 
 LIST OK GENERAL 
 
 of many of them ^( 
 of sm-li as have 6 
 
 of then I ( 
 
 of this (, 
 
 of this subject t 
 
 of which / 
 
 of which it has been °\ 
 of which it must be ; ~x 
 
 of which you will Jf~ 
 
 ON account of their ) 
 
 on his own 
 on my pari 
 
 on the 
 
 on the Committee | 
 
 on the contrary 1/ 
 
 on the otlicr hand « 
 
 on the present \^ 
 
 on the part of ^ 
 
 on their own ,) 
 
 on this account C, 
 
 on this point L 
 
 Parliamentary Committee V| 
 
 peculiar circumstances 
 
 „ „ of the case ^ ~f n 
 per annum \/^~ 
 per cent N/^ 
 
 
 PIIRASEofiRAMS. 
 
 point of view ^ 
 political economy =- 
 
 155 
 
 present circumstances j¥ 
 present state %-p 
 Prime Minister ^V-^? 
 Secretary of State ^' 
 SHALL he ^ 
 shall have ^ 
 
 SHOULD be able to 
 should hav< 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 ( 
 
 should not do ^i 
 should mil have been ■^'N. 
 should not think that 
 should the ., 
 should think 
 SO as to ) 
 so as to be 1 
 
 so as to receive ) ^ 
 
 so many as )^_p 
 
 so that ) 
 
 so that it is impossible { 
 
 so the ) 
 
 so there is j 
 
 THAT have V 
 
 that is 
 
 that it may as well \-^
 
 156 
 
 LIST OF GENERAL PHRASEOGK A MS. 
 
 that such f 
 
 that the * 
 
 that they ( 
 
 that which has heen c/ 
 
 „ you will have no ^-^ 
 
 THE, as a short downstroke, 
 
 may be joined to 
 
 After 
 
 all 
 
 among 
 
 are 
 
 as 
 
 be 
 
 because 
 
 been 
 
 being 
 
 believe 
 
 neither 
 
 by 
 
 nor 
 
 eitlier 
 
 not 
 
 for 
 
 of 
 
 have 
 
 Send 
 
 if 
 
 should 
 
 in 
 
 thai 
 
 is 
 
 think 
 
 make 
 
 this is 
 
 thus, to 
 
 towards 
 
 under 
 
 upon 
 
 were 
 
 when 
 
 where 
 
 with 
 
 without 
 
 even 
 
 see 
 
 
 was 
 
 from 
 
 so 
 
 
 what 
 
 had 
 
 than 
 
 
 whirl 
 
 how 
 
 there 
 
 
 WOllll 
 
 into 
 
 1 hrough 
 
 
 say 
 
 unto 
 
 
 
 and, as a short upstroke, to 
 
 Above 
 
 at 
 
 before 
 
 between 
 
 but 
 
 (luriiif; 'say 
 
 The t ok the ( ' ) is not used initially 
 
 hi huh; another word, but only 
 
 u ben media] or final. 
 
 THERE*™ V 
 
 there can 7 
 
 there could not be ^-~v 
 
 there is ) 
 
 ) 
 there could no! nave been \^_ 
 
 there is another fact 3 — s- 
 
 there isanot her point ) 
 
 „ is jinn) her subjecl I 
 
 I here is ao more JL*^ 
 
 there seems to be ' \ 
 
 there were s^ 
 
 there were some s. 
 
 there would be 
 
 \ 
 
 they are not ") 
 THOSE who can k_ 
 THOUGH there is / 
 till it has been £ 
 TIME to time U^ 
 
 TO a great extent \f (To 
 
 may be joined to verbs beginning 
 with m, the upward I or r, the 
 
 circle .v, or a letter of the kl, ler 
 series.) 
 
 to as many as y^-s> 
 to be able to \, • 
 
 to be able to make \- 
 
 to become -N;-^ 
 to be saved N^-- 
 to church y 
 to do ^| / 
 
 to do some! llillg 1 
 
 to have -\ 
 
 to it -l 
 
 to love /"V_ 
 
 to many of those who v ^~7 
 
 to me ^^ 
 
 to some >s~^ 
 
 to the > 
 
 to them >
 
 LIST OF 
 
 to think that ( 
 
 to those that t 
 
 to which j 
 
 to which yon art indebted 
 
 to y< >n v, 
 
 towards them h 
 
 United Kingdom •— 
 
 United States "^ 
 
 UPON it > 
 
 upon its own f 
 
 upon the 
 
 vice versa V^ 
 
 WASH (> 
 
 was not \ 
 
 was i he ) 
 
 WE axe <^ 
 
 we have </\^_ 
 we may </^~ 
 we will <y 
 
 li SAT can be the reason 
 
 what could be \ 
 what could they ( 
 what may not *"'■ 
 what the 
 what were "\ 
 what were their >^ 
 what were their reasons 
 
 GENERAL PHRASEOGRAMS. 157 
 
 WHEN the y 
 when we k/ 
 WHICH are l^ 
 
 7 ^ which are necessary l^~^^ 
 which are sufficient ^\^ 
 which cannot [^ 
 which has been <*. 
 which has not been L*. 
 which have not [^ 
 which is (or has) ( 
 w hich is (or has) not 
 
 which is now [ 
 
 ,, must not be considered A- o--v 
 which receive /-\_ 
 which was \ 
 which were 
 
 which were certainly ^%y 
 
 which were likely -w 
 
 which were not / 
 which the . 
 which we 
 which would be x 
 
 which you can / 
 
 which you are 1/ 
 which you are not l/t 
 WHO are ^ 
 who can t
 
 158 LIST OF GENERAL 
 
 who has been oC 
 
 who have been £v 
 
 who is 6 
 
 who is not (^ 
 
 who may be «->^ 
 
 who will v 
 
 who will not be fi 
 
 who were *-. 
 
 who would ? 
 
 who would no doubt J_^_ 
 
 who would not have *-i 
 
 who would not say -^. 
 
 WILL these C\ 
 will they C\ 
 
 WITH it ] 
 
 wit h its 1 
 
 with reference to .<£%>. 
 with regard to .£:... 
 with respect to *£S. 
 with respect to the .£*>.. 
 with the exception of :> 
 wit h such / 
 wit h t hem ( 
 wit h them that ^ 
 
 wit h this ( 
 
 w it h which / 
 
 with which it has been "s^ 
 
 PHRASEOGRAMS. 
 
 with which it is not L 
 with which it must be -H^ 
 with which you may be ^-^ 
 
 WOULD he ^ 
 
 would come a 
 
 would do ? 
 
 would have been L,^ 
 
 would have to be ^^ 
 
 would it P 
 
 would it be f 
 
 would make them > ~^~t 
 
 would no doubt j_^ 
 
 would not be sat isfied i 
 
 would not have said ^h> 
 
 would see \ 
 
 would the y 
 
 YOU live „/ 
 
 you are no), rS> 
 
 you n u -l it ion ^-^s> 
 
 jrou must recollect that rs-g < 
 
 you should ^ 
 
 you were -v. 
 
 you will be certain / y~ 
 
 yon will be sure to >/ y 
 
 \nu will have been < ^>. 
 
 you wdl think it \ 
 
 \
 
 EXERCISE ON PHRASEOGRAPHY. 159 
 
 EXERCISE 68. 
 
 A large number of examples of the use of phrases are fur- 
 nished in the following Exercise. After writing the exercise 
 from dictation, the student should compare his notes with the 
 text, in order lo ascertain what phrases he has omitted to em- 
 ploy. This practice may be usefully repeated st veral times. 
 
 All-men are able to-agree on-this-point thai notwithstand- 
 ing what we-are able-to-do in-it, life is short and transitory. 
 To-be able-to-think and act aright, it-is-absolutely-necessary 
 that men hold correct views. By all-means strive to-be useful. 
 All-right thinking persons in all-states of-life, and all-stations 
 of society find happiness in well-doing. Almost any-person 
 can-be happy in tli is Life, always-excepting the selfish individ- 
 ual. And-as a man can choose for-nimself, and-as-it-is-in- 
 his power to do good or evil, and as-he-is endowed with rea- 
 son, he-can-be happy himself, and-have-the satisfaction of- 
 proraoting the happiness of-others. And-this-the lives of- 
 good-men demonstrate : and-this-is, and-under-the-circum- 
 stances musl be a comfortable reflection, and-we should, there- 
 fore, strive as-far-as possible to-be as-good-as we-can and to 
 benefit as-many of our fellow-beings as-we-can, so-thai at last 
 by-means-of-our-endeavors we-may leave-the world better- 
 th:iii we-found it . 
 
 It-is foolish to-make false statements, for even if -we-are for 
 a time believed, we-cannot-be happy for-fear of-some-persons 
 not-being satisfied and asking for-further-particulars. Wheth- 
 er for-great or-small matters it-is best to-tell-the truth ; who 
 l'ordns-aeeount tells lies will-find in-the end that it-is-not for- 
 his-advantage, for-his appearance will soon excite suspicion. 
 For-his-own-interest, and for-his-own-sake a man should-be 
 truthful. Most of us have-seen-instances of-this. We-have- 
 had many-instances of it. Por-example, few have-seen de- 
 ceit IH1 men respected or regarded for-1 heir-opinions. 
 
 James-Smith is a meek man. Be-has-been always opposed 
 to standing armies, and he-would-no-doubt abolish the navy. 
 I should like to hear more from-him, from you. and-from- 
 your-friends on -this subject. How-are-we to manage without 
 
 trained defenders ? Ilow-are-we to-prevent invasion, and how- 
 can-we protect our lives and homes? Though [-admit the bless- 
 ings of peace iand-I ha ve-ilone-so on ;ill occasions) 1-fcar that- 
 it-would-lie rash for-any-nation to-throw-down its arms al- 
 present. I-think-if-we-are to abolish war, and-if-such a thing
 
 160 EXERCISE ON PIIRASEOGRAPHY. 
 
 is possible, it-must-be brought about by united action. If-you, 
 and your-friends will advocate peaceful measures on all-occa- 
 sions, and-in-such-(a)-manner as-to-bring pressure to bear 
 upon representatives, I-have-no-doubt that something may-be- 
 done in-this-respect. In-my-opinion there-should-be a council 
 of nations in-order-to create an international court of arbitra- 
 tion, and-if-this-wefe-done it-would-be in-all-respects satis- 
 factory to all-persons. The blessings of peace would then be 
 enjoyed not-only in-this-neighborhood and-in-this-country, 
 but iii-lac! by-the world al large. 
 
 Is-it-likely, is-it-possible thai law and order can exist, with- 
 oul taxation ? Is-it-the duty of a citizen to avoid taxation ? 
 Is-it thus an honest man can act ? Is-not taxation indispen- 
 sable? Is-this-not self-evident ? Is-it not true thai many- 
 persons evade taxation, and-is-nof-llus very dishonest? 1-do- 
 not like-the Income Tax, It-is-most-certainly true fchat-it-has 
 objectionable features, and it-is-well-known lobe unfairly 
 levied, [t-is-my-opinion that-it-is-impossible for a good-man 
 to evade tliis-tax, but it -seeins-to-me that many-persons envy 
 those-who do. 
 
 My-Dear-Sir, -It-is-wel) to Know how to address people. 
 When writing to a friend, you-should commence " my-dear- 
 friend ;" when to a brother, "my-dear-brother;" in address- 
 ing a married lady whom you well. know, " my-dear-madam " 
 is correct. Of-course, a letter to-your-mother always begins 
 with " my-dear- I her," and to your-sister " my -dear-sister." 
 
 Mj father was fond (of the) phrases " my-good -friend," " my- 
 good sir," and " my-f el low-citizens." 
 
 To rid our language of-its irregular orthography would-be 
 of-itself a great-blessing, and an act of love to-our children. 
 On-their-account alone some reform should lie attempted. 
 <>n this-point l-shall-noton-the-present-occasion enlarge, but 
 [-shall, nevertheless, do mj besl to-proraote this-object, and 
 shall endeavor to make converts to my view, [-shall expect 
 opposition, but [-shall-give little heed toil and shall go as- 
 far-as I can in-its support. It is in the-power of-man to-give 
 but a smattering of-many-things In our elementary schools 
 on-accounl (of the) time wasted in acquiring reading. This 
 was tin' experience of my schoolmaster, and of-most others. 
 He was possessed of pi rhaps more-than average abilities, mas- 
 ter of -several languages, and-the possessor of -some very varied 
 knowledge, hut his spelling was wretched. In phonetic-spell- 
 ing he-would have heard of somel hing-to-his-advantage. Of- 
 iich men it cannol he said that I heir faulty spelling is due to 
 stupidity ; of-that I am certain.
 
 EXERCISE ON PHRASEOGRAPHY. 1G1 
 
 Protestants should-never forget Queen Elizabeth. Catholics 
 may consider her to-have-been hard to-their religion, but-they 
 should-nevertheless remember the provocation she-received, 
 andshould-nol entirely condemn her. Her popular title, "Good 
 Queen Bess," ought to convince us that her subjects loved 
 her, should-nol hing-else do-so, and our minds should-only be 
 swayed by trust worthy evidence like-tins. Should this be dis- 
 puted, should these facts lie denied, and should-those-who 
 dislike Queen Elizabeth refuse her tin- credit she is entitled to, 
 we shouhl-i hink it impossible that-such-persons should-un- 
 derstand history. Should-we-not lament this, since-it blinds 
 their judgment, and-since-no-doubt they lead others astray? 
 
 Do what good you-can; so-may you find real happiness, 
 and SO-might countless others. So-must those-who value 
 nothing so-much-as a good name, for-t here-is no-way so-sure 
 as-this of getting one. Other-ways have-been tried, but 
 always failed. SO- that there-has-been proof (of the) truth of- 
 niv statement, indolence has never made men happy. So- 
 w-as it in-all-times, so-will it continue, and so-woula we wish 
 it to-be. You-will-not find happiness in indolence, for so- 
 you-are breaking Nature's law, and so-you- must reap misery. 
 1-am forced to-that conclusion, for-that-does-nol seem un- 
 likely. There-have-been some idle men that-have-been happy, 
 but that-is-Only the exception to all t hat-has-been given as a 
 rule. 
 
 Carlyle and Macaulay have-shown their reasons for believ- 
 ing Cromwell to-have-served his country well, and-I would- 
 say fco-those-who-can do so, read these authors carefully. I- 
 trust there-are-not many who-will condemn him, and-t hat - 
 they-are-not influential, ha- there arc-now bitter means of 
 judging his conduct. There-are persons who do-so — there- 
 are-some who censure him : but-there-are those-who think 
 for-themselves, and-these see that Cromwell was a greal 
 Englishman. To-(a)great -extent t here- has -been misconcep- 
 tion of his character. There-has-uever been a man more 
 maligned, but there-has no-doubt lately been a change. 
 There-has-now arisen an eloquenl defender of Cromwell — 
 there-have-been many-such, and-t here-is-another proof that 
 truth will come uppermost. L-think-there-is as-much cause 
 to-re\ere Cromwell's memory as-thai of-many of-our rulers ; 
 there-is-certainly inore-thau for-most-of-them. There-is- 
 little good to-be said of-some English sovereigns; there-is- 
 much Eor Cromwell. There-is need of resolute government 
 sometimes, and-there-is-never fear of -its being abused when 
 men like Cromwell arc at the helm. There-is-no-doubt of- 
 this. 
 
 n
 
 102 EXERCISE ON PHRASEOGRAPUY. 
 
 Till-you learned Phonography, you-were, perhaps, to-some- 
 extent ignorant (of the) uses to-which-it-may-be turned to- 
 account and to-advantage. The time required to-learn-the 
 system you thought likely to-amount to-something consider- 
 able, and-the benefits to-be gained did-not appear enough 
 to-assure-you that-it-was worth the trouble. To-be-able-to- 
 write shorthand you considered would-be advantageous, but 
 you-could-not bring yourself to-believe you-eould master the 
 system. Was-not that so ? Depend upon-it, you-were to- 
 I dame for underrating your abilities. We-are-certain, for- 
 we -have-reason to know, that none need despair of-success 
 in-Phonography. What-can-be-the reason (of the) great- 
 sale (of the) text-books if-it-is-not-the simplicity (of the) 
 system ? Wnen-we-think of-it. what-could-be more convinc- 
 ing? 
 
 The measures for-the-promotion of temperance which-havc 
 often been proposed in-the-press, and which-have-been 
 brought, before Parliament, but which-have-not passed, are 
 numberless. The compulsory abolition (of the) Liquor Traf- 
 fic is a remedy which-is vigorously pushed forward by-tlie 
 United-Kingdom Alliance, which-is-no-doubt an influential 
 body, and whieh-is-not-only desirous of -closing public-houses 
 but averse to compensating their owners. Compensation is 
 a policy which -is-of ten discussed, which-is-sometimes desig- 
 nated a robbery (of the) rate payers, but which is die scheme 
 favored by-many statesmen, and which-is-thus entitled to- 
 consideration. 
 
 While systematic obstruction in-Parliamenl continues, 
 nothing can-be-done. Steps should-be taken to alter tins, 
 for who are-they who come forward to-waste the time (of the) 
 Souse-of -Commons ? 'they are nun who-cannol have-the 
 interests (of the) nation at heart. Nb-one who-has would act 
 in-this-(man)ner. Any Member who-has offended in-this- 
 way should-be exposed, and any elector who-has-the oppor- 
 tunity to vole againsl such a person should not refrain from 
 using it, l-iriisi parliamentary obstruction will soon cease, 
 or-the nation will-have few reforms. 
 
 Wilberforce's biography may-be-read with-advantage. In 
 L788 he commenced his agitation, and-witb each succeeding 
 year his convictions with regard (to)the Slave-Question were 
 strengthened. Mr Clarkson with-even an equal zeal sup- 
 ported Wiiberforce, and with one-mind and-with one consent 
 fch< | labored together. Mr. Fox's labors deserve praise, and- 
 with-reference-(to)< his Wilberfon e bears honorable testimony.
 
 BUSINESS PHRASES AND CONTRACTIONS, 
 
 163 
 
 BUSINESS PHRASES AND CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 -C 
 \ 
 
 -Vv-v 
 
 According to 
 
 agreement 
 
 account sales 
 additional ex- 
 
 pense 
 
 after due consid- 
 eration 
 all claims 
 
 and if ynii can in- 
 form me 
 
 as a matter of 
 
 coui e 
 
 as a matter of fact 
 as soon as ready 
 al all events 
 at any rate 
 at his request 
 at your earliest 
 
 convenience . 
 
 Balance due ^k 
 
 balance sheet N/9 
 
 be good enough ^^_i 
 
 h'.'st of my ability N-^ 
 best quality 
 
 bills of lading N/f' 
 
 by goods train ^ 
 
 by his requesl 
 by letter 
 by my letter 
 
 | 
 
 by mn invoice 
 
 by passenger N 
 
 train 
 
 by telegram 
 
 by which you mil N~ 
 
 see > 
 
 by wire 
 
 bj your letter 
 
 ( iannol account 
 
 cannot answer 
 
 cannoi say ) 
 
 copy of my last 
 
 letter 
 
 Declare a divi- 
 dend 
 deliver imme- 
 diately 
 directors of I he 
 
 Company 
 
 directors' report 
 
 discount for cash 
 
 Early attention 
 
 early considera- 
 te n 
 
 early reply 
 enclosed letter 
 enclosed please 
 
 find 
 Facts of the case 
 
 faithfully yours 
 
 few Jays ago 
 
 
 h 
 
 "VI 
 
 ^ 
 V
 
 164 
 
 lil SIN] SS PHRASES 
 
 financial affairs *~~^-s. 
 
 first instant °^~£ 
 
 for their interest V_w> 
 freight train 
 from my last ^ — 
 
 letter ~~\^/^ 
 
 from the enclosed > 
 
 letter ^ — < — (, 
 
 from the last re- c% ^-ts^V 
 
 port V 
 fully considered -V/— 
 
 further consideration \ 
 
 further particulars N^ 
 
 ({( )ods not to — - 
 
 hand 
 great disappointment J 
 
 gross receipts c- tft 
 
 I am directed I — , 
 
 I am directed to state 
 
 [i utremelj sorry ^~" — 61 so 
 
 I Mm in receipl of """""tL/"' 
 
 your tetter \'— ^ 
 
 I am obliged ^ 
 
 1 am rather Burpri led 
 
 I am reque >ted 
 i hi reque ted to state 
 I am very sorry 
 I a m very 1 1 »rry 
 
 Mi ii you should think 
 
 I beg to enclose 
 I can a 38ure you 
 
 I d I iiml. 
 
 I enclose accounl 
 
 I enclose cheque *—*-p 
 
 I have ii" objection ^— v 
 
 AND CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 I have received 
 I have the honor 
 
 I have to inform you 
 
 I shall be obliged 
 I shall be pleased 
 
 I shall expect 
 I thank you 
 I will consider 
 I will endeavor 
 if we understand 
 if you will oblige 
 in consideration 
 in exchange 
 in the course of a 
 
 few d»ys 
 in my last letter 
 
 in my letter 
 
 in reply 
 
 in i i-|ii\ to your letter 
 
 in the matter 
 into I he matter 
 in this case 
 
 it gives me grea.1 
 
 pleasure 
 in which you will Bee 
 
 in your la .t letter 
 in your lei ter 
 in your reply 
 
 in your reply to 
 
 nu letter 
 .lust possible 
 
 just received
 
 BUSINESS PHRASES 
 
 Last week 
 Lowest terms 
 
 4~ 
 
 
 Make an appoint- 
 ment 
 
 much obliged 
 
 my last letter 
 ray letter 
 
 Necessary ar- 
 rangements 
 necessary atten- 
 tion 
 next week 
 
 no coniinunica- -— ^_jd 
 
 tion . 
 
 Of this date I 
 
 ordinary rates v], 
 
 our West t hanks / ( c 
 
 Payment of ac- X^^ 
 
 count 
 
 postal card \^ 
 
 please note "\^ 
 
 Railway companies 
 
 registered letter /y 
 
 respectfully request /^v/* - ^ 
 
 Satisfactory answer P / ~^ sy "^ 
 
 some time ago c^~^~ 
 
 special rates "^/j, 
 
 To our satisfac- 
 tion <k 
 
 Under bill of sale °-\f* 
 underwriters ^>^ 
 
 unless we receive £^\^ 
 
 AND CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 We are confident 
 we are in a position 
 
 we are not satis- 
 
 Bed 
 we beg to ack- 
 nowledge 
 
 we beg to call 
 
 your attention ! 
 
 we have received t/\ii_ 
 
 we respectfully 
 
 reque I 
 we shall expeel 
 
 which will be r\ 
 
 takenintoconsideration U 
 
 You are at liberty k 
 your considera- <S 
 
 tion b 
 
 3 our Bavor > 
 
 your last letter 
 your obedienl 
 
 Servant 
 
 yours faithfully 
 yours obedienl ly 
 
 yours respectfully 
 
 yours truly 
 
 105 
 
 vi. 
 
 "V 
 
 your reply to my / V-/' 
 
 letter 
 
 you may rely 
 you ina\ require 
 you may consider 
 youmust consider 
 
 you will be sorry 
 you will consider
 
 1G6 BUSINESS LETTERS. 
 
 BUSINESS LETTERS.* 
 
 Mr. Ciias. Anderson, 
 
 1001 Fifth Avenue, New York City. 
 Dear Sir:—] regret that I am compelled to return your 
 check for $50.00, being 10$ on your application for 
 "Hecker" Preferred. The applications were largely in 
 excess of the amount offered. I secured some in my own 
 name and would have let you have the amount desired, 
 but it was all sold on Saturday. Should I be able to se- 
 cure any, 1 shall be pleased to set aside live shares for 
 you. Thanking you for past favors, 
 Yours respect fully, 
 
 2. 
 Mr. John Robb, Altoona, Pa. 
 
 Dear Sir : Promptly upon receipt, of this letter, cancel 
 policy 428967 Wilson Bros., and re-write for an amount 
 not exceeding $1,500. Unless you can d<> this and have a 
 daily report in this office by Sept. 11th the day insurance 
 »oi's into force, please retire us altogether from the risk, 
 yours respect fully, 
 
 o 
 
 Mi:. B. II. HOWLAND, 
 
 I is West 69th Sired, New York city. 
 Deal' Sir : Your favor of Sept. Mth received, and we 
 have sent you the cord of pine and oak kindling wood 
 
 as ordered. In relation to the hickorj wood, you may 
 
 remember that yon wrote us on the 4th of last January, 
 asking lis to put two cords of hickory wood in your 
 cellar during the summer. We have been waiting till we 
 commenced to move our selected stock from the country. 
 The first shipment we are hauling to-day. 
 
 Unless Otherwise advised we will select yon two cords 
 
 or more if you desire, and put it in your cellar this week. 
 
 The price will be the same as last. 
 
 V*r\ truly, 
 
 * For additional practice the student is referred to '■ Business Corre- 
 spondence in Shorthand," containing m tual letters dictated in Amerl 
 can offices. Keyed in ordlnan type, and the matter divided Into sections 
 foi testing of speed in shorthand or typewriting K) pages in cover. 
 Pi Ice, 80 cents.
 
 BUSINESS LETTERS. 107 
 
 4. 
 
 Mr. TT. Clark, Providence, R. T. 
 
 Bear Sir: — We have a vessel Load of pine wood here 
 to-day of about the size required a1 your dock. If you 
 can take the wood which we are under contract to fur- 
 nish you. we should be very glad to deliver it just now. 
 
 The object of this letter is not to hasten you at all, but 
 to guard against the possibility that when you need wood 
 we might have great difficulty in getting a vessel small 
 enough to come to your dock. We will send the vessel 
 down Monday morning if you desire to take it. Please 
 answer I > y return mail and oblige. 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 5. 
 Mr. John Jones, Chicago, 111. 
 
 Pair Sir: — Mr. George Adler handed us your letter to 
 him of the Kith inst., in relation to the claim against the 
 Insurance Co. We have inquired of a member of the late 
 linn of Crockett & James, as to the authority of Mr. 
 Taylor to make the draft for one hundred dollars in 
 favor of the Insurance Co. We are advised that the 
 clerk had no such authority, and that the Insurance Co. 
 cannot possibly succeed in deducting the amount from 
 t he account due by them. 
 
 At the same time if there is to be any litigation about 
 the matter, we prefer to let ii go. Cur reason for mak- 
 ing this statement is. that the expense of contesting the 
 matter will be so considerable, thai in view of the amount 
 involved it will be hardly worth while to continue the 
 prosecution. At the same time we urge you to make an 
 adjustment of the matter with the Insurance Co. so that 
 at any rate you will receive from them an amount sufficient 
 to pay your and our fees. 
 
 Yours respect fully, 
 
 6. 
 Mu. John Brow, Washington, lb C. 
 
 Dear Sir : — We have your endorsement under policy 
 329767, and beg you will have the kindness to pay the 
 /'/■<< rtit, i return premium to-morrow and retire our policy. 
 We have this risk marked to drop at expiration, and, as
 
 168 BUSINESS LETTERS. 
 
 you will have to provide for it elsewhere, you might as 
 well do it to-morrow as a few days later. Please give 
 this matter your prompt attention. 
 
 Yours very truly. 
 
 7. 
 Mr. John Louis, 1000 Broadway, New York City. 
 
 Dear Sir : — Enclosed please find the original mortgage 
 made and executed by John Davis to you, to secure the 
 payment of the sum of five hundred dollars, a copy of 
 winch was tins day filed in the office of the Register of 
 the City aud County of New York, as required by law. 
 You understand that the chattel mortgage must be 
 renewed within thirty days previous to the 17th day of 
 June, 1889, together with a statement signed by you, 
 showing the amount that may lie due at the time that 
 you renew the mortgage. This must be done every year 
 until the mortgage is paid. Kindly acknowledge receipt 
 and oblige, Yours very truly, 
 
 8. 
 Mr. L. E. Brooks, Washington, I). ('. 
 
 Dear Sir : — Your favor of .March liith enclosing report 
 for week ending March 17th just received. The provi- 
 sion in the contract to which you object, was put there 
 as much for the benefit of our representatives as for our 
 
 own. We are old hook canvassers, and experience lias 
 abundantly taught us that far more sales can be made 
 and far more satisfactory, if an agent i> canvassing one 
 or two books than if he is canvassing more than that 
 number; however, you can make the experiment if you 
 desire, but if it prove a failure, as it is almost certain to 
 do, we will have to repeal t he old hackneyed phrase, "we 
 told you so." Very truly yours, 
 
 9. 
 Mus. Hill, "Red Bank, N r . J. 
 
 Dear Madam /—In replj to your favor of the 20th inst., 
 the goods nached us safely, and the suits ordered were 
 
 forwarded by express on the 22d inst. We beg to say 
 Ilia! your oiiler for shoes is rather indefinite, and we are 
 
 unable to tell exactly the styles you desire. We have
 
 BUSINESS LETTERS. L69 
 
 mailed t<> you under a separate cover a copy of our cata- 
 logue to which we refer you for prices and description of 
 
 our shoes. Kindly make a selection of the styles you 
 prefer. Trusting this delay will not inconvenience you, 
 we are, Very truly yours, 
 
 10. 
 
 The Scranton Coal Co., Scranton, Pa.. 
 
 Gentlemen : — Confirming your communication of this 
 date, we would thank you to take up a boat, and ship 
 upon our hill of lading a cargo of Highland stove coal to 
 
 New York Condensed Milk Co., Passaic, via Port Morris 
 & Harlem R. 1!., for our account. We would like this 
 coal shipped promptly. 
 
 Very t ruly yours, 
 
 11. 
 Mi:. James Quinlan, 
 
 1246 Sixth Avenue, New York City. 
 Dear Sir: —To your favor of the 8th inst., I would say 
 that I do not recollect ever having informed you that the 
 property corner of Third Avenue and 11th Street was sold 
 by me to .lames Rush instead of to Mrs. Caroline Powers. 
 I might have written you that James Push, who is act- 
 ing for Mrs. Powers, who is at present in Europe, will 
 pay the interest on the property. 
 
 Yours respeel fully, 
 
 P.\ 
 Thk EUREKA M \.\ri'\< ti kino Co.. Cincinnati, 0. 
 
 Gentlemen: — Your favor of the 17th relative to Mr. 
 James Morrello of Pio Janeiro, to hand and carefully 
 noted. Replying to your inquiry we beg to state that we 
 consider .Mr. Morrello a \er\ desirable party to have busi- 
 ness with. 
 
 Our methods have been to ship to panics in South 
 America upon his order, and cashing the drafts here in 
 New York and paying him a commission. Our dealings 
 with, him have extended oxer a period of six years, and 
 have been most satisfactory. We should not hesitate to 
 extend to him quite a large line. 
 
 Yours very truly,
 
 170 
 
 I. AW PHRASES. 
 
 13. 
 
 Mi:. James Cameron, Albany, 1ST. Y. 
 
 Di nr Sir: - Referring to your letters and telegrams, the 
 receipt of which was acknowledged yesterday, we regrel 
 that we arc obliged to delay your advertising, and our 
 only reason for doing so is that it seems to be for your 
 advantage that we should. 
 
 The advertisement sent us occupies considerably more 
 space than you have stipulated: too much space, in fact, 
 to enable us to cover the country as it should be covered 
 for the amount of your remittance. 
 
 If, however, you decide that proof No. 1 inclosed here- 
 with, is to be used, we will proceed to give you what we 
 consider best service for the money, but we favor cutting 
 down the advertisement so that it will go in less space. 
 ami suggest copy No. 2 as a substitute. This letter is 
 sent under special delivery stamp and ought to reach you 
 promptly. Telegraph us your desire in the matter. 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 Act ual damage „-±.hz>. 
 articles of agreement /- 
 
 as to I he matters ' b 
 " " these matters Q — b 
 
 - •• those " ^ 
 
 Bankruptcy ( !ourt X 
 before him 
 
 " me > e-\„ 
 beneficial estati 
 
 " interest 
 
 bill Of sale \ j 
 
 breach of promise of mat 
 riage ^V-^/ 
 
 LAW PHRASES. 
 
 by t his act ion (^ 
 " " court Y_ 
 called for the defendant ^-i 
 " " •• plaintilf X 
 in his own behalf ' ^- S —\ J 
 Centra] Criminal Court Q-_^ 
 Chancer] Division (_ s> /| 
 circumstantial evidence o "^-v-P 
 Circuit Court Yr- 
 ( 'oinmon jury l^ 
 law T 
 ( lounty ( llerk 
 C i
 
 County Treasurer J2- 
 Counsel for the defence I p 
 
 " '• '• defendant i 
 
 k plaintiff — i 
 
 ■• '• prisoner %_^ 
 
 " " " prosecution '^-i 
 ( 'null of A [>peals trA \/ t ' 
 
 " " Bankruptcy \ 
 
 " " Chancery 1^ 
 " Claims ^_ / ^ i> 
 
 " " Common Pleas <r ^~^\ 
 
 " '• Equity ^ 
 
 " General Sessions 7 
 
 " " Justice c/ 
 
 " •• Record J^~ 
 
 " ■■ Spec inl Sessions <r V, 
 crirainaljurisprudence c/ 
 
 Deed of sett lenient f 
 
 " '• trusi ', 
 defendant's tesl imonv \ 
 aired e\ idence L 
 
 " examination I 
 District A-ttornej 
 " Court \ 
 Ecclesiastical ( lour! ^ 
 equity of redempl ion ~l a 
 Federal Court ^-i 
 fee simple v 
 fiduciary capacity 1 
 
 i, \\\ nil; \-i <. 
 
 final decree V^< 
 I'm- defendant ^ 
 " plaintiff \^ 
 
 •* t his action 
 " " court S 
 ( reneral term / 
 
 in 
 
 gentlemen of the jury r 
 
 goods and chattels T 
 
 government securities ^ A 
 
 gross receipts c-S\ 
 
 llaheas Corpus c \ — «. 
 
 heirs, executors, administra- 
 tors, and assigns *~f> ■ 
 
 heirs, executors, administra- 
 tors, or assigns °~f*-* 
 
 In t bis action ^\_ 
 
 " " court X- 
 
 " w itnessw hereof 
 
 interlocutory decree 
 international law 
 interstate commerce I ^-^ 
 " " commis 
 
 sion i jcr>^5 
 
 Joint Stock °f 
 
 " company V_ 
 
 judicial sale 
 
 Justice of the peace j^ 
 Last will and testament t™ •"
 
 172 
 
 LAW PHRASES. 
 
 learned counsel for the de- 
 fence / ^~ / U_p 
 
 learned counsel for the de- 
 fendant 
 
 learned counsel for the plain- 
 tiff ^~^ 
 
 learned counsel for the pris- 
 oner ^/ ^s-' 
 
 learned counsel for the pros- 
 ecution _^ \ 
 
 learned judge fl 
 
 legal estate -f^~\ 
 
 letters of administration / Pa 
 
 letter's patent ( j 
 letters testamentary ( °*/ 
 Life estate f\a 
 Malice prepense /^i\ 
 manslaughter ^-6 
 marine insurance ^~y~~ 
 may it please t lie courl 
 " " " your Honor ^\ 
 
 memorandum of agree- 
 ments^ — -a 
 my learned friend 
 
 Next of kin v_^-^-; 
 No. sir k_p^ 
 notary publil 
 ( >f this aetioii ( 
 
 y* 
 
 "V-. 
 
 Of this agreement {. ^ 
 
 " " court >. 
 
 objection sustained 2> 
 offered in evidence ^v 
 originating summons /j-^ 
 Party of the first part \<? 
 
 " " '• second " 
 Patent office 
 penal offence 
 Petit jury ^ 
 plaintiff's case \-i> 
 
 " counsel \j^ 
 " testimony 
 " witnesses y 
 police court \^~ 
 power of attorney \/J/ s ~ x 
 preliminary injunction *\y'^/ 
 prisoner at the liar > v 
 Probate, Divorce, and Ad- 
 miralty Division I I | 
 Quit claim c^^ 
 Rebutting testimony j 
 
 re-cross examination 
 
 reversionary interest A 
 rigid of way ^/ 
 
 Solicitor Of patents C\ 
 
 special jury ^
 
 LAW I'lli; \>l -. 
 
 173 
 
 summary proceedings s-n/V 
 
 Supreme Court c \— <- 
 
 Tax deed L_p 
 
 that this action 4_ 
 
 " court t- 
 testimony of the defend- 
 
 aut ,] — j 
 
 testimony of the plain- 
 tiff K^ 
 
 trust funds L 
 
 Verdict for the defendant °\_^ 
 " " plaintiff °\ 
 " of the jury ^y, 
 Vice-Chancellor Vo 
 voluntary conveyance ^ r ^\r, 
 Ward of the court y\. 
 warrant of attorney -/\/^~ 
 without prejudice % 
 wrongful possession /^% 
 Yes, sir J^ 
 your Honor
 
 171 LEGAL CORRESPONDENCE. 
 
 LEGAL CORRESPONDENCE. 
 
 1. 
 Mr. Gr. H. Muller, Lowell, Mass. 
 
 Dear Sir: — Your letter of July 15th duly received. We 
 have not as yet examined Charles Spencer in supplemen- 
 tary proceedings. We shall, however, obtain an order 
 and cause him to be examined. The very fact that he is 
 employed as an excise inspector, leads us to suppose that 
 the judgment cannot be collected. We cannot, as you 
 undoubtedly are aware, levy upon Ins salary, and there- 
 fore the prospects are not very bright for a collection. 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 2. 
 Messrs. E. Brown & Co., Kansas City, Mo. 
 
 Gentlemen : — As further consideration for the execution 
 by you of the agreement with you, dated this day. I here- 
 by promise and agree to pay out of the proceeds of the 
 collections of the outstanding accounts; which will lie 
 intrusted with me for collection, an amount equal to one- 
 half of the sheriff's fees, which have been incurred by 
 reason of the attachments and executions issued in the 
 actions commenced by you. Very truly yours, 
 
 3. 
 Mr. II. Hambury, New Fork City. 
 
 Dear Sir : — Early in the week we procured an order 
 
 for the examination of Charles Stevens, in supplementary 
 proceedings upon the judgment obtained by you. The 
 order was returnable this a.m. at LO. 30. We attended at 
 
 the examination, and after proceeding with tin' same for 
 
 an hour, Mr. .lames agreed that if the examination was 
 adjourned fur a month, that he would, within a week, 
 send me a. check for $75 on account, and shortly there- 
 after would settle tin' judgment. Your Mr. Johnson 
 informed us thai if the matter could be finally closed, a, 
 concession would be made to Mr. .lames upon the amount 
 
 evidenced by the judgment, ami in order to procure a 
 
 settlement of the same, we communicated that fact to 
 
 him. As soon as the check is received we will forward it. 
 
 I return to (own this a.m., and have not as yet received
 
 LEGAL CORRESPONDENCE. 175 
 
 anything bj way of information that is important, in re- 
 gard to Mr. Smith. 
 
 I telephoned this morning to Judge Gilbert, and lie 
 answered thai Mr. Smith had written him a Letter saying 
 thai he was ill, and asking liim to come to the house, 
 which he refused to do. He further says that he expects 
 to see him on Monday. Yours very truly, 
 
 4. 
 Mrs. 11. A. Boyd, 1111 East Street, New York City. 
 Dear Madam: — The administrator and administratrix 
 
 of the defendant aeknow Ledge the circumstance that they 
 have advertised in a commercial paper for the last week 
 of December the goods, chattels and credits of the plain- 
 tiff, botli domestic and otherwise, in the establishment 
 
 of tlie deceased individual. The character of the g Ls 
 
 was altogether satisfactory, several articles naturally 
 bringing high prices, mid probably the prospects for the 
 heirs of the deceased are rather more than expected, 
 especially owing to the essential facts that the executor 
 and executrix will mortgage the property. The inden- 
 ture of mortgage will immediately he executed, and inas- 
 much as the architecture is of the did Catholic style ami 
 not original, will fetch a good price and we have no 
 doubt surprise the undersigned, for which we should he 
 thankful. We understand, or rather understood, that a 
 welcome subscription for the stranger by several revered, 
 respected and popular gentlemen is to he made. And to 
 our knowledge there is no objection or reason why we 
 ourselves should not perform some kind act, the perform- 
 ance of which in this peculiar case, notwithstanding the 
 mistake made by the majority, will meet with greal satis 
 faction. They say the eldest child comes of age in Sep- 
 tember. This subject tou'ether with whatever follow-., 
 and whenever it may happen, will give the administrator 
 no trouble in the regular course of things. 
 The phonographer took phonographic notes at the 
 
 death of the testator. They ha\e keen published ill a 
 
 remarkable publication which i-. represented by a repre- 
 sentative of the republic. Nevertheless we shall call a 
 meeting of the executors, nothing happening to the con- 
 trary, by November, when everything will he settled. 
 Yours respectfully,
 
 17(5 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK.* 
 
 HOW A LAWSUIT IS BEGUN AND CARKIED ON. 
 
 There are several wordy used in speaking of a lawsuit, 
 namely "action," " suit," "proceeding," "cause," etc. 
 These words have slightly different shades of meaning, 
 but are generally used synonymously. 
 
 There are also different kinds of lawsuits. These may 
 lie divided into two large classes, criminal and civil ac- 
 tions. The first of these relate absolutely to the commit- 
 ting of some crime, while the latter embrace only such 
 cases as relate to the settling of a matter in connection 
 with which no crime or criminal intention is charged. 
 
 Let us suppose that A has sold a parcel of goods to B 
 on credit. At the proper time an account is rendered. 
 Instead, however, of promptly paying for them, the pur- 
 chaser neglects this important duty, and after many futile 
 attempts to collect the amount, as a last resort, A seeks 
 the advice of a lawyer. If the latter deems t lie facts in 
 the case sufficient to promise a successful issue in favor 
 of A, he assumes the conduct of the case upon payment 
 of a "retainer," according to Blackstone "a fee paid to 
 engage a lawyer or counsellor to maintain a case or pre- 
 vent his being employed by the opposite party." Upon 
 the payment of this retainer, which may vary in amount 
 
 from twenty-live dollars up to many thousands, A be- 
 comes the lawyer's "client," while the lawyer is known 
 i V- " attorney " or " counsel." 
 
 After stating the facts of the case to his attorney, the 
 
 latter proceeds to " draw up " or " draft " the first neces- 
 sary document in the case. This documenl is known as a 
 "complaint," and embodies, besides 'he name of the 
 
 * Specially written for thie work by w I,. Mnson. Principal of the 
 Metropolitan School of Isaac Pitman Shorthand, 95 Fifth Avenue, New 
 V«»rk.
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IX LEGAL WORK. 177 
 
 court in which it lias been decided the case shall be 
 brought, and the names of the parties to the suit (all this 
 being technically known as the "title"), the facts upon 
 which the proceeding is to be had, ending with a "prayer" 
 lor judgment and the name and address of the lawyer. 
 
 Following tins comes the sworn statement, or "verifi- 
 cation," of the plaintiff, which he himself must sign 
 before a " notary public," who testifies that the verifica- 
 tion has been made in due form. 
 
 Following is a form of complaint as commonly used 
 in New York, and in the majority of the States. 
 
 SUPERIOR COURT OF THE 
 CITY OF NEW YORK. 
 
 MARY 
 
 A. 
 
 MOORE and ALBERT II. 
 
 MOORE 
 
 , her husband, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Plaintiffs, 
 
 
 
 against 
 
 
 
 
 JOHN WILLIAMSON 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 The plaintiffs, lor a cause of action against the above 
 named defendant, respectfully show to this Honorable 
 Court and allege as follows, to wit: 
 
 First: That at all times hereinafter alleged, the plain- 
 tiffs were and still arc associated together as co-partners 
 doing business in the City of New York, under the firm 
 name ami style of M. A. Moore and Company. 
 
 Second: That at the city of New York, between the 
 4th day of June, and the 8th day of November, 1881, the 
 plaintiffs at the request of said defendant, and upon his 
 promise to pay for the same, sold and delivered to said 
 defendant, upon ten days' credit, certain goods, wares 
 and merchandise of the agreed value of nine hundred
 
 178 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 and seventy-two dollars ($972.00), and that no part thereof 
 has ever been paid by the defendant. 
 
 Wherefore: These plaintiffs demand judgment against 
 said defendant for the sum of nine hundred and seventy- 
 two dollars ($972.00) with interest from the 8th day of 
 November, 1881, besides the costs of this action. 
 (Signed) John T. Jones, Plaintiffs' Attorney, 
 
 17 Bank St., N. Y. 
 
 City and County of New York, ss. : 
 
 A, being duly sworn, deposes and says: that lie is 
 the plaintiff herein; that the foregoing complaint is true 
 of his own knowledge, except as to the matters therein 
 stated to be alleged on information and belief, and as to 
 those matters he believes it to be true. 
 Sworn to before me this ) 
 day of 18 f 
 
 The paragraphs in a complaint, if more than one, after 
 the introductory paragraph, arc numbered, the para- 
 graph beginning " Wherefore " being called the " prayer." 
 The words at the beginning of the verification, — " City 
 and County of New York," — are known as the " venue," 
 a Latin word meaning the place where, or the locality 
 in which, the action is brought. The letters SS, arc an 
 abbreviation of the Latin word '-Scilicet" and mean 
 "to wit," or " namely." They must always be inserted, 
 as in most States their omission renders the verification 
 void. Every verification must, end with the "jurat" 
 (oath) "Sworn to before me," etc. 
 
 Of this complaint three copies arc made, one of which 
 i cut to or "served upon," the defendant's attorney; 
 one filed with the court in which the action is brought, 
 and the other retained by the plaintiff's attorney. It 
 is customary to fasten each copy of the complaint in 
 ;i 'cover," or piece of paper a little wider and longer 
 than the legal paper upon which the document is written,
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 179 
 
 and on this cover is endorsed the title of the case, the 
 name of the document, and the name of the plaint ill's 
 attorney with his address. With the complaint, however, 
 there must be bound into this cover another document 
 known as a "Summons," the form of which is substan- 
 tially as follows : 
 
 COURT. 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 vs. 
 Defendant. 
 
 TO THE ABOVE NAMED DEFENDANT: 
 
 YOU ARE HEREBY SUMMONED to answer the 
 complaint in this action, and to serve a copy of your 
 answer on the plaintiff's attorney herein, within — days 
 after the service of this summons, exclusive of the day of 
 service, and iu case of your failure to appear or answer, 
 judgment will be taken against you by default for the 
 relief demanded in the complaint. 
 
 Dated, New York, 
 
 189 Plaintiff's Attorneys, 
 
 (Office and P. o. address) 
 
 The blanks are to be filled in with ink or on the 
 typewriter, and the name and address of the plaintiff's 
 attorney. It will he M't-n by this Summons that the de- 
 fendant is required to appear in court to answer the com- 
 plaint within ascertain number of days after the service, 
 and on Ids failure to appeal', the plaintiff will have the 
 right to move that the judge for the " Court " as the judge 
 is frequently termed) give 1dm judgment against the de- 
 fendant in default of the hitter's appearance. 
 
 When the defendant or his attorney receives the com- 
 plaint, he must prepare a document in reply known as an
 
 180 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 " Answer." This document is arranged on the typewriter 
 exactly the same as the Complaint, with the same title, a 
 similar introduction, paragraphs numbered, the defend- 
 ant's lawyer's name and address, a verification, and the 
 defendant's signature before a notary. 
 
 The case is now fairly begun, and it is the plaintiff's 
 next move. He may do one of several things : — serve 
 upon the defendant an amended complaint which lie lias 
 a right to do by special permission of the Court, if he 
 finds anything in his original complaint needing altera- 
 tion; or he may ask the Court for an Order for delay, for 
 some cause which appears to him necessary. In order to 
 secure the Order which he covets, it is frequently neces- 
 sary that the attorney present to the Court a sworn state- 
 ment which is known as an ''Affidavit," before' he can 
 secure the desired Order. As the form of an Affidavit dif- 
 fers somewhat from that of a Complaint or Answer, it is 
 given herewith : 
 
 AFFIDAVIT ACCOMPANYING ORDER FOR AMENDED 
 COMPLAINT. 
 
 SUPERIOR COURT OF THE CITY OF NEW 
 YORK. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .MARY A. MOORE and ALBERT 
 
 ir. 
 
 MOORE, her husband, 
 
 
 
 Plaintiff's, 
 
 against 
 
 
 JOHN WILLIAMSON, 
 
 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 JAMES BALDWIN, being duly sworn, deposes and 
 says: 
 
 I am i he attorney for the plaintiffs herein. On or about 
 tin' day of March, 1890, I drafted the complaint
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IX LEGAL WORE. 181 
 
 in the above entitled action, a copy of which has been 
 duly filed with the Clerk of this Court, and served upon 
 the attorney for the defendants herein. 
 
 At the time of drawing such complaint we had infor- 
 mation, which we verily believed to be accurate, concern- 
 ing the allegations contained in the first paragraph of said 
 complaint. These allegations have since been found to l>e 
 somewhat incorrect, and while not materially affecting 
 the result of the action, we deem it necessary to make 
 such changes as seem to us best, in order to have the 
 complaint conform in all respects to the entire truth; and 
 it is therefore desired that an order be issued granting 
 permission to the plaintiffs to so amend their complaint 
 as to be in all respects accurate and true. 
 
 Sworn before me this ) 
 
 day of March, 1892. \ 
 
 The paragraphs in an affidavit may he numbered or not 
 according to taste, but court documents must be " fo- 
 lioed." This consists of indicating the end of each hun- 
 dred words in the margin for the sake of easy reference, 
 and it is usually done by writing "Fol. 1" opposite the 
 first word on the first line on the first page. "Fol. 2" or 
 " 2 ", is written nine lines below, on the theory that there 
 are ten words to a line, and at every nine lines the num- 
 ber of the folio is indicated in the same way, all the way 
 through the document. 
 
 Almost every paper has a peculiar form of its own, the 
 two most alike being the Complaint and the Answer. By 
 familiarizing one'- sell' with the different forms these can 
 he recognized at sight. An Affidavit, for instance, be- 
 gins with the "venue"; otherwise it is worthless. A 
 Complaint can be known by the fact that it begins with 
 some such words as "The plaintiff for a cause of action,'' 
 or "Plaintiffs by So and So. Esq., their attorney." etc. 
 At the time of drawing up the Affidavit the lawyer will
 
 182 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 also draw up a form of Order which lie desires to have 
 granted upon the facts set out in the Affidavit. This is 
 written in somewhat the following form : 
 
 At a special Term of the City Court of 
 New York, held at the Chambers 
 thereof, in the City Hall of said 
 city, on the 10th day of March, 
 1892. 
 PRESENT : 
 
 HON. ERNEST HALL, 
 
 Justice. 
 
 JOHN UNDERWOOD, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 against 
 
 EDWARD DONALD and AUGUSTUS RIGG, 
 
 Defendants. 
 
 Upon reading the annexed affidavit of the plaintiff 
 herein, from which it appears that since the service of the 
 complaint herein an order of arrest has been applied for, 
 on the ground thai the defendants have disposed of their 
 property with intent to cheat and defraud their creditors, 
 and that the complaint as served does not contain this 
 allegation as required by Section .">G8 of the Code of Civil 
 Procedure. 
 
 Now, upon motion of Franklin A: Ogden, Attorneys for 
 plaintiff, it is 
 
 ORDERED that the plaintiff serve upon defendant's at- 
 torney herein, within twenty days from date, an amended 
 Complaint containing the allegation that since the making 
 of the contract set forth in the complaint, the defendants 
 have removed or disposed of their property with intent 
 to cheat and defraud their creditors.
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 183 
 
 It will be seen that the attorney is given so many days 
 in which to draft a new Complaint, and it usually costs 
 him five or ten dollars as a fee to pay the court for the 
 trouble of issuing it. Then if he fails to have the Order 
 ready within the time stipulated, he will be in default and 
 contempt, and his opponent may proceed to take advan- 
 tage thereof. 
 
 An Amended Complaint is drawn up in the same form 
 as the original one, served in the same manner, and an- 
 swered or not, as the defendant chooses. The plaintiff's 
 attorney upon receiving the answer of the defendant to 
 his first or to his Amended Complaint, may issue another 
 document in response which is called a " Reply, " and is 
 arranged similarly to the Complaint. The parties then 
 proceed to trial on the day appointed. 
 
 This gives, in a general way, the course usually pursued 
 in the bringing of a suit, but this is only the beginning. 
 These preliminary steps are to be followed by the real 
 "proceedings." or taking of evidence in the presence of 
 the judge who is to try the ease, with or without a jury. 
 
 Evidence may be presented either in form of oral testi- 
 mony or by means of documents. Any papers which 
 have passed between the parties to a suit at any time 
 previous to the commencement thereof, such as Leases, 
 Deeds, Mortgages, Agreements, Letters, Articles of Co- 
 partnership »nd the like, may be used as proof of allega- 
 tions set up either by the plaintiff or the defendant. 
 Most of the proof, however, is oral, and for this purpose 
 witnesses are called to testify to their knowledge of the 
 facts which it is intended to prove. It is in the taking of 
 such testimony that the stenographer is called upon to 
 exercise his greatest skill and use to the utmost his intelli- 
 gence, education and common Bense, and while every 
 stenographer may not hope to become an official court 
 reporter, almost- anyone who can write shorthand rapidly 
 enough may be called upon at some time to take testimony
 
 184 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 at private hearings, such as those had before "Referees" 
 in the State of New York, or "Masters" in the State of 
 New Jersey, and elsewhere. 
 
 In taking testimony, great care must be paid to the 
 questions asked by the counsel or the Court, as well as to 
 the answers of the witnesses. 
 
 The witness may frequently be interrupted in the giving 
 of his testimony by the attorney on the opposite side 
 objecting either to the question or to the answer. Some- 
 times the objection will be made formally in something 
 like the following language : " Objected to as immaterial, 
 irrevelant, and incompetent." At other times the lawyer 
 will enter into an argument in which he will state his ob- 
 jections. This, however, the stenographer will rarely have 
 to take in full unless indeed specially requested to, but 
 he must listen carefully, and after the counsel is through 
 put the objection into proper form. Following is a sam- 
 ple of testimony when written out by the stenographer. 
 This form varies somewhat, but the general arrangement 
 remains the same. 
 
 NEW YORK SUPREME COURT. 
 
 CITY AND COUNTY OP NEW YOIJK. 
 
 HENRY MACY, et al. 
 
 against 
 CHARLES STEWART, 
 
 Plaintiff's. 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 New York, January 10, 1S93. 
 APPEARANCES : 
 
 John R, Brady, Esq., Attorney for Plaintiffs. 
 Messrs. Lee & Jackson, Attorneys for Defendant.
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IX LEGAL WORK. 185 
 
 Oath of referee waived by consent of both parties. 
 
 HENRY RAYMOND, a witness called on behalf of the 
 
 plaintiffs, being duly sworn, testifies as follows : 
 
 DIRECT EXAMINATION: I'.Y Ml!. BRADT. 
 
 Q. You are the book-keeper of Messrs. Macy & Co., the 
 plaintiffs ? A. I was. 
 
 Q. And you were their book-keeper throughout the 
 year 1888 ? A. Yes, sir; I was. 
 
 Q. Did you ever see Mr. Stewart, the defendant herein, 
 in Mr. Macy's shop ? A. I have never seen Mr. Stewart 
 before. 
 
 Q. In Mr. Macy's shop ? A. In Mr. Macy's shop. 
 
 Q. Did you ever hear any conversation between Mr. 
 Stewart and Air. Macyaboul Palmer? A. About Palmer, 
 I did not. 
 
 Q. Did you hear any conversation about these sashes 
 that are spoken of \ A. I did. 
 
 Q. "What, was said ? A. Mr. Stewart sent us a letter 
 requesting that the sashes should be sent up, that they 
 were needed ; in the letter it was said that Palmer and 
 Smith would want the sashes. Mr. Macy then said, "I 
 will have nothing to do with those parties." 
 
 Q. Did Mr. Macy tell Mr. Stewart this, that you were 
 telling me now 1 A. He told that to Mr. Stewart, too, 
 about this. 
 
 (J. What I want to know merely is, what did Mr. Macy 
 say to Mr. Stewart about these sashes ; not what Mr. 
 Macy said to you. thai is not allowable ; but what he said 
 to Mr. Stewart ! A. Well, he said to Mr. Stewart, then, 
 that he did not — such words as that — I cannot recoiled 
 the exact expression. 
 
 Q. The substance ! A. That he did not consider 
 Palmer and Smith responsible enough for the amount.
 
 18G PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 CROSS EXAMINATION : BY MR. JACKSON. 
 
 Q. You were asked a moment ago if Mr. Macy said 
 anything to Mr. Stewart about the financial responsibility 
 of Palmer and Smith ? A. Nothing more than that. 
 
 Q. I understood you to state that lie had not said any- 
 thing in your presence ? A. Only that he did not con- 
 sider them responsible enough for the amount. 
 
 Q. When was this ? That was after the contract had 
 been made ? A. Certainly. 
 
 BY PLAINTIFFS' COUNSEL : 
 
 Q. Was this before the sash was delivered ? A. No, 
 sir ; not before the sash was delivered. 
 
 BY DEFENDANT'S COUNSEL : 
 
 (J. Were you present after the note was protested, 
 when Mr. Stewart came to the store ? A. I was. 
 Adjourned to Thursday, March 28th, 1893, at 2 p.m. 
 
 Testimony is written on different styles of paper. Some 
 lawyers prefer what is known as square paper, (hat is let- 
 ter size, while others prefer the long paper, or legal size; 
 but whichever is chosen, the paper is usually ruled with 
 a red line at the left side, and in writing out the tran- 
 script the " Q" for question is usually put outside this 
 nd line; sometimes, also, the ''A'' for answer is put 
 outside, but quite frequently this is made to follow the 
 questiou on the same line with the latter. As the taking 
 of testimony is tin; most rapid note-taking, probably, 
 which a stenographer has to do, it is better that he 
 should begin every question on the Left hand margin of 
 the page and write clear across and back to the margin 
 again, and begin every answer in the middle of the page, 
 and so back to the middle for each line, lather than to
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 187 
 
 attempt to indicate in any other way the beginning of 
 the question or answer. 
 
 OTHER LEGAL FORMS. 
 
 Beside court documents such as have been already de- 
 scribed in the foregoing pages, there are many miscella- 
 neous legal documents, such as Deeds. Mortgages, Leases, 
 Towers of Attorney, Assignments, Articles of Agree- 
 ments, Minutes of Meetings, Wills, etc., etc., each of 
 which has its own peculiar form. A copy of the final 
 document in a lawsuit — the Opinion — set out in both 
 shorthand and longhand, will be found on pages 188- 
 192. As this contains the correct outlines for many legal 
 terms in common use, a careful study of same will be 
 found most helpful.
 
 188 
 
 PRACTICAL niNTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 (Opinion.) 
 
 FIRST DEPARTMENT, 
 GENERAL TERM. 
 
 PEARCE BARNES ° 
 
 
 k-' 
 
 
 A* 
 
 
 josepii 
 
 D. 
 
 JONES 
 
 ' c, 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 X 
 
 NOAH DAVIS, 
 
 JOHN R. BRADY, 
 
 CHARLES DANIELS, 
 
 J. J. 
 
 APPEAL 
 ^ ' "^ L_ " ^ - x V . * ^- \ *- L. ' ^, ' 
 x C v- ^p -- , ^ x 
 
 Stern & Ames, ^ ^ x 
 Thomas G. Evans, ^ ,A. x 
 C. DANIELS, J. 
 
 • * <-, -^ - ° \ \ - v/ ' S. \^ V — 
 
 % „ V * ^ x vl^. " "° ) / ) /-^ r 
 
 M * / I, . - x . ;/ U fc,. - (, ' \ .Ja *> 
 
 """"^7. . I , </, , •»^- $> , 
 
 
 ' ? 1 ', ., x_
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IX LEGAL WORE. 
 
 189 
 
 \«G-> ■- V ^/ ? X V ' 30 i' 
 
 ) 
 
 |. > Vi, </, V' ' 
 
 1- 
 
 ' 10j^ 
 
 ~l \ c ^ ^x 
 
 ^: 
 
 ("H v ^ Y" 546x ) 
 
 I 
 
 > ^ , 
 
 T_ 
 
 s \ 
 
 ^l' ^ >'^ s - 
 
 w „ ^ o L, -\ -^ ^ / n^- % Ux
 
 190 PRACTICAL HINTS IN LEGAL WORK. 
 
 KEY TO "OPINION." 
 
 FIRST DEPARTMENT, 
 GENERAL TERM. 
 
 PEARCE BARNES as Receiver, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Respondent, 
 
 
 against 
 
 JOSEPH D. 
 
 JONES and others. 
 
 
 Appellants. 
 
 NOAH DAVIS, 
 
 Presiding Justice, 
 JOHN R. BRADY, 
 CHARLES DANIELS. 
 J. J. 
 
 APPEAL 
 
 from an Order denying a motion made to compel the 
 PlaintilT lo make his complaint more definite and 
 certain, and to elect between inconsistent cause, 
 etc. 
 
 Stern & Ames, for Appellants. 
 Thomas G. Evans, for Respondent. 
 C. DANIELS, J. 
 
 The complaint is in the form known as a creditors' hill 
 t<> reach and apply property belonging to the debtors to 
 the payment of two judgments recovered against them 
 upon which execution has been issued and returned un- 
 satisfied. It shows the commencement and prosecution 
 of supplementary proceedings in which a Receiver was 
 appointed of the property and effects of the judgment 
 debtors, and that tlie plaintiff is the successor of that 
 Receiver. By the succeeding allegations the causes of 
 action upon which the judgment was recovered set forth 
 that the judgment debtors were partners in business 
 when such demands accrued against them, and upon a
 
 PRACTICAL HINTS IN* LEGAL WORK. 191 
 
 dissolution of their copartnership, the defendant, Jones, 
 who was one of the partners, took the greater part of 
 tlic assets of the firm, and by a written agreement with 
 his copartner, assumed and agreed to pay the debts and 
 liabilities of the firm. That instead of doing that, he, 
 together with two other persons, formed a corporation 
 under the manufacturing laws of the State, to carry on 
 the same business as had been transacted by the firm, 
 and that t he assets placed in Ins hands were transferred 
 to the corporation after its formation, and used in carry- 
 ing on a profitable business by it. The capital of the 
 corporation is stated to have been fixed at the sum of 
 $•30,000, and $10,000 of the capital stock was issued to 
 the wife of the defendant, Jones, at his instance, and 
 without auy actual consideration, parted with by her. 
 
 The transfer of the assets of the firm to the corporation 
 as well as the stock issued by it to the wife of the de- 
 fendant, Jones, is alleged to have been with intent to 
 delay and defraud the creditors of the preceding copart- 
 nership, and for that reason it is claimed that the title of 
 the wife of Jones to this stock should be vacated and set 
 aside, and its proceeds applied to the payment of the 
 judgment. This is the substance of the complaint, al- 
 though the facts are more clearly set forth and with 
 greater detail in it. A perusal of the complaint pro- 
 duces the conviction that no misapprehension whatever 
 could arise as to the scope of the action, the facts upon 
 which it has been based, or the relief intended to he 
 secured by it. 
 
 The allegations are clear and distinct, and free from 
 all obscurity, and no difficulty stands in the way of fully 
 understanding the claims inserted in it. In fact it may 
 well be said to have been drawn up on a clear, legal and 
 logical theory, plainly, precisely and intelligently set 
 forth, more so certainly than pleadings of this nature 
 usually are. The law has provided for an application to
 
 192 PRACTICAL HINTS IX LEGAL WORK. 
 
 make a pleading more definite and certain, only when its 
 precise meaning or application is not apparent. 
 (Code of Civil Procedure, 546.) 
 
 This is not a pleading of that nature, for the allega- 
 tions are definite and certain, and their precise meaning 
 is entirely evident. 
 
 "While it is alleged that all the assets of the preceding 
 firm were transferred to the corporation with the intent 
 of hindering, delaying and defrauding the creditors of 
 the firm, the only relief claimed by reason of this circum- 
 stance is that the $10,000 of stock issued to the wife of the 
 partner who had undertaken to pay the firm's debts, should 
 be used and appropriated for the payment of the two 
 judgments recovered by the creditors at whose instance 
 the Receiver was appointed. There consequently was but 
 one cause of action or one subject matter to lie affected 
 by these general allegations inserted in the complaint. 
 The claim of the Receiver, upon the facts as they have 
 been stated, might very well have been more extended - , 
 but as this stock or its proceeds would probably lie suffi- 
 cient to pay the judgmenl and the expenses of the litiga- 
 tion, no further relief seems to have been thought neces- 
 sary. The complaint was well drawn and a cause of action 
 presented by it has been clearly stated, and there was 
 consequently no ground for the motion denied by the 
 order from which the appeal has been taken. 
 
 The order should be affirmed with $10 costs besides the 
 disbursements.
 
 THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 193 
 
 IDEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 Almighty and Everlasting God 
 
 Almighty God ^ ^£^- 
 
 Apostle Paul . VVT.. 
 
 ark of the covenant ~"\ v 
 
 articles of religion J 
 at the lust day .1.1. 
 
 „ right hand of God „br7. 
 
 Begotten son of God >^-a — — 
 
 blessed Lord p- 
 
 blessing of God >o- 
 blood of Christ V-= 
 blood of Jesus S 
 
 body and Mood of Christ £^ 
 
 body and mind |^ 
 Catholic Church _ ) 
 Catholic faith 
 Catholic Priest 
 Catholic worship 
 ceremonial law °V^ 
 child of God £L 
 children of God k 
 children of Israel ( 
 Christ Jesus "v 
 „ Jesus our Lord 1/ 
 
 13 
 
 Christian brethren c_s \ 
 Christian brother ' — \ 
 Christian character c ~ 
 Christian charity l/\ 
 Christian church " / 
 Christian faith S 
 Church and State y 
 Church of Christ / 
 Church of England / 
 Church of Ireland /^ 
 Church of Rome L^ 
 Church principles / 
 cross of Christ cr- ^ r "° 
 Daily bread r 
 day of redemption l/J^ 
 Divine being I — v 
 Divine glory L_<_ 
 Divine government U~ — i 
 Divine love L_. 
 
 Divine Man l_^ 
 Divine Providence 
 
 U — ■i 
 
 Divine things L^^> 
 Divine wisdom U_ </
 
 194 THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 Elder of the Church f\ glorious gospel of the Lord 
 
 Jesus Christ p <l— 
 
 God and Saviour ~v 
 
 Episcopal Church y? 
 
 Epistle of Paul .v^rwT. 
 
 „ to the Corinthians .VfZ. God m nis goodness 
 
 „ to the Romans .\/3.. 
 eternal bliss L_^ 
 
 eternal condemnation 
 
 eternal damnation 
 
 everlasting covenant 
 everlasting day ^_. 
 everlasting God ^_ 
 everlasting life V 
 everlasting misery V^-^ 
 Face of the earth Ko\ 
 family prayer V^-<\^ 
 fast day \> 
 Feast of tabernacles ]* 
 fellow-creature V^^ 
 for Christ's sake ^ _ 
 for ever V 
 for ever and ever N_ 
 forgiveness of sins \^L° 
 fruits <>i* the Spirit 
 future state Vj, 
 
 fnt are world V^/f 
 Glad tidings ^ 
 
 God is faithful ^7 
 God is good 
 God is great 
 God of grace 
 God of heaven v, 
 God of love " /V 
 God's character and govern- 
 ment "° ' V^ 
 God's glory 
 God's justice 
 
 God's law 
 
 -r 
 
 God's providence j 
 goodness of God ^_ji_ 
 gospel of peace ~~ v> 
 grace of God ^- a - 
 grow in grace <t- c ~ d 
 growing in grace r—*s-° 
 Head of the Church 4 
 heart of man ^> 
 hearts of men °-a 
 heaven and earth Va 
 Heavenly Father ^\^ 
 Holy Ghost 6
 
 holy land ^ 
 
 holy of holi.s cr** 
 
 holy place ^\> 
 
 Holy Spiril of God ^ 
 
 Boly Word <i" 
 
 house of Israel <s) 
 
 I am God 
 
 I observe lastly <\s 
 
 image of God J_ 
 
 in Christ "~~ 
 
 in Church / 
 
 in faith "~\ 
 
 in Jesus Christ ^7— 
 
 in the Church 7 
 
 in the city of God 
 
 in the heart v ~ < \ 
 
 in the midst of life "^** ^ 
 
 THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 Jesus Christ /_ 
 may be written 
 
 105 
 
 Christ 
 
 when 
 
 it follows Jesus ; in other 
 eases write C7 ^ J 
 
 Jesus Christ's sake / O 
 Jewish dispensation (. 
 Jewish persuasion / 
 ust and the unjust fr-i 
 ust for the unjust ^-/ 
 ustice, mercy and truth </-*j 
 ustification by faith ^ 
 ustification by the works of 
 t lie law- 
 
 Kingdom of Christ ~ 
 kingdom of darkness 
 kingdom of God ~ 
 kingdom of grace ~ r ~ 
 kingdom of heaven 
 
 „ presence of God^V_c_ kingdom of the world —^^ 
 
 „ providence of God ^~~% | kingdom of this world ~\^i 
 
 in the sight of God ^1 kingdoms of the world -*-" 
 
 in the word of God ^*\_ kingdoms of this world ~\yi 
 
 „ words of my text "V- knowledge of Christ ^~U 
 
 , „ , ^—t knowledge of Christianity Z_ 
 
 „ words of our text "^ 
 
 „ words of the text > ~S-=> 
 
 inspiration of Scripture "^sa— 
 inspiration of the Bible ^^^V 
 
 Jehovah Jesus // 
 12* 
 
 knowledge of God L 
 
 knowledge of the truth / 
 
 Lamb of God f *" 
 language of Scripture
 
 196 THEOLOGICAL PHRASES 
 
 language of the text La 
 language of my text 
 Lord and Savior /'v. 
 Lord and Savior Jesus 
 
 Christ ^2- 
 Lord Jesus fl 
 Lord Jesus Christ I— 
 Lord's kingdom C 
 Lord's prayer ^^ 
 Lord's supper i\ 
 love of self f\_ 
 Minister of the gospel ^_o_ 
 Mosaic Law ^~b— ' 
 my beloved brethren ^vv 
 my brethren ' ^ 
 
 my dear fellow-sinners A 
 
 my dear friends L 
 
 my fellow-sinners '^'\ s _ s , 
 
 my friends ' ^ 
 
 my reverend brothei" - ^^ 
 
 my text 
 
 Nations of the earth ^sA 
 
 N< w Church V 
 
 New Testament Bcripl area — i 
 
 J a on the dill 
 Of Christ *"* 
 
 of Christianity 
 
 of God 
 
 of my text 
 
 of Scripture h 
 
 Old Testament ^ 
 
 Old Testament Scriptures (-o— ° 
 
 omnipotence of God *~ ~%- 
 omnipresenee of God ^^~^V 
 omniscience of God ~^2 
 our blessed Lord ~/S^r.. 
 our Lord .^/7- 
 our Lord's ?*£- 
 
 our Lord Jesus Christ .^/f~. 
 
 our Savior .^. 
 Part of Scripture \^— 
 passage of Scripture \_ 
 penitent sinner ^-i 
 portion of Scripture \/ 9 ~ 
 Protestant Church 7° 
 Protestant faith > 
 Protestant religion f 
 providence of God *\ 
 Quick and the dead c — i 
 Reformed Church y 
 resurrection glory / 
 i< si i rrection of Christ ^^ 
 
 resurrection nf the liody y^^\ 
 
 resurrection of the dead ^^
 
 THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 resurrection of the just /b St James A-j, 
 
 right hand of God 
 
 right hand of (>"il the Father 
 
 right baud i>f the Father \ 
 
 Right Reverend /W 
 
 Right Rev. Bishop/V 
 
 rise again .<...... 
 
 Roman Catholic s^' 
 „ Catholic Church 
 Sabbath day ^| 
 
 Sabbath school >o 
 Savior of the world ^y^ 
 Scripture promises Vq 
 Second coming of Christ 
 
 Second Epistle ^£"~ 
 Sermon on the Mount v— ^ 
 Son of God q^— 
 Sons of God o_a_ 
 Son of Man o_^> 
 Spirit of Christ 
 Spirit of God c ^- 
 spiritual life °S\. 
 spiritual meaning c v-^_, 
 spiritual sense 'Nj_ J) 
 
 197 
 
 St John y 
 
 St Paul's epistle ^W 
 
 St Peter *% 
 
 Sunday school j,__ 
 
 Sun of Righteousness Q^/ lj_p 
 
 Things of God s> 
 things of men ^^> 
 through Christ .?)..-. 
 tree of life ..Vi . 
 Trinity in unity •J->i 
 Under an influence which ' — -f> 
 under the influence of which s "— % 
 
 under the necessity of ~-p 
 unsearchable riches of 
 
 Christ vJ^, 
 Virgin Mary S- . 
 Water of life Vv_ 
 ways of the world ^^ 
 way of salvation c ' ^° 
 wisdom of God <^L 
 Word of God "\. 
 works of the law- 
 world without end
 
 198 exercise on theological phrases. 
 
 Exercise 69. 
 
 A Sermon including all the Theological Phrases. 
 " The kingdom of God." — Luke vi. 20. 
 
 My beloved brethren, — The passage of Scripture in-which- 
 the words of my text are found is known to-the Christian 
 (li arch as-the Sermon on tlie Mount. In-it ovx-Lord and 
 St i riour Jesus Christ places before-the nations of the earth 
 those principles of justice, mercy, and truth, under the influ- 
 ence of iohich-ihe kingdoms of this world have advanced in- 
 (the)-woyy of salvation. We-cannot-say, alas, t hat-tin- hearts 
 of men are entirely turned to divine thing*, or that a proper 
 sense of-God's characti r and govemmt nt is so fully manifesl 
 that-the world can yet be-ealled. in the words of my text, the 
 "kingdom of God.'' But, by-the providence of God, the 
 kingdoms of this world are-now ruled on far different prin- 
 ciples to-tbose-which prevailed ere-the Sun of "Righteousness, 
 appeared. When-the tempter showed our blessed Lord the 
 kingdoms of the world and-the glory of-thcm, he little knew 
 what a change in God's Providena would-be created in 
 Paganism through -the glad tidings (of the) glorious gospel <>f 
 the Lord Jesus Christ. By-the blessing of God, the gospel of 
 peace has in-the Divim Providenct been proclaimed over-the 
 face "/the earth ever-since-the Lord Jesus, the glorified Head 
 
 of the Church, revealed the things of God. When-IIe as- 
 cended to-the right hand of God the Father, the apostles who 
 had-been witnesses to-the resurrection of Christ received the 
 Holy Spirit of God and mat, r an influena which they could- 
 imt withstand, proclaimed the goodness of God and-the gract 
 of God, manifested in sending t lie Lamb of God to show fori h 
 tin' glories (of the) spiritual life and the Kingdom of Christ 
 to all wbo-are in-the kingdom of darkness. 8t James, 8t 
 John, si /',/,/■ and-the other apostles, inspired by-the Holy 
 <;imst, spread a knmvledgi of Christ, nut to Gentiles only 
 but to-the house "f Israel under-the ceremonial law or Mosaic 
 law, in other-words the Jewish dispensation. Proselytes 
 (of the) Jewish persuasion were-nol overlooked, and-all who
 
 EXERCISE OX THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 19!) 
 
 looked to-the Old Testament Scriptures were pointed to-that 
 part of Scripture or portion of Scripture which prophesied 
 (of the) Son of Man and foretold the unsearchable riches of 
 Christ. The apostles were-not under the necessity of quoting- 
 the words of Scripture to demonstrate God's everlasting cove- 
 nant, because-the Messianic prophecies are as-well-known to- 
 the children of Israel as- the history (of the) ark of the cove- 
 nant, the observance (of the) Feast of Tabernacles, or-the 
 keeping of a fast day. The Apostle Paul was-the most 
 powerful exponent of Christianity to-the Gentile world, as- 
 his Epistle to the Romans and many another Epistle of Paul 
 show. When-wc read St Paul's Epistle to any (of the) early 
 converts to-the Christian faith, we feel that-he had a deep 
 sense (of the) D irinc glory, Dicine love, and Divine wisdom 
 wbich-the Heavenly Father had placed in-the Divine Man, 
 Christ Jesus our Lord, and-that-the Apostle felt that-the-GW 
 t>( 11, ,ir, i, was a Cod of grace and a God of love. Nor can- 
 we wonder (hat St-Paul, who had seen-the resurrection glory 
 of Jesus Christ, should-be Divinely inspired by-the resur- 
 rection nt Christ, to-preach-the resurrection of tin dead. 
 Fewwho-have beard the Church of England Burial Service 
 will forget the impressive Lesson from-the Firsl Epistlt to the 
 Corinthians dealing with-the resurrection of the dead, and 
 describing what shall-be the resurrection of the body and how 
 we-shall rise again. My dear fellow-sinners, I-might cite 
 much-more from-the Holy Word of God to show how the 
 coming oi-our Lord Jesus Christ, who-is our Saviour, has 
 brought the kingdom of the world, or-rather, the kingdom of 
 this world, under-the influence (of the) kingdom of heaven, 
 which-is-the kingdom of grace. Hut, my brethren, you-will 
 admit that the constant and extending knowledge of Chris- 
 tianity is bringing the world to-be, in the words of the text 
 or-the language of the text, the "kingdom of God." May 
 God in His goodness basten that time ! 
 
 But, my dear friends, let-us endeavor to-extend our knowl- 
 edge of the truth, which-will lead us to a fuller knowledge of 
 God, and a truer idea (of the) omnipoU nee of God, the omni- 
 presence of God, and-the omniscience of God. Believers in-
 
 200 EXERCISE ON THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 
 
 the Lord Jesus Christ will for Christ's sake, as Christian 
 brethren, as members (of the) Church of Christ, the Episcopal 
 Church, or any other, and whether-they belong to-the Church 
 of Ireland, the Church of Rome or Roman Catholic Church, 
 the New Church or to-some other Protestant Church or Re- 
 formed Church, endeavor to show God's glory in-this-way 
 and prove to-those familiar only with-the ways of the world, 
 not-only the wisdom of God. but-that God is good and Qod is 
 great. God's law and God's justice in the Divine gov< rnm< nt 
 of the universe, are clear to all children of God, and every 
 child of God to- whom the things of men are known, feels that 
 both in body and mind each fellow-creature is, in tin provi- 
 dence of God, directed through life. To both the just and the 
 unjust their daily bread is vouchsafed by the Divine Being 
 who reigns for ever and ever, the Almighty and Everlasting 
 God who at the last day shall judge the heart of man. Will 
 that-day be-one of eternal condemnation or eternal dam nation 
 to each one of us ; of everlasting misery or of everlasting life? 
 May the blood of Christ, who-is-now at the right hand of Qod, 
 the sacrifice (of the) just for the unjust, be-found, my fellow- 
 sinners, a perfect plea for-thc quick and the dead! Oh, my 
 dear friends, seek justification by faith, lor justification by the 
 works of tin law will not avail. Every penitent sinner who 
 casts aside love of self may hope, at-the resurrection of the 
 just, to-be a son of God among-the sons of God, to dwell in 
 the city of God, the heavenly Jerusalem, and through Christ 
 to partake (of the) tree of life and-the water of life, and to 
 enjoy everlasting day, I-have-now, my friends, dwelt on my 
 text with-regard-to-the Lord's Kingdom in heaven ami earth. 
 I-have dwelt on-the forgiveness of sins through the blood of 
 Jesus. 1-have-shown the fruits of the Spirit, and pointed out 
 how-our future state in the future world is fixed for ever in 
 faith in JesUS Christ, now at tin; right hand of God the 
 "Father. For Christ's sake let me urge again on-every Christian 
 brother who believes in Christ Jesus, the importance (of the) 
 day of redemption throagh-the body and blood of Christ, the 
 blessed Lord, the only begotten son of God, who-is-the image 
 of God, and at-the right hand of the "Father. May we all
 
 EXERCISE ON THEOLOGICAL PHRASES. 201 
 
 through Christ, who-is our God and Saviour in-the Trinity 
 in Unity find eternal bliss and see our blessed Lord at-the 
 right hand of God. God is faithful, and-if-we grow in grace 
 and see that others are growing in grace in the sight of God, 
 and-have-the spirit of Christ in the heart, then-the Scripture 
 promises found in the Word of God, not-only in-the Old 
 Testament bul in-the New Testament Scriptures, which-have 
 a spiritual meaning and a spiritual sense, will-lie fulfilled in- 
 fche providence of God through the Spirit of God. 
 
 My dear friends, as & minister of the Gospel, there-are-some 
 subjects which affect our Christian character on which I-de- 
 site to-speak in the Church, as-//* the presence of God. Jig 
 reverend brother who filled t his place 1 lefore-me, also the Sight 
 Rev, Bishop of-this diocese, many other Eight Reverend prel- 
 ates, and also a distinguished Elder of the Church, have, in- 
 the sjiirit of Christ, in Christian charity, spoken on-these- 
 things in church and-have founded their remarks on-the sec- 
 ond epistle of St John and St Paul's Epistle to Titus. They- 
 liave felt that in the midst of life we-are in death, and-that 
 all should-be prepared for-the home described in the words 
 of our text. Our Lord, they believe blesses all true work in 
 Christ, whether of those-who profess the Protestant faith or 
 I'm!, staut religion, or those-who-are (of the) Catholic faith, 
 belong to-the Catholic Church and join in Catholic worship 
 in Roman Catholic sanctuaries, under a ( 'atholic priest, to Al- 
 mighty Ghd, to-the Lord and Saviour, to the H.o\y-Spvrit of 
 God, and invoke the Virgin Mary. Et-is-felt by-these that 
 Church principles, articles of religion, and-the relations of 
 Church and state are valuable only when-they promote our 
 Lord's glory and-the study (of the) WordofG-od. This study 
 should-not-be limited to-the Sabbath Day,to-the Sabbath school 
 or-the Sunday school. Nor should-it be limited tc-theLord'i 
 prayer, participation in-the Lord's supper or even to family 
 prayer. The religion of Christ Jesus recognizes no holy place 
 but should-be practised everywhere, it is not nan-owed to-the 
 works of the law, but lor Jesus Christ's sah , and-in-t he strength 
 (of the) cross of Christ, Christians euter on mission work to- 
 make known the everlasting God.
 
 202 LATIN QUOTATION'S. 
 
 LATIN QUOTATIONS.* 
 
 A. 
 A fortiori. From stronger reasoning Ky^ 
 A priori. From the former *\/ 
 Ab initio. From the beginning .>^. 
 
 Ad interim. For the meanwhile jbrT! 
 
 Ad infinitum. To infinity tA^. 
 
 Ad libitum. At pleasure \£\.. 
 
 Ad litem. To (or in) the suit l.x^>„ 
 
 Ad valorem. According to the value ..Q^. 
 
 Alma mater. A kind mother C^ — ^ 
 
 Anno Domini, A. D. In the year of our Lord "|A^ 
 
 Assumpsit. He engaged to pay -H 
 
 B. 
 
 Bona 1 tide. In good faith ^"""^S 
 Bona tides. Good faith S 
 
 C. 
 Certiorari. To be made more certain ~ // l^' 
 Cestuique trust. Persons for whose use another p 
 
 has title to hinds, etc. ~\ 
 Cum grano salis. With a grain of sail \ ' 
 
 D. 
 De bene esse. As being well done for the present k.\ 
 I >e facto. Actually so lv_ 
 De jure Legally so (by law) J 
 
 Poi .in extended list. Bee "Technical Reporting." By T. A. Reed, 
 en pagea. Pi Ice 40c.; cloth, 50c.
 
 I. \n\ QUOTATIONS. 203 
 
 De novo. Anew ^~A£. 
 Desideratum. A tiling desired 4-^ 
 
 i-:. 
 
 El alium. And another \C^ 
 
 El alios let al. ). And others \f 
 
 Ex cathedra. From the chair (authoritatively) ~7 
 
 Ex mero motu. From a mere motion __u ^~y L 
 
 Ex officio. By virtue of his office 
 
 Ex parte. Without opposition vj 
 
 Ex post facto. By a subsequent act 
 
 F. 
 Far simile. An exact copy v — ^-J^ 
 Fieri facias. Cause it to lie done Vy\_^ 
 Fortiter in re. With firmness in acting ""S-" 
 
 II. 
 Habeas corpus. You are to bring up the body <5^ — 
 
 I. 
 
 In esse. In actual being ") 
 
 In exteliso. In full ^ — v 
 
 In futuro. In tut in e "]/ 
 
 In medias res. Into the very midst of things J-* 1 * 
 
 In re. In the matter of s* 
 
 In statu (pio. As it was ? 
 
 In toto. In the whole 
 
 In transitu. On the passage Lf 
 
 Inter alia. Among other things -p 
 
 Inter nos. Between ourselves 
 
 Inter se. Among themselves J 
 
 Ipso facto. In the fact itself y- — ,
 
 204 
 
 LATIN QUOTATIONS. 
 
 Laches. Neglect f]> 
 
 Lis pendens. A pending' suit t> 
 
 M. 
 Mens sana in corpore sano. A sound mind 
 
 in a sound body 
 Modus operandi. The mode of operation 1/ — i 
 Multum in parvo. Much in little '\/\. 
 
 N. 
 Ne plus ultra. No farther ""VI 
 Nolens volens. Whether he will or no ^_ 
 Nolle prosequi. To be unwilling to prosecute T ^V-^ 
 
 X 
 
 Non compos mentis. Not of sound mind 
 
 Non constat. It does not appear p 
 
 Non est. Not to be found ) 
 
 Non sequitur. It does not follow 
 
 Nota bene, N. B. Marls well "V_^. 
 
 Nulla bona. No goods / \_^ 
 
 Nunc pro tune. Now for then -^~^T 
 
 P. 
 Pendente lite. Pending the suit ^"""J^l 
 Per annum. By the year \^ 
 
 Per Capita. By the head (share and share alike) \ 
 
 Per centum. By the hundred \/~ [^ 
 
 I'cr contra. < >n the other side 'N'j 
 
 Per diem. By the day n U^ 
 Per se. By itself ' /\ 
 
 I'cr stirpes. Adcording to I be original stock \/^ I 
 
 Post factum. Aiter the deed ^i
 
 LATIN QUOTATIONS. 
 
 I'o-t mortem. After death V-n/U^ 
 
 Prima facie. At first view or appearance 
 
 Pro bono publico. For the public good ^^ v 
 
 Pro forma. As a matter of form \__^ 
 
 Pro rata. In proportion N/j 
 
 Pro tanto. For so much ^ L, 
 
 Pro tempore. For the time being \ l~~s 
 
 Q- 
 
 Quantum meruit. As much as lie deserved ' ^i 
 Quid nunc. What now '. < ~\^^ 
 
 c 
 
 Quid pro quo. One thing for another k 
 Quo warranto. By what warrant c_ t / / '~] 
 
 R. 
 Pes adjudicata. A thing adjudged ^> : £ ~\ 
 Res gestte. Things done -if 
 
 S. 
 
 Sine die. Without a day ~^\' 
 Sine qua tion. Without winch, not c ~ < ~ ^-? 
 Status quo. r l 'lie state in which <£_ 
 Sub rosa. Under the rose, secretly *\/J 
 
 T. 
 Terra tirma. Drv land L^V- 
 
 205 
 
 Venue. The place of trial ^_^ 
 
 Nice versa. The terms being reversed ^m? 
 
 Viva voce. By the living voice O^
 
 206 FRENCH WORDS AND PHRASES. 
 
 FRENCH WORDS AND PHRASES.* 
 
 A la mode. Fashionable •' ' 
 
 Amende honorable. Honorable apology ^"X 
 
 Amour propre. Self-love .—^V^ 
 
 A outrance. To extremities _j 
 
 Au courant. Well acquainted with -±s 
 
 An fait. Expert ^_ 
 
 Au revoir. Adieu until we meet again /V t ^-^' 
 
 Au serieux. Seriously <^ n 
 
 Beau monde. Tlie fashionable world \ ^> 
 
 Ce n'est que le premier pas <]iii coute. v 
 It is only the first step that is difficult O— ' ^ / _ "i 
 
 Cela va sans dire. That goes without saying °~^-~. 
 
 Chef d'osuvre. A masterpiece \ 
 Comine il faut. As it should be <—< ^ 
 
 Conseil d'etat. A council of state ~^~f \ 
 
 De bonne grace. With good grace | .\.<_e 
 
 Dernier ressoi't. A last resource \sr 
 
 Double entendre. A double meaning J- — • 
 
 Edition de luxe. A splendid edition L I (~ 
 
 En avant. Forward ^C^ 
 
 Enfant terrible. A terrible child; one who 
 
 makes ill-timed remarks ° |/\ 
 
 En rapport. In relation y-V 
 I'.n I'OUte, < >n t lie way *~r\ 
 En suite. In a set 
 
 Entente cordiale. A cordial understanding ' S ~V" 
 
 * Pot an extended list, see "Technical Reporting." By T. A. Reed. 
 60 p ige Price K)c; cloth, 60c.
 
 FRENCH WORDS AMI PHRASES. 207 
 
 Entre nous. Between ourselves ' 
 
 Facon de parler. A mode of speaking 
 Fait, accompli. An accomplished fact ^c-r. 
 
 Fete champetre. A country festival v./ — N 
 Peu de joie. Fireworks j 
 
 Hors de combat. Out of condition to fight ^ k 
 
 Le jcu n'en vaut pas las chandelle. The 
 
 game is not worth the candle --/--— ^~- < — y 
 
 Mai do mer. Seasickness ^\^~y 
 Mauvaise sujet. A had subject ^~\p 
 
 Noblesse oblige. Rank imposes obligations V \ 
 
 Nona de guerre. A war name; an assumed „ 
 
 travelling name ' 
 
 Norn de plume. A pen name -— -^ | \^ 
 N"ous avons change tons cela. We have / 
 
 changed all that ^^ ^7 " 
 
 Nous verrons. "We shall see 
 
 ^/° 
 
 On «lit. It is said "1. 
 
 Par excellence. By the way of eminence \y ° 
 Pis aller. The worst or last shift \^ 
 
 liaison d'etre. The reason for a thing's existence ?~\ 
 Ruse de guerre. A stratagem of war 
 
 Sans et peur sans reproche. "Without fear and 
 
 without reproach 
 Sans souci. Without care ) 
 Savoir faire. The knowing how to act : tact 
 
 Tour de force. A feat of strength -. I * v -^ 
 Tout le monde. All the world ..1^-7 
 
 Vive lc Roi. Long live the King ^/..^l
 
 208 
 
 WORDS REQUIRING VOWEL. 
 
 251-252 
 
 WORDS REQUIRING INSERTION OF VOWEL. 
 
 251. In the following words, the vowels marked in 
 italics should be inserted in order to prevent clashing : — 
 
 occept, except 
 
 abstract-ion, obstract-ion 
 
 achromatic, chromatic 
 
 acorn, corn 
 
 adamant, demand 
 
 adapt, adopt 
 
 address, dress 
 
 administration, demonstration 
 
 advance, defence 
 
 adventures ulr ntrs), defenders 
 
 advocate, defect 
 
 affluent, fluent 
 
 afore, fore 
 
 aliment, element 
 
 anomaly, animal 
 
 annual, only 
 
 anterior, interior 
 
 apathetic, pathetic 
 
 appurtenant, pertinent 
 
 apologue 1, i pilogue 2 
 
 apportion, portion 
 
 apposite, apposite 
 
 apposition 2, opposition 1, po- 
 
 appraiee, praise [sition, :i 
 
 approbation, probation 
 
 approximate, proximate 
 
 army, arm 
 
 ospi ration, aspiration 
 
 attempt, tempi 
 
 avocation, vocation 
 
 else, less 
 
 eflfi ct, fact 
 
 endued, endowed 
 
 enemy, name 
 
 exorcise, exercise 
 
 extricate, extract 
 
 exalt 1. ex'/lt 2 
 
 failing, feeling 
 
 farrier, farrier 
 
 immigration, emigration 
 
 incautious, noxious 
 
 induction, induction 
 
 inefficacious, infectious 
 
 innovation, invasion 
 
 lad//, lad 
 
 liar, lawyer 
 
 lest, last 
 
 Maria, Mary 
 
 monarchy, monarch 
 
 monkey, monk 
 
 note, nature, (gram, at) 
 
 obsolete, absolute 
 
 pocket, packet 
 
 predict (/a. a", iM), predicate 
 
 snow, sun 
 
 sulphite, Bulphate 
 
 test, attest 
 
 \ i ■ - 1 "i-r. visitor 
 
 voluble, valuable, available 
 
 voracity, veracity 
 
 252. The student will meet with other pairs of words 
 in which there is a Bpecial liability of clashing, unless a 
 
 vowel is inserted. K\ perience only will guide him in 
 this matter, but he should rat I n r err on the side of free 
 
 vocalization than run the risk of illegibility by omitting 
 all rowels.
 
 LIST OF SIMILAR WORDS. 209 
 
 LIST OF SIMILAB WORDS, 
 
 DISTINGUISHED r.Y \ DIFFERENCE OF OUTLINE. 
 
 mien two or three words app ar unriU r one outline, tltey are distinguislu d 
 by position, marked by figures. Vowels, and the prefix com or con, 
 markedin Italic, should in inserted., even in Reporting. 
 
 i>(hj \j l compatible; 2 potable; 3 computable ; 
 j pitiable 
 
 plk s optic ; | poetic 
 
 plus '\p 1 aptness; j pettiness 
 
 jihj' v A petrify; ^ putrefy 
 
 plrj'kslia n/V—j petrifaction; \_ putrefaction 
 
 pirn \ patron; ^-"^ pattern 
 
 pkr \— 1 packer; 2 pecker; 3 ^ — >. epicure 
 
 pstr ci 1 compositor ; 2 pastry ; j, pasture, posti \re 
 
 pshnt i J passionate; x/^ patient 
 
 pnr \_ 2 opener; pioneer; \_x^ penury 
 
 pljr y pledger; / plagiary; \^7 pillager 
 
 plsd 1 jP placid; N/"] 1 palsied; 2 palisade; a pellucid 
 
 plsmn \r^ placeman ; \f policeman 
 
 jn-jis x/\_, l porpoise; 2 purpose; \ Vi perhaps, propose 
 
 prprt \ appropriate; \/| property; ^, propriety; 
 
 X/V purport 
 prprshn \^ appropriation ; \9 preparation 
 prtk C N — partake ; \y — 1 operatic ; 2 portico 
 pr/r \^ comparative; N/^, operativ<' 
 prtnd \ pretend ; V- portend 
 prtr ^ aperture ; N portray ; \/ operator 
 
 ** X porter; *~n parterre 
 
 14
 
 210 LIST OF SIMILAR WORDS. 
 
 prch y 2 approach ; 3 preach ; \/f 1 parch ; 2 perch, 
 porch 
 
 V r f r ^\ proffer ;\s prefer; X/^X porphyry, periphery 
 prvd ^ provide ; *\_ pervade 
 prst V. poorest; \A purest; \/] pursuit 
 prskt v- prosecute; X/~ persecute 
 prshshn C V- 3 prosecution ; X/ 3 persecution 
 prw v^ oppressor ; ^^/ piercer ; \^r peruser ; 
 •S^ pursuer 
 
 prsn, c \j_^ 2 person ; 3 prison ; X/^"""' 1 parson, compari- 
 son ; 3 Parisian 
 
 prsnt C \ L/ present, personate ; X/^ pursuant 
 
 #»"*£ is parcel, parsley ; X/ 6 parasol, perusal 
 
 prsh \S Prussia ; \/) perish, Persia 
 
 prskn ""Xj oppression, Prussian ; X/? i>ortion, appor- 
 tion, Persian 
 
 prmrvnt c \^-^_^ 1 prominent; 3 (rather than 2, to pre- 
 venl clashing with the previous word) perman- 
 ent ; X, , pre-eminent 
 
 prns >^ 3 poorness ; N/^^ 3 pureness 
 prnss <• princes ;V_^, princess 
 
 prls \/ 1 paralyze; 2 perilous 
 
 />'(/' \ beautify; ^ beatify 
 
 bltm \ blossom; N*'"^ balsam 
 
 brb*\ bribe; V\ barb 
 
 brbr ^<\briber; n^/ bribery; VvBarbary 
 
 ///■/• \ 2 break, broke; 3 brick, brook; \/ bark 
 
 brkr \ - breaker, broker ; \/~~ barker [barrack 
 
 brth ^ 1 broth; 2 breath; VI birth
 
 LIST OF SIMILAR WORDS. 211 
 
 brl < "V"' barley; \y barrel, burial; ^->y- barely 
 
 \y barilla 
 Tnr |_^ 1 tanner; 2 tenor; 3 tuner; L-^v tenure 
 trtr \ 2 traitor; 3 treater ; L -\ Tartar; T-^ torture 
 
 [/]/ territory, Tartary 
 trst \ 1 contrast; 2 traced, trust; 3triste; I 3 truest 
 trshn \, attrition, contrition ; y> contortion, tertian 
 
 \P iteration 
 l)tv\ 1 daughter, auditor ; 2 debtor ; 3 doubter ; L^ editor ; 
 
 I 1 auditory, dietary; 2 deter; 3 detour 
 dlriiutfh detriment-al ; Vs determined 
 dfns \^_r, advance, defence, deafness; I defiance, 
 
 diaphanous 
 dir | 2 defray; 3 differ ; (^ 2 defer; 3 devour; ^ defier 
 dvrs J divers, adverse ; [^ diverse, divorce 
 dstn I destine; \ destiny; j> destination; [^ distinction 
 dss \ disease, disuse (v.); A disuse («.) ; I 1 diocese; 
 dsst j diseased; \ deceased; b desist [3 decease 
 (////• \s adultery ; \\ idolatry ; 'j' idolater 
 
 V adulator, dilwter 
 Jul (^ giant; / agent; jnts /- giants; c_^ giantess 
 jntl y genteel, gentle, gently ; y~ Gentile 
 Mrs \ actors, actress ; \ cateress; l^ cauterise 
 
 kvlr \- 1 caviler ; V/A cavalier 
 Jcslcrt — a- execrate; — a-/ excoriate 
 
 Jcshrshn = excursion, execration; n ? excoriation 
 
 kips \, eclipse ; __f\> collapse 
 Tcltr *~~\ clatter ; U culture.
 
 212 LIST OF SIMILAR WORDS. 
 
 JclJc c 1 clock ; 2 cloak, click ; — f colic, calico 
 
 Mm c_^-n 1 climb ; 2 claim, acclaim ; 7^. column, culm 
 
 Mmt cs^ climate ; 7T calumet ; ^ calamity 
 
 khnnt =-^^^1 culminate ; L—~- j calumniate 
 
 hrprl c- \^" corporal ; cr_N ^ corporeal 
 
 Jcrt c- 1 accord; 2 court; / 1 carat; 2 accurate; 
 
 3 curate ; — S\ charta ; ! cruet 
 
 Icrtr <r ~\ 1 carter; 2 Creator, crater; _/^ curator; 
 L creature, courtier ; |/ criteria 
 
 krdns T credence ; ^ 1 accordance 
 
 hrj ^1 courage ; — j carriage 
 
 grdn c-s 1 garden ; ^"3 1 guardian, Gordian ; 2 guerdon 
 
 grnt c — ~ 1 granite ; — ' garnet 
 
 Fktr^ — n factor; v — i factory 
 
 ford V favored; Ve^ favorite 
 
 fnrl Wf funereal ; ^y- funeral 
 
 frtn V/w fortune ; ^ frighten ; V_/j fourteen 
 
 frm^^ 1 farm, form, coaform; 2 firm, confirm, affirm; 
 \y^~^ forum 
 
 frns v ferns, conference ; ^ fairness 
 
 frwrd V^ forward; "^X, froward 
 
 vlshn^J°l violation; 2 volition, evolution; ^> convulsion 
 vltu \j^ 1 violence ; V vileness [2 verity 
 
 ?•>•£ (l convert; ^ avert; S virtue; v/J l variety; 
 ,s'/'/7 <x spirit; \/ support, Buppurate ; CN i separate 
 
 std p2 .stead, staid; 8 steed. Stood; steady, study; 
 
 P l sighted ; 2 seated, suited 
 stshn J 1 citation; 2 station; J situation
 
 LIST OP SIMILAR WORDS. 213 
 
 sfr ) oyster, Easter; ^ austere, astir; \ astray, 
 Austria ; V estuary 
 
 sdrt [ considerate; 1 considered 
 
 sst ) assist; ") consist; ) essayist; <t society, siesta 
 
 snt ^ 1 sent (to distinguish it from the present tense 
 o_, sou?, written on the line) 
 
 sii/r Q j sentry ; ^/ century 
 
 sltr b ]/ solitary, salutary, conciliatory; (T\ sultry; 
 6"""^ psaltery 
 
 Mpsli)it(rf) s~S> impassioned; ^7" impatient 
 
 mn s~^ 1 many. m\ own; 2 money ♦ 
 
 mnstr y~^p 1 monster; 2 minster, minister ; ' ' min- 
 istry ; 1/ monastery 
 
 un-th-c; — --murder; ^-~y\ marauder 
 
 mrdrs <r b murders; ' murderous, murderess 
 
 ndfnt ( indefinite; "-Vo undefined 
 
 njns I . ingenious; *~*\ ingenuous 
 
 nvdftjbl \^ unavoidable; ^inevitable 
 
 IJni laboured (adj.) •, /^V elaborate 
 
 Ikl C~ local ; f~ J ' 1 likely ; 2 luckily 
 
 Irnd I learned (verb) •, r^ learned (adj.) 
 
 rlstis 1 1 righteousness, riot <<«sness; 2 reticence 
 
 rgrt r regard; regret 
 
 rsm /*~~* resume; ')-^ reassume 
 
 rsrs racers, resource ; ,-^f racenorse 
 
 rnst -^ rinsed; ~^ earnest 
 Hmn '-^ 1 Bymen, human ; 2 humane 
 hind y Holland ; % Highland; ■'" Holy Land 
 hrn^ l horn; 3 hereon; > l horny; :? herein 
 <r^ 'heron; <f^ heroine
 
 214 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 i. ^ * —y\<r* v-< ^ ■ ^f) \ ^ )r^ 
 y^. ' s ^ ' s ~ - c ^ 1^ n,, JL ^t 5 ,. f .. 
 
 . iC.o ^ > ^ ^ ^ \ \' ~Al* • -V o A°V 
 ^ % r .^- (. V. ^ , , l ' Af) ■ |^\_, Y ^ sJI, ' \ 
 J-; **f • V_ i^ ~ * * - ' ^ ~ * l_^ x A-( 
 
 / -V- .. ) V n x * . .. ^ V L x ov' ( °-tp / ) 
 
 v ^^ x r, . ■>— ^ ^tC^ v. -^. /^ \ y\ ./v. ' % w x 
 
 - i^~'40x ..(,. t7M»^ -v^ > ^ /_ 
 
 > . ^ •'V, ) ^ r* f ~ «- v ../.. ^ " i / x J. 
 
 -=£ ; t /Co o v n x i rv ' \. c • \.° ' ^ ^ 
 
 k $ x^ ' ~\. N • -- ^y «k ° - ) . ^ r s -~ 
 — I — Sl ' ^. /»• r ) ^ ^ *\H* 
 
 ; '\n r\. , )_, v ^ - v_ h *y • v. ^ u 
 Lo i • \n\ fa v ' ^.^.. a f o" i^ :>-. j- / ■> 
 
 ">-, <s L s y«.«rv^'o -A- - -)••■ s / ^ ^ C y
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 215 
 
 REPOKTINc EXERCISES. 
 
 1.— SERMON ON THE IMMORTALITY OF THE SOUL. 
 
 For a', know that if our earthly hous< of this tabemaclt were dis- 
 tolved, we //arc a building of God, a housi not made with hands, eternal 
 in the heavens.— 2 Corinthians, 5. 1. 
 
 This passage presents to us, in one view, the nature of our present 
 earthly stale, and the future object of the Christian's hope. The style 
 is figurative ; hut the figures employed are both obvious and expressive. 
 The body is represented as a house inhabited by the soul, or the think- 
 ing part of man. Bat it is an "earthly house," a " tabernacle " erected 
 only for passing accommodation, and "to be dissolved ;" to which is 
 to succeed the future dwelling of the just in "a building of God, a 
 house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens." Here then are 
 three great objects presented to our consideration. First, the nature 
 of our present condition. Secondly, that succeeding state which is the 
 object of good men's hope. Thirdly, the certain foundation of their 
 hope; "we know, that if our earthly house be dissolved, we have a 
 building of God." 
 
 Fir*/. The text gives a full description of our present embodied state, 
 as an "earthly bouse." atl "earthly house of this tabernacle," and a 
 tabernacle which is to be "dissolved." 
 
 We dwell in an "earthly house." Within this cottage of earth is 
 lodged that spiritual, immortal substance, into which God breathed the 
 breath of life. So we are elsewhere saiil in Scripture to have "our 
 foundation in the dust," and to "dwell in houses of clay." During its 
 continuance in this humble abode, the soul may be justly considered as 
 confined and imprisoned. It i- restrained from the full exertion of its 
 powers by many obstructions. It can perceive and act only by very 
 imperfect organs. It looks abroad as through the windowsof the senses; 
 and beholds truth as "through a glass, darkly." It is besel with a numer- 
 ous train of temptations to evil, which arise from bodily appetites. It 
 is obliged to sympathize with the body in its wants: and it i< depressed 
 with infirmities not its own. For it suffers from the frailty of those 
 materials of which its earthly house is compacted. It languishes and 
 droops along with the body ; is wounded by its pains; and the slightest 
 discomposure of bodily organs is sufficienl to derange some of tin- highest 
 
 operations of the soul. 
 All tlie--e circumstances bear the marks of a fallen and degraded 
 
 state of human nature. The man-ion in which the soul is lodged 
 corresponds so little with the powers and capacities of a rational im- 
 mortal spirit, as gives ns reason to think that the souls of good men 
 were not designed to remain always thus confined. Such a state was 
 calculated for answering tin' ends proposed by our condition of trial 
 and probation in this life, but was not intended to be lasting and 
 tinal. Accordingly, the Apostle, in his description, calls it the earthly 
 house "of this tabernacle;" alluding to a wayfaring or sojourning 
 state, where tabernacles or tents are occasionally erected for the ac 
 commodation of passengers. The same metaphor is here made nse
 
 216 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 • -^ ^o " V, ^ ^ ^ s -U x " < M ( .)_ , ' 1_ 
 
 
 rt ' 1 ~* l\.U ,1 ,C X ^ (. 
 
 
 M <f 
 
 «/' 
 
 ^ ° io ~ V) / v \ 1 
 
 rv 
 
 r ■ V> V- i ' n, / ) ^v ~- ^ L, \ { -\ 
 
 V- • ' I - . v • * ( - i ' , ? N —
 
 SERMON BY DR. BLAIR. 217 
 
 of. which is employed in several other passages of Scripture, where we 
 are said t<> be "strangers and sojourners on earth before (iod, as were 
 all our fathers." This earth may be compared to a wide field spread 
 
 With tents, where tTOOpS Of pilgrims appear in Succession and pass 
 
 away. They enter tor a little while into the tents prepared for them; 
 and remain there to undergo their appointed probation. When that 
 is finished, their tents are taken down, and they retire to make way 
 tor others who come forward in their allotted order. Thus "one 
 generation passeth away, and another generation cometh;" and the 
 "earthly house " is to all no other than the " house of their pilgrimage." 
 The "earthly house of this taliernaele," the Apo-tle, proceeding in 
 his description, tells us, is "to lie dissolved." Close as the union 
 
 between the soul and the hody now appears to he, it is no more than 
 a temporary union. It. snhsists only during the continuance of a 
 tabernacle of dust, which, by its nature, is tending towards ruin. The 
 "dust" must s,i,,]i "return to the dust, and the spirit, to God who 
 gave it." The dissolution of the "earthly house of this tabernacle," 
 i- an event full of dismay to wicked men. Beyond that period they 
 see nothing hut a dark unknown, which, as far as they can discern, 
 
 is peopled with objects full of terror; even to the ju-t this dissolution 
 is a BeriollS and awful event. Providence has wisely appointed that, 
 
 burdened as our present state i- with various ills and frailties, we 
 
 should, however, he naturally attached to it. lis final close is always 
 
 attended with several melancholy ideas Thou who now flourishes! 
 most in health and Strength, must then have thy head laid low. 
 From thy closing eves the light of the sun shall disappear for ever. 
 That light -hall continue to shine, the seasons to return, and the 
 earth to flourish ; hut to thee no more: separated from the dwellings 
 of men. and cut off from all thou wast accustomed to love, as though 
 thou hadsl never been. Such is the fate of man considered merely 
 as mortal : a- dwelling in an earthly house which is about to be dis- 
 solved The consolatory corrective of those bumbling ideas, the ray 
 thai is to dissipate this gloom, we behold in the subsequent part of 
 the text ; that when this earthly bouse is dissolved, there is prepared 
 for the righteous "a building of God, a house not mule with hind-." 
 But. before proceeding to this part of the subject, let us pause and make 
 some reflections on what has been already said. 
 
 Let the distinction between the soul and the body, which is so 
 clearly marked in the text, he deeply imprinted on our minds. Few 
 things in religion or morals are entitled to make a Btronger impression 
 than this distinction ; and yet. with the hulk of men, the impression 
 
 it makes appears to he slight. They seem to think and art as if they 
 
 Consisted of no more than mere lle-h and h! 1. and had no other 
 
 concerns than what respect their embodied -late. If their health he 
 firm, if their senses he gratified, and their appetites indulged, all i- 
 well with them. Is not this to forget that the hody is no more than 
 an "earthly house" or " I ■ihernacle " of the soul'.' The soul, that 
 thinking part which they feel within them, and which it i- impossible 
 for them to confound with their flesh or their hones, ie certainly far 
 nobler than the tenement of clay which it inhabits. The soul is the 
 principle of all life, and knowledge, and action The body is no
 
 218 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 /I - - ^ ~ x . ^ n ^j l < v, r \ /. v — i A 
 
 V • rt ' ^ " C *y \^ W ^ ^ ^ _ Y ' 
 j^ b r* - W ^ \, . j> * v|, \ V£ ' s b 
 
 i v i^ , r / ^ i y^* V ~ —•• <o '% i ~ 
 ) \ 1/ x i / ^r ' r \ ' u - ^ I_ \. -,<>. « 
 <L\/ \- ^ / , '. .y ( **°~S-» u b' 
 
 <n ( \ x >~g ' i^ / v n l k» ,. < >> k *~. fc £ -V 
 
 ~n» . s — ' ' A. ' \ " /' ~ '
 
 SERMON RY DR. RT.AIR. 219 
 
 more than Its instrument or organ ; and as nincli nobler as is the part 
 which belongs to him who employs an instrument, than to the instru- 
 ment which is employed, so much is the soul of greater dignity than 
 the body. The one is only a frail and perishable machine; the other 
 survives its ruin, and lives forever. During the time that the anion 
 continues between those two very different parts of our frame, I by 
 no means say thai it is incumbent upon us to disregard all thai relates 
 to the body. It is not possible, nor. though it were possible, would 
 it be requisite or tit for man to act as if he were pure immaterial 
 spirit. This is what the condition and laws of our nature permit not. 
 l'.ut must not the greatest sensualist admit that, if the soul be the 
 chief part of man. it must have interests of its own, which require 
 to be carefully attended to? Can he imagine that, hi' truly consults 
 either his interest or his pleasure, if he employs the thinking part of 
 his nature only to serve, and to minister, to the bodily part? Mast 
 not this infer, not merely a degradation of the superior part, but an 
 entire perversion of that whole constitution of nature which our 
 Maker has given us? Be assured, toy brethren, that the soul has a 
 health and a sickness, has pleasures and pains of its own. quite dis- 
 tinct from those of the body, and which have a powerful influence on 
 the happiness or misery of man. He who pays no attention to these, 
 and neglects all care of preserving the health and soundness of his 
 soul, is not only preparing final misery for himself when he shall 
 enter into a disembodied state, but is laying, even for his present 
 state, the foundation of many a bitter distress. By folly and guilt he 
 is wounding his spirit. Its wounds will often bleed when his body 
 appears sound, and will give rise to inward pane's which no animal 
 comforts shall be able to assuai'e or heal. 
 
 When we impress our minds with the sense of this important 
 distinction between the body and the soul, let us not forget, that 
 closely united as they now are in our frame, their union is soon to 
 terminate. "The earthly house of this tabernacle is to be dissolved;"' 
 but the soul which inhabits it. remains. Let us therefore dwell in our 
 earthly house with the sentiments of those who know they are about 
 to dislodge. The endowments anil improvements of the soul are the 
 only possessions on which we can reckon as continuing to be our 
 own. (in every possession which belongs to our bodily estate, we 
 ought to view Ibis inscription as written by God : "This is an earthly 
 house which is tottering to its fall ; this is a tabernacle which is about to 
 i>e taken down." Let us with pleasure turn our thoughts towards those 
 
 higher prospects that are set before us. when this change shall have 
 taken place in the human condition ; which naturally brings us to the 
 Second head of discourse, the great object of thc> hope of good 
 
 men in a succeeding Mate. The " earthly bouse "is contrasted by the 
 Apostle with a "building of God; a house not made with hands'"; 
 
 and the "tabernacle which is to be dissolved." with a "house eternal 
 in the heavens." 
 
 The expressions here employed to signify what is promised to the 
 righteous, a building of God, a house not made with hands, are ex- 
 pressions of a mysterious import They suggest to u- thitiu's which
 
 220 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 h v ■ ^ - x s , j ,
 
 SERMON BY DR. BLAIR. 221 
 
 we cannol now conceive, far less describe. A sacred veil conceals the 
 mansions of glory. But, in general, these expressions of the text plainly 
 import thai the spirits of good 1 1 1> ■ 1 1 shall npon death, be translated from 
 an imperfect to a gloriOCS stale. This earth, on which we dwell, i- no 
 more than an exterior region of the great kingdom of God. It is bat an 
 entrance through which, after suitable preparation, we pass into tin- 
 palace of an Almighty Sovereign. Admitted there, we may hope 
 
 ti> behold far greater objects than we cai w behold; and t<> enjoy 
 
 in perfection those pleasures which we here view from afar, and pursue 
 in vain. Such degrees of pleasure are allowed us at present as our 
 state admits. But a state of trial required that pains should be 
 intermixed with our pleasures, and that infirmity and distress should 
 often be fell. The remains of our fall appear everywhere in our 
 condition. The ruins of human nature present themselves on all hands 
 But when that which is perfect Is come, that which is in part shall be 
 done away. Into that house not made with bands, that building of God, 
 we have every reason to believe that there will be no room for such guests 
 to intrude as care or Borrow. Nothing can be admitted to enter there, 
 but what contributes to the felicity of those whom the Almighty has 
 allowed to dwell in his presence, .and to behold bis face iii righteousness. 
 Besides the glory and perfection of this future state, the text suggests 
 
 its permanency. This "I se not made with hands." is "a house 
 
 eternal in the heavens." The tabernacle which we now inhabit, is every 
 
 moment liable to fall : above is the fixed man-ion. the seat of perpetual 
 
 rest. Beyond doubt, the certain prospect of death renders everything 
 inconsiderable which we here possess Everj enjoyment is saddened 
 when we think of its end approaching. We become sensible thai we 
 are always building on sand, never on a rock. Fluctuation and change 
 characterize all thai is around us; and at the moment when our 
 
 attachment to any persons or objects is bee • the strongest, they 
 
 are beginning to slide away from our hold. But in the man-ions 
 
 above, alteration and decay ar known. Everything there contii - 
 
 in a steady course. No Bchemes are there begun and left unfinished ; no 
 pleasing connection- just formed and then broken off. The treasures 
 possessed there shall never be diminished ; the friend- we enjoy there 
 
 shall never die and lea\ e us to m n. In those celestial regions shines 
 
 the sun thai never sets ; a calm reigns which is never disturbed . the 
 river of life flows w ith a stream which i< always unruffled in its course. 
 
 Such are the prospects, imperfectly as we can now conceive them. 
 which are set forth to good men in a future world. Bui how. it 
 may be asked, -hall we be satisfied that -neb prospects are not mere 
 
 illusions with which our fancy Hatter- nsj Upon what foundation 
 
 rests this mighty edifice of hope, which the Apostle here rears up for 
 the consolation of Christians, and of which he speaks so confidently 
 
 as to say, "We k/iOW that if our earthh house Of this tabernacle were 
 
 dissolved, we have a building of God." To inquire into this was the 
 
 Third proposed head of discourse, to which we now proceed. And 
 
 as the subject is in itself so important, and so pleasing to all good men. 
 
 1 -hall take a view of the different kinds of evidence upon which our 
 faith of a happy immortality is grounded.
 
 c ' 
 
 222 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 * y Y v-^ - v y r i. i^ ^ .\ u^ *• 
 
 ,o ^ * V, x \ ~ ' <v,^ , 1. r Y .^..2^ / I x Y'^l 
 
 ••)■ ^ k>- ^VV ^ *° ^ N • K ^ x V 
 
 ■ *^ ^ "M, c- u • r rt - L -v^ < \; r " c - / 
 \ ■ ^ ^„ 1. 1 ^ r J ) \.° x ^ ( \ >j
 
 SERMON BY DR. BLAIR. 223 
 
 We must observe in the first place, that the dissolution of the earthly 
 tabernacle at death, affords no ground for thinking that the soul at the 
 same time perishes, or is extinguished. 1 begin with this observation, 
 because the strongest prejudices against the souls immortality, arise 
 from what is sometimes found to happen at that period. The soul and 
 the body are at present united by the closest sympathy. When one 
 suffers, the other is affected. Both seem to grow up together to 
 the maturity of their powers; and together both seem often to decay. 
 Such a shock is apparently suffered by the soul at death as at first 
 view might lead us to suspect that it was sharing the same fate 
 with the body. Notwithstanding this, there are clear proofs that 
 the body and the soul, though at present closely connected by Divine 
 appointment with one another, are, however, substances of different 
 and dissimilar natures. Matter, of which the body is composed, is 
 a substance altogether dead and passive, and cannot be put in motion 
 without some external impulse; whereas the soul has within itself 
 a principle of motion, activity, and life. Between the laws of matter 
 and the action of thought, there is so little resemblance, or rather 
 so much opposition, that mankind in general have agreed in holding 
 the soul to he an immaterial substance ; that is, a substance the 
 nature of which we cannot explain or define farther than that it is 
 a substance quite distinct from matter. This being once admitted, 
 it clearly follows that, since thought depends not on matter, from 
 the dissolution of the material part we have no ground to infer the 
 destruction of the thinking part of man. As long as by the ordination 
 of the Creator these different substances remain united, there is no 
 wouder that the one should sutler from the disorder or indisposition of 
 the oilier. 
 
 It is so far from following, that the soul must cease' to act on the 
 dissolution of the body, that it seems rather to follow, that it will 
 then act in a more perfect manner. Ill i I ~ present, habitat ion it is 
 plainly limited and confined in ils operations. When it is let loose 
 from that earthly house, il is brought forth into greater liberty. To 
 illustrate this by an instance which may be conceived as analogous; 
 let. us suppose a person shut up in an apartment, where he saw light 
 only through Borne small windows. If these windows were foul or 
 dimmed, he would see less; if they were altogether darkened, he 
 could see none at all. But were he let out from this confinement 
 into the open air. he would he so far from being deprived of sight, 
 that though at first overpowered by a sudden glare, he would soon 
 
 sec' around him more completely than before. The Senses are as 80 
 many windows or apertures, through which the soul at present 
 exercises its powers of perception. If the senses are disordered, the 
 powers of the soul will be obstructed. But once separated from its 
 
 earthly tenement, the soul will then exercise its powers without 
 obstruction; will act with greater liberty and in a wider 'sphere. I 
 admit this argument only goes so far as to show, that although the 
 body perish, there remains with the soul a capacity for separate 
 existence. Whether that existence shall he actually continued to it 
 alter death, must depend on the will of llim who gave il life, and
 
 224 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ^'^^A« ^M y / o - « is ^ ^3 
 
 o ~\ "~\ ~* "^ / o - * V^ -^ ^ ' ^\ ^? 
 
 MU(NAU C «- ' ^ ^ ^ * <, I \ T ^ 
 
 ^ N -f ? - ( Y, " J... ~ ~ o, .^ ' -}; . ~n A^ 
 
 V 
 
 ■V. *v VT j C 
 
 >V ■ "/• >-*>* ^ 
 
 L 
 
 V 
 
 > — ' x ^_ y £ x ^ w > x? ^ ii > ^ s ^ >_ 

 
 SERMON BY DR. BLAIR. 225 
 
 who certainly, at hi* pleasure, can take that life away. It is necessary, 
 
 therefore, to inquire into what we have any reason to believe, may be the 
 intention of our ( Ireator concerning a future life. 
 
 I argue then, in the next place, that if the soul were to perish when the 
 body dies, the state of man would be altogether unsuitable to the wisdom 
 and perfection of the Author of his being. Man would be the only 
 creature that would seem to have been made in vain. All tiie other 
 works of Ibid arc contrived to answer exactly the purposes for which 
 they were made. They arc either incapable of knowledge at all ; or 
 they know nothing higher than the state in which they are placed. 
 Their powers are perfectly suited and adjusted to their condition. 
 But It, is not so with man. lie has every appearance of being 
 framed for something higher and greater than what be here attains. 
 He sees the narrow bounds within which he is here confined; knows 
 and laments all the imperfections of his present state. His thirst 
 for knowledge, his desires of happiness, ail stretch beyond his earthly 
 station. Ho searches in vain for adequate objects to gratify him. 
 His nature is perpetually tending and aspiring towards the enjoyment 
 of some more complete felicity than this world can afford. In the 
 midst of all his searches and aspirations he is suddenly cut off. 
 He is but of yesterday, and to morrow is gone. Often in the en- 
 trance, often in the bloom of life, when lie had just begun to act 
 his part, and to expand his powers, darkness is made to cover him. 
 Can we believe that, when this period is come, all is finally over with 
 the best ami worthiest of mankind'/ Endowed with so noble an 
 apparatus of rational powers, taught to form high views and enlarged 
 desires, were they brought forth for no other purpose than to breathe 
 this gross and impure air for a short, space, and then to be cut off' 
 from till existence'/ All his other works God had made in "weight, 
 number and measure;" the hand of the Almighty artificer everywhere 
 appears. But on man, his chief work here below, he would, upon 
 this supposition, appear to have bestowed no attention; and after 
 having erected a stately palace in this universe, framed with SO much 
 magnificence, and decorated with so mucll beauty, to have introduced 
 man, in the guise of a neglected wanderer, to become its inhabitant. 
 
 Let us further consider the confused and promiscuous distribution 
 of good and evil in this life. The enjoyments of the world, such as 
 they are, are far from being always bestowed on the virtuous and 
 the worthy. On the contrary the bitterest portion is often their lot. 
 
 In the midsl of infirmities, diseases and sorrows, they are left to 
 drag their life, while ease and affluence are allowed to the ungodly. 
 I must ask if such an arrangement of things, owing to the ordina- 
 tion, or at least to the permission of Providence, be consonant to 
 any ideas we can form of the wisdom and goodness of a Supreme 
 Ruler, on the supposition of there being no future state. Hut as 
 soon as the immortality of the soul and a -tale of future retribution 
 are established, all difficulties vanish; the mystery is unraveled; 
 supreme wisdom, justice and goodness are discovered to be only con- 
 cealed for a little while behind the curtain. If that curtain were 
 never to be withdrawn, and immortality never to appear, the ways 
 15
 
 
 226 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ^^M'^iu^ ., v ~ s t . ' x •••• ■" 
 
 ..4.^^ V v ^ fc ^\— ~*^ -I- L 
 ^ ( t .L.-^A IW,^ \^V ^°~^ ^J^ 
 
 t^r < ^ A^O. <A, A. I; ^ „- \' y s 3 /Sj. v \ (x 
 
 ~ • m ^n s ) ° ^.. -f ^ 1 • "-v _ c v^'^ 
 
 ^\">^f W V/_5 \_p 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 <T\ 
 
 • ^ r-s ^ , ^_ * L .^ _A ' V" ° \_. 4.
 
 SERMON UY in;. BLAIR. 227 
 
 of 4 ; • >■ l would be utterly inexplicable to num. We should be obliged 
 to conclude that either a God did nol exist ; or though he existed, that 
 he was not possessed of such perfections as we now ascribe to him, if, 
 when a worthy and pious man had spent his whole life in virtuous deeds, 
 and perhaps had died a martyr to the cause of religion and truth, he 
 should, after long and severe Bufferings, perish finally, unrewarded and 
 forgotten; no attention shown to him by the Almighty; no building 
 of God erected for him ; no house eternal prepared in the Heavens ! 
 
 These reasons are much strengthened by the belief that has ever 
 prevailed among mankind, of the soul's immortality. It is not an 
 opinion that took its rise from the thin-spun speculations of some 
 abstract philosophers. Never has any nation been discovered on the 
 face of the earth, so rude and barbarous, that in the midst of their 
 wildest superstitions there was not cherished among them some expecta- 
 tions of a slate after death, in which the virtuous were to enjoy happi- 
 ness. So universal a consent in this belief, affords just grounds to 
 ascribe il to some innate principle implanted by God in the tinman 
 breast, Had it no foundation in truth, we must suppose that the 
 Creator found it necessary, for tin' purposes of his government, to 
 carry on a principle of universal deception among his rational subjects. 
 Many of the strongest passions of our nature are made to have a clear 
 reference to the future existence of the soul. The love of fame, the ardent 
 concern which so often prevails about futurity, all allude to somewhat in 
 which men suppose themselves to be personally concerned after death. 
 The conscience-, both of the good and the bad, bear witness to a world 
 that is to come. .Seldom do men leave this world without some fears or 
 hopes respecting it ; some secret anticipations and presages of what is 
 hereafter to befall them. 
 
 l!ut though the reasonings which have been adduced to prove the 
 immortality of the soul in a future state, are certainly of great weight, yet 
 reasonings slid they arc, and no more; and in every human reasoning 
 suspicious may arise of some fallacy or error. In a point so momentous 
 to us as our existence after death we never could with absolute certainty 
 and full satisfaction have rested on any evidence except what was con- 
 tinued by the declaration of God himself. For many and high blessings 
 we are indebted to the Christian revelation ; lor none more than for its 
 having ''brought lib- and immortality to light." The revelations made 
 
 by God to the world in early ages, gave the lir.-t opening to ibis great 
 article of faith and hope. In after periods the light dawned more and 
 more; but it was not. until the Sun of Righteousness arose, by the 
 appearance of Christ on earth, thai the great discovery was completed. 
 Then, indeed, were made known the •'city of the living God, the new 
 Jerusalem" above, the "mansions" prepared for the " spirits of jusl 
 men made perfect." 
 
 The first and most natural improvement of all that has been said, 
 is to produce in our hearts the most lasting gratitude, love anil 
 reverence, towards that great Benefactor of mankind, who not only 
 has made known and published the blessings of a future Mate to the 
 righteous, but by his great undertaking for their redemption has 
 erected in their behalf the "house eternal in the heavens." The next
 
 228 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 c— 1 ' L V" ~ <L J; ' LTV, *" ' /^* N V ^ V. 
 
 -^ ~" ^ > v>l~ ^>« V 
 
 •/ 
 
 'Ik 
 
 
 1 V s^(\ 
 
 \ 
 
 ? 
 
 < ^ ' '< 
 
 S 
 
 % ~t ^ ^ V. U N * V^, ^ ~* A. > ^/ ) 
 
 W ' ) ^ w V ° kx,x ^ ~~) 1 .„\ 1? a 
 
 3 " % A 
 
 ^_e 
 
 
 
 Hh 
 
 
 ~\
 
 Sermon by dr. blair. 229 
 
 Improvement we should make, is to conduct our own life and behaviour 
 as becomes those who have an Interest in this happiness and this hope. 
 From such persons, assuredly, is to be expected a pure, correct, and 
 dignified behaviour in every situation ; nol a con tempi of the employ- 
 ments, nor a renunciation of all the comforts <>r their present life. 
 Opinions that produce such effects are connected only with the spirit of 
 superstition and false religion. But to them it belongs, in the midst, 
 of the affairs, enticements and temptations of the world, to regulate 
 their conduct as becomes the heirs of a divine inheritance ; never debas 
 ing themselves among what is mean, nor defiling themselves with what 
 is corrupt, in the present state ; but Berving God with that fidelity, and 
 behaving to men with that steady magnanimity of virtue, that generous 
 beneficence and humanity, which suits immortal beings who are aspiring 
 to rise m a future state to the perfection of their nature in the presence 
 of God. Blair. 
 
 -.'. CHARACTERISTICS OK THE AGE. 
 
 The peculiar and distinguishing characteristics of the present age 
 are in every respect remarkable. Unquestionably an extraordinary and 
 universal change has commenced in the internal as well as the external 
 world, in the mind of man as well as in the habits of society, the one 
 indeed being the necessary consequence of the other. A rational con- 
 sideration of the circumstances in which mankind are at present placed, 
 must Bhow ns that influences of the most important ami wonderful char- 
 acter have been and are operating in such a manner as to bring about 
 
 if not ;i reformation, a thorough rev olution in the Organization of society. 
 
 Never in the history of the world have benevolent and philanthropic 
 institutions for the relief of domestic and public affliction ; societies 
 for the promotion of manufacturing, commercial and agricultural inter- 
 ests; associations for the instruction of the masses, the advancement, 
 of literature and science, tin- development of true political principles; 
 for the extension, in short, of every description of knowledge, and the 
 bringing about of every kind of reform, been so numerous, so efficient, 
 and bo indefatigable in their operation as at the present day. We do 
 not. say that many of the objects sought by these associations are not 
 extravagant and impracticable, but we ,| gaj that it is impossible that 
 such influences can exist without advancing, in some degree, the inter- 
 
 e-ts of humanity. It would lie idle to deny that notwithstanding all 
 
 these beneficial influences, a great amount of misery exists ; but this is 
 only the natural consequence of great and sudden changes. Let ii- hope 
 
 that in this instance at least, it may he hut the indispensable preliminary 
 stai_'e in the cure of a deep seated disease. 
 
 3. A SUPPOSED REPLY TO \ REQUISITION. 
 
 I am very grateful for the disinterested and uninterrupted kind- 
 ties* you have shown towards me, and the especial Bervices you have 
 rendered me on all occasions; without which it would have Keen 
 
 Impossible for me to have accomplished a single object 1 had in view.
 
 230 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 \.~V ^fc V <T\ ; T |. s ^ 1_. * ^V -1 W Ve 
 
 4 V 
 
 ' -X « .\r^-. V^ >^ 
 
 '/^-v* 
 
 I. A ) ( \.d. * - l-^-,. > : • ^ o ^ " -> I- -^ 
 
 C ' v, f o .^ v -y ' ^ ^ ^ * 4 ' 
 \^j /V N z^^ 1 - ^L i ...v..-v i. ~^\-\ - -< 
 
 - ~ ^ I ■ ^ j, %>^ — - <^ ^ R^x 
 
 < ,] . ^v_ ' < - ' «— ' -\ ■"** -^^ x ' '->- * ,; 
 
 ^ .v. > lL» • ' , i ' < s ~3 . l=. * i_ ^ ) y *> 
 
 'b s ■'- ^> • ■'-'--•• ' " " ^ a u ° -\ ^ ~ w ° 
 
 " > A v Ja..V fl „ « ~ ' ./ I /' " —
 
 SHORTHAND WRITERS AND REPORTERS. 231 
 
 Nothing could be more gratifying in me, or give me greater satisfaction, 
 than [lie proposition yon have made. I shall accede t<> it with the great- 
 est pleasure; and shall endeavor, as far as possible, to carry out your 
 plan. The fact of its applicability to the purposes for which it is intended, 
 and tlic slight expenditure it involves, mast bring it before the attention 
 of the public, and as it, is admirably subservient to the general objects 
 contemplated by government, no doubt Parliament will be induced to 
 further the undertaking. We have already sufficient funds to commence 
 operations, and several distinguished individuals have promised us testi- 
 monials in favor of the scheme, as well as subscriptions tp help it. for- 
 ward. As far as I have been able to observe, I think there is no chance 
 of success without individual exertion on our part ; but, with this, I have 
 every reason to believe that our object will be attained. 
 
 4. SHORTHAND WRITERS AND REPORTERS. 
 
 By many persons shorthand writers and reporters are presumed to 
 be one and the same. Be jure they are, as they both write short- 
 hand : but de facto they are not: the one is merely a word taker; 
 while the other, if he understands his business properly, is not only 
 an efficient shorthand writer, and consequently, able to take down 
 the words of a speaker when his importance renders it necessary; — 
 but whether reporting every word, or simply preparing condensed 
 reports of long wordy harangues containing but few principles, he is 
 invariably called upon to exert Ids mental powers to a far greater extent. 
 than the other. For instance, a man may make an indifferent speech so 
 far as language is conc< rued, (and i hat is a nio.-t important element), but 
 replete with excellent, matter, which it is the province of the reporter 
 to judiciously condense, to improve, and, in fact, to render intelligible. 
 In short, it is the province of the reporter to make good speeches for 
 bad speakers. 
 
 An amusing instance of the inability of shorthand writers to grasp 
 the essence of a body of shorthand notes— to condense them without 
 destroying the meaning of the Speaker, ami without omitting a single 
 point, may be here mentioned. .Many years au r o, when the late Mr 
 Barnes was the editor of the Times, a gentleman, who considered that 
 to accomplish the task of taking every word was to obtain the very 
 acme of perfection as a reporter, was engaged to take a trial turn in 
 Parliament for that influential journal. If- did so, he strained his 
 every nerve ; and although the speaker was an unimportant one, every 
 syllable of his address was recorded in his note-book; and, reeling 
 satisfied that he had accomplished his task in a satisfactory manner, 
 he lost no time, as may be imagined, in Binding his way to the re- 
 porters 1 room of the Times office. Some important foreign intelli- 
 gence had just arrived, and in order to make room for it, Mr. Barnes 
 hurried into (be room, and desired the reporters to condense the par 
 liaraentary intelligence. Of course, they felt no disposition to quarrel 
 with the instructions they had received. Turning to Mr. , Mr. 
 
 Panics inquired the nature of his "turn," and the length to which 
 
 his notes would extend. "Three columns at the least," replied the
 
 232 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 i 
 
 ^r -A. 
 
 ^ c^ V t x •> 
 
 ■v-l-A 
 
 ■^ <N *r 
 
 ^ 1 v u ^ \y 
 
 ^ » u. . ^ 
 
 I ~ ~\ 
 
 V k^" ^w^ 
 
 Q \- 
 
 Y x . ^ ) ~» 
 
 , ; i t 
 
 - -^L ; . . L 
 
 w 
 
 — 1 J. Vo - 
 
 ■'U t ^ 
 • 1 
 
 ^ x • > ' ' — . 
 
 • r\o ^ 
 
 _v u 7 
 
 -tU'-i 
 
 - - A. x - 
 
 V «-*. 
 
 -> 5 U ^ / 
 
 .s-. . , ^ , 
 
 o- S S |/> ) o '' 
 
 - " x 
 
 ^ ^ ^ " ^ . 
 
 "V 
 
 1 ■ =*. ) 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 -7 au <- r. 
 
 i_7 ^ 
 
 il "*" 'S, > H> Sf. ~^| 1 ..(.. x 
 
 o7..U^l 
 
 J\« . Y_~ 
 
 - -^ 1^ b ^ _ 
 
 -V 
 
 ^V '+ 
 
 i ^ " V, 
 
 _ ^ r j£. " 
 
 N ^> 
 
 ' , w V' ) 
 
 'V ' > x 
 
 1 -=y W N -y^rr-*" 
 
 '■ ■ IA i > v - 
 
 -\ r: 
 
 ■ ~*- 3 t ' 
 
 v ^ > 
 
 1^» . *\ 
 
 *-l «" 'Vy 
 
 ~\_ C Av o ! " 
 
 ' W x 
 
 j -v. _, ' b 
 
 N <r s r 
 
 v^i L^ ° ^ 
 
 * n~, 
 
 ^S. x ArVja.* 
 
 6 -->n 
 
 ^> x 
 
 v ' ■ ^L» A 
 
 — 6| <^ 
 
 
 ' L ^ c .. 
 
 ^v, fc ' 
 
 >'■ 
 
 ? X "** * 
 
 - - "\ > ^ 
 
 \ ' X 
 
 11 ■ ^ 
 
 ~ V v~ ^ ° • u v ' <■ 
 
 ' \ 
 
 •" *^ - X 1 
 
 ' ' ^ . N , x 
 
 v- I v * ; 
 
 • ^ L 
 
 2 ^-"i-- 
 
 > JS-* I s 
 
 w "N > ' "* / 
 
 N ) ^ 
 
 " ^ i « i ' 
 
 ^ " S •). - 
 
 L "^ v» '' > 
 
 v - '-\ -vi- ° y ■ 
 
 V "^x 
 
 
 
 
 I ^ ( - 
 
 ^V, ~ s " "Ip " f 
 
 *\S'*v
 
 SPEECH P.V DANIEL WEBSTER. 233 
 
 shorthand writer. "Good heavens! that will never do. You must not 
 go beyond n column or a column and a quarter. You must certainly not 
 write mure ih in one-half of that." The gentleman looked iip at the face 
 ofthe able editor of the most powerful journal in the world, to assure 
 himself that hewasreall] to destroy one-half of liis turn. He could not 
 understand it. Surely the editor bad gone mad, or become wholly 
 insensible of the value, of the great machine placed under his control. 
 The thing was impossible without completely destroying the task, in the 
 unabridged condition of which he took so much pride. "Cut it down 
 to one-half," retorted the editor rather testily. The shorthand writer 
 counted the leaves of his book, over which his turn extended; he then 
 divided them, and, looking again into the lace of Mr. Barnes, inquired 
 with the utmost simplicity, " which half he should write." We heard 
 that the turn was his first and last. So much simplicity would not do on 
 the Times. 
 
 A reporter from the north, not many years ago, was engaged by the 
 managing reporter of the Times, Mr. Neilson, to take a trial turn. He did 
 so; and went off to the Times office to write it out. His courage how- 
 over failed him at the Bight of the establishment. He became excessively 
 terrified; but his terror increased ten-fold as he neared the reporters 1 
 room, lie stood at the door for a few moments, as if the well known 
 line, "All hope abandon ye who enter here." was emblazoned on tie 1 
 portal. He however ventured to look in. The Bight of the reporters 
 whose fingers were flying across the paper like an express train down an 
 incline, pinned him to the threshold, lie simply articulated, "What 
 awfu' work this reporting is ! " and vanished, lie was never seen again, 
 audit is to be hoped that he lost no time in retracing his steps to his 
 
 native hills. ./. /. ScOtt. 
 
 5. SPEECH BY DANIEL WEBSTER. 
 
 I owe the honor of this occasion, and I esteem it an uncommon and 
 extraordinary honor, to the young men of this city of Albany ; and it is 
 my first duty to express 10 these young men my grateful thanks for the 
 respect they have manifested towards me. Nevertheless, I do not mis- 
 take \ on, or your object, or your purpose. I am proud to lake to myself 
 whatever may properly belong to me, a- a token of personal and political 
 regard from you to me. But I know, young men of Albany, it is not 
 I, but the cause ; it is not I, but your own generous attachments to your 
 country ; it is not I. but the Constitution of i he l'n ion which has hound 
 together your ancestors and mine, and ali of us. for more than half a 
 century. It is this that has brought you here to day to testify your regard 
 towards one, who, to the best of his humble ability, has sustained that 
 cause before the country. 
 
 lam requested by those who invited me. to signify my sentiments on 
 the state of public affairs in this country, and the interesting questions
 
 234 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 1 t r ^ Is \ )x (. *, J ( v ^ V r ~! ^ ~^ / y-f 
 
 \ * M. -> ^ ' % ' t s M x ' • ^ -> .^U ^ 
 v.. M *~~ -• 6 ^ v^ v V! j>_ ^ ' v^ < J 
 
 ? ' v — " ^ I / — i > *- -1 - ^ 
 
 \ G ^ 
 
 *C ^ ..^..\ J T ^ f" \c-X ( ^ . J \"jx 
 
 ^ x — I ">.. « .^1 J^ x ~v ) ^ ~ .., 14? x . ~^_ 
 ' <T i ~ < /N * x . v x Ld ) \ e >I^ M • " < ^ 
 
 ^_ i ""- - ^ ( v ' ^ *, ~ ' I ; N *» { 
 \ ■ ./. . j / — p . j s ^ w ) , e- t .>.. 
 
 ^-1 « " - \ 6 1 I "^ ^ ^^; • ^ ' Lo ) X/~ 
 
 s > S A v W I - ~— ■ ■ ) ^ \ 4 ' • \ ' C 
 
 • s i;vg Nj £s. - i <r - ^. < ^ t ^ 
 
 , L x - s • 1^ 5 ( | i -\ x ) ) < - ; ^ l 
 
 |, - ~4 * L850 ' I - |. N 1- t - ^ \ 
 
 > (/!~L ' N °^> x
 
 srr.r.i n r.v n\xiri, WEBSTER. 23o 
 
 which are before us. This proves, gentlemen, thai in their opinion there 
 are questions sometimes arising which range above all party, and all the 
 influences and considerations and interests of party. What are the 
 questions which are overriding, subdninsr, and overwhelming party, unit- 
 ing honest, well meaning persons to lay parly aside, to meet and confer 
 for the genera] public weal? I shall, of course, not enter at large into 
 many of these questions, nor into any lengthened discussion of the state 
 of public affairs, but shall endeavor to slate what that condition is, what 
 these questions are, and to pronounce a conscientious judgment of my 
 own upon the whole. The last Congress passed laws called adjustment 
 measures, or settlement measures ; laws intended to put an end to certain 
 internal and domestic controversies which existed in the country, and 
 -.Hue ui" them for a long time. These laws were passed by the constitu- 
 tional majorities of both Houses of Congress. They received the consti- 
 tutional approbation of the President. They are the laws of the land. 
 To SOU r all of them, indeed to all of them, at the time of their pas- 
 sage, there existed warm and violent opposition. None of them passed 
 without heated discussion. Government was established in each of the 
 territories of New Mexico and Utah, but not without opposition. The 
 boundary of Texas « as to be setl led by compromise with that state, but 
 not without determined and violent opposition. These laws all passed ; 
 and as they have now become, from the nature of the case, irrepealahle, 
 it is not necessary that I should detain you by discussing their merits 
 and demerits. Nevertheless, gentlemen, I desire on this and on all pub- 
 lic occasions, in the most, emphatic and clear manner, to declare, that I 
 hold --iime of these laws, and especially that which provided for the 
 adjustment of the controversy with Texas, to have been essential to the 
 preservation of the public peace. Twill not now argue that point, nor 
 lav before you at large the circumstances which existed at that time, 
 the peculiar situation of things in so many of the Southern States ; or the 
 f.iei that many of those States had adopted measures for the separation 
 of the Union ; the fad that Texas was preparing to assert her rights to 
 territory which New Mexico though! was hers byrighl ; and that hun- 
 dreds and thousands of men. tired of the pursuits of private life, were 
 ready to rise and unite in any enterprise that might open itself to them, 
 even at the risk of a direct conllict with the authority of this Govern- 
 ment. 1 say, therefore, without going into the argument with any details, 
 that in March of 1850, when I found it my dut\ to address Congress on 
 these important topics, it was my conscientious belief, still unshaken, 
 ever since confirmed, that if the controversy with Texas could not be 
 amicably adjusted, there must, in all probability, have been civil war and 
 civil bloodshed. And in the contemplation of such a prospect, it was of 
 little consequence on which standard victory Bhould perch : although in 
 such a contest we took it for granted that no opposition could arise to the 
 authority of the United states that would not be suppressed. 
 
 Hut what of that V I was not anxious about the military consequences 
 of things ; I looked to the civil and political state of things and their
 
 236 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 * ^ o ^ ; * -^ D , \>-/ ^ t, / f ^ ^ v. n W 
 7 .< y ^ v ...k. r - , v_..|.. ' 5 , n ^ -v, 
 " <~? ( l^ ^ x ^ "1 ' r \ i. \^ *- ' L 
 
 f is* V ' -f ^ ^ * "" ^ •-• \ ^ - > " 
 
 -f n A ' v \- s*^ N, ^ -°0 ~\ <l 3 °r 
 
 ~~> x _ y r .No.. *\ C 1? j/^ "^ ' p x C nq_ / A-' o^ 
 
 -O %j, ^ ^ ° Px 
 
 Y "^ * y 6 v r s 1830 „s. .k?. i) s .«_o X -^ "" s 
 
 J °> ^ x ' V 1 «' x - ~ ' i ^ '\ "'^ I ^ 
 ' ^ ^ ^ ^ V ' ' ' ' • " ' *\ 
 
 -rx ~ </ ^^^ ^ r .%. — > r . ■ ^ « 
 
 ^-\ ~ x t -^? <•■ ■ I , ^ ■ ' x ■ "— v ^ f\- ") "* 
 
 ° 6^xx rr >- < ~ ^ i v, , x l ( " |^_, ■ K 
 
 i A ^ « /. -^ ~ \_ \ < ^ M ^ ~ M U. 
 
 D v ^ ) J\ ° ' i^_x w " 1 ■ L, x I 
 
 v > «. d ■ • , / ' i ■ x -^- ^ A?\ • v. v.. 
 
 ' n, , v y^ *.s - Sy ' ±?.. . w ,f N 
 
 -• x 7 \ _ /<s> ^ -f ^ O p, / J. -P ) f
 
 SPEECH I'.Y DANIEL WEBSTER. 237 
 
 results ; and I inquired what would be the condition oi the country if in 
 
 this imitated state of things, if in this vastly extended though not gen- 
 erally pervading feeling at the South, war should break out, and blood- 
 shed should ensue in that extreme of the Union ? That was enough for 
 me to inquire into and regard ; and, if the chances had been but one in a 
 thousand that such would have been the result, I should still have felt that 
 that one-thousandth chance should be guarded against by any reasonable 
 sacrifice ; because, gentlemen, sanguine as l am for the future prosperity 
 of the country, Strongly as 1 believe now, after what has passed, and es- 
 pecially after those measures to which I have referred, that it is likely to 
 hold together, 1 yet believe firmly that this L'ninn, once broken, is utterly 
 incapable, according to till human experience, of being reconstructed in 
 its original character, of being re-cemented by any chemistry or art or 
 effort or skill of man. Now. gentlemen, let us pass from those measures 
 which are now accomplished and settled. California is in the Union, and 
 cannot be got out : the Texas boundary is settled, under provision of law, 
 according to accustomed usage in former cases ; and these things may be 
 regarded a- settled. 
 
 But then there was another subject, equally agitating and equally irri- 
 tating, which, in its nature, must always be subject to consideration or 
 proposed amendment, and thai is the fugitive slave law of 1850, passed at 
 the same Session of ( longress. Allow me to advert, very shortly, to what 
 I consider the ground of the law. Von know, and I know, that it was 
 very much opposed in the Northern stales: sometimes with argument 
 not unfair, often by those whirlwinds of fanaticism that raise adust ami 
 blind the eyes, but produce nothing else. Now , gentlemen, this question 
 of the propriety of the fugitive slave law, or the enactment of some such 
 law. is a question that must be met. Its enemies will not let it sleep or 
 slumber. They will "give neither sleep to their eves nor slumber to 
 their eyelids " so long a- they can agitate il before the people, it is with 
 them a topic, a desirable topic, and all know who have much experi- 
 ence in political affairs, that for party men, and in parly times, there is 
 hardly anything so desirable as a topic. Now, gentlemen, I am read] to 
 meet this question, I am ready to say that it was right, proper, expedi- 
 ent, just, licit a suitable law should be passed for the restoration of the 
 fugitive sla\ es found in free Stales, to their owners in the sla\ e States. I 
 am ready to say that, because I only repeal the words of the Constitution 
 itself, and am not afraid of being considered a plagiarist, nor a feehle imita- 
 tor of other men's language and sent imeiits. when 1 repeat and announce 
 to every part of the country, to you here, and at all times, the language 
 
 of the Constitution of my country. Gentlemen, before the Revolution 
 
 slavery existed in the Southern States, and had existed there for more 
 
 than a hundred years. We of the North wen- not guiltj of its introduc- 
 tion. That generation of men, even in the South, were not guilty of it. 
 
 It had been introduced according to the policy of the Mother ( 'ountry, 
 
 before there was any independence in the United stales ; indeed, before 
 there were any authorities in the Colonies competent to resist it. Why,
 
 2;fs 
 
 1 1 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ' V- . ^ • _ . u <j n, </- v- v ; . r . r « i ... v 
 
 6. /w° ' -VV . ^ 5, n?- A - -/I ' I- - 
 
 Lwj . ^ * V,° ^ ^ ^- < ' I - ^~ » -i 
 
 jl. <S /\ ' ?jz:. /-^ > _w^ ' s " ^ ) /^ x )V n . 
 •^ \ y> \; . X ^ V.. <f _|_ >„ - • v^> „ -v % 
 
 „\ ^ X ^ <- ' \ v- X o v"^ \» t > o 
 
 VV JL.i A.) I '"» a, " w I --°^
 
 REPORTING AS \ MENTAL EXERCISE. 239 
 
 gentlemen, men's opinions have bo changed on this subject, and prop- 
 erly, the world I in* come to so much juster sentiments, we can hardly be- 
 lieve, thai which is certainly true, that at the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle, in 
 17 is, tin- English Government insisted on the fulfilment, to its full extent, 
 of a condition in the treaty of the Assiento, signed at Utrecht, in HIM. by 
 which the Spanish Government had granted the unqualified and exclu 
 she privilege t<> the British Government of importing slaves into the 
 Spanish Colonies in America! That was not then repugnant to public 
 sentiment ; happily, it would be now. 
 
 6. REPORTING AS A MENTAL EXERCISE. 
 
 If we trace the operations of the mind which are carried on during 
 the act of taking down the words of a speaker as they are uttered by 
 him, we shall not be surprised that a considerable amount of practice is 
 
 needed hefore the art of verbatim reporting can be acquired ; the cause 
 of our astonishment will rather be that still greater labor and skiil are 
 not necessary to the carrying on of a process so rapid and yet so com- 
 plicated. 
 
 Let ns suppose a speaker commencing his address. lie titters two or 
 three words, perhaps, in a deliberate manner; they fall on the report- 
 er's ear, and are thence communicated to the brain as the organ of the 
 mind ; the writer must, then recall to his memory the sign for each word 
 he has heard ; the proper sign having suggested itself to his mind, a 
 communication is made from the brain to the fingers, which, obedient, 
 to the will, and trained perhaps to the nicest accuracy of form, rapidly 
 trace the mystic lines on the paper. Some portion of time is of course 
 required for each of these operations to be performed after the words 
 have been spoken; yet. Bee 1 the writer appears to stop precisely at the 
 same time with the speaker ! The orator still continues in his deliberate 
 style, and the reporter is able to write each word he hears before the next 
 is uttered. Now. however, the speaker warms with his subject, and 
 Changes his measured pace to one more rapid ; the writer increases his 
 speed accordingly, and, notwithstanding the many operations at work in 
 his mind, scarcely is the [asl word of a Sentence uttered before he lifts his 
 lien from the paper, as if for an instant's pause, not a syllable having 
 escaped his ear or pen. This surely is a laborious task ; much more so 
 that which follows. The speaker has finished his exordium, is in the midst 
 of his topics of discourse, and has begun his flights of oratory. Listen to 
 his next sentence, lie begins in a low, measured tone ; after a few words 
 makes a sudden pause ; then, as if startled with the brilliancy of his ideas, 
 and fearful lest they should escape before lie can give them utterance, he 
 dashes along at an impetuous rale which he never slackens till he is oul 
 of breath with exertion. In this rapid delivery he has gained ground to 
 the extent of five or six or more words on the writer, whom probably
 
 240 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 °S» 
 
 r^°i 
 
 r > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p N ^ 
 
 <J> o 
 
 -\s>> *j>.(L.SC -V ~^- ' ! 
 
 
 ■6- ~\~ >* 
 
 v->- x W^VL 
 
 V 
 
 x n7 
 
 V- I 
 
 •\ 
 
 M \ 
 
 v 
 
 o ^ -j . " " 'As (-U' I ( - 1 - 
 
 o ^ 
 
 V /'V 
 
 "\ *T \? 
 
 
 ■' ^ c vn^v^~'v^* x 
 
 /\> 
 
 t---? o^S 
 
 v 
 
 , \V_\_r^
 
 REPORTING AS a MENTAL EXERCISE. 241 
 
 be has taken by surprise. The latter, nevertheless, lias had to listen to 
 the words which were, so to speak, in advance of him, recall the proper 
 sign for each, send il from the brain to the fingers,. and trace it on his 
 note-book; while, at tin sanu time, he lias had to attend to the words 
 which follow, so as to he able to dispose of them in the same way when 
 their turn arrives ; and in this manner are his mental and bodily powers 
 occupied lor an hour, or, it may he, several hours together. 
 
 It would naturally he supposed that, with all this to attend to, it wotdd 
 he impossible for the writer to think at all of the sense conveyed by the 
 words which he is at such pains to record; but, to perform his work 
 efficiently, he must bring liis mind to hear on this also, and not only 
 endeavor to understand the general drift of what he is reporting, but to 
 catch the meaning of every expression : for where this is neglected literal 
 accuracy cannot lie attained. The probability is that we do not distinctly 
 hear— hear, that is, so as to be able separately to identify them half the 
 sounds that compose the wurds to which we listen ; and it is only, there- 
 fore, by our close attention to the context that we are enabled to supply 
 imperceptibly— for few people are conscious of this mental act— the sounds 
 tilt t the ear lias failed to convey definitely to us. Hence the necessity for 
 listening to the sense, as well as to the sounds of words, as they How from 
 a speaker's lips. A minister once told us that in a report of a senium 
 delivered by him the phrase "the siege of Abimeleeh " was written and 
 actually printed " the siege of Limerick!" This could not have arisen 
 from a mistake in the written characters, for the forms of Abimeleeh and 
 Limerick would, in any system of shorthand, be palpably distinct ; the ear 
 must, in such a case, have been in error, and the sense should have been 
 sufficient to correct it. Every experienced reporter musl occasionally 
 have discovered errors of this description while transcribing his notes; 
 his inattention to the sense, while following the speaker, not having led 
 him to correct the false impression which ha- been made on the ear. 
 
 As a mental exercise, then, reporting may be regarded as of the 
 greatest utility. It is true that after a long course of practice the art 
 becomes apparently a mechanical one. as far as the taking down is 
 concerned ; yet at first all the powers of the mind must be brought 
 to bear on its attainment, and they can hardly fail to be materially 
 strengthened by the training they mnsl undergo. A woni, however, 
 
 as to reporting being a mechanical operation, as some have termed 
 it. No effort put forth by us can be purely mechanical, since the 
 mind is necessary to it. Walking and reading (reading aloud without 
 attending to the sens,-i seem mechanical acts, but the mind is Indis- 
 pensable lo them. After long practice indeed, a comparatively ex- 
 ternal region of the mind is concerned in thetn. for we are enabled 
 to think and plan operations of more interior faculties while these 
 outward acts a re being attended to: but at ftrsl both walking and 
 reading require, in order to their attainment, a Strong exercise, in 
 one case, of all the powers of the body, and. in the other, of all the 
 powers of the mind ; both having been, of necessity, improved and 
 strengthened by the training. It i- the same with reporting, but in 
 
 this rase the exercise i- more severe; and if even the act of writing 
 should, by practice, become little more than a mechanical perform- 
 10
 
 242 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ^va.. J '"V w 7- ^ v | V* ^\~ X -^ > ^ 
 j£. s _i_ ^- ^ - £^> % vi 5 3^ % ^ - y N 
 
 u-ri^s^ 
 
 L> > e^j> f\ 
 
 *< 
 
 >-/v 
 
 
 "X 
 
 n 
 
 
 \VV s ""v I ^ r -f k x -^ ^° i^ M ? 
 
 < ^ -i - r \ ^ N .v_ " " -i- v ; ^ ^° (. Vp 
 
 ^ • f x "^1 (, I, ~l ^ ^ v, x D ' • >2L n
 
 CHEMISTRY. 243 
 
 ance, the constant employment of the mind in catching the meaning of 
 different speakers, and the bringing before the writer all the varied styles 
 of diction in nse among them, together with the exercise in composition 
 afforded by the transcribing of what has been written, cannot fail to 
 commend the art to all who are interested in education, and in the 
 development of the powers of the human mind. Even where the student 
 of shorthand has been unable to acquire sufficient manual dexterity to 
 follow a speaker verbatim, the practice of reporting will still be beneficial ; 
 since increased attention to the sense will be required, in order that, 
 when abridging a report, nothing material may he omitted. A habit is 
 thus cultivated of separating mere verbiage from the solid material, 
 winnowing the chaff from the wheat; and though this is not the 
 particular benefit on account of which the cultivation of shorthand is 
 recommended in this article, ii is one whose importance onght not to be 
 overlooked in regarding reporting as a mental exercise. — Thomas Allen 
 Reed. 
 
 7. CHEMISTRY. 
 Chemistry is the science which investigates the nature of bodies, 
 and teaches ihe composition and properties of material substances, 
 together with the changes they undergo. There is no science more 
 extensive, and it is scarcely possible for one person i<> embrace it in 
 its whole extent. To chemistry, more or less scientifically pursued, 
 numerous arts owe their birth and progress, and to chemistry the 
 naturalist must resort for the explanation of phenomena that without 
 its aid can only be spoken of by conjecture, and on a true knowledge 
 Of which our happiness as thinking beings eminently depends. To 
 facilitate the study of this important science, it is considered in 
 different points of view, and thrown into divisions and subdivisions, 
 
 so thai a person maj devote himself t< e department of it, although 
 
 the method of observing, analyzing and combining is the same in 
 all, and although all the phenomena must be explained by the general 
 theory, and refer to certain laws of which a previous knowledge is 
 
 requisite. These laws Constitute what is called philosophical chemistry. 
 
 which explains what is meant by the affinity id' aggregation or 
 cohesion, and by the affinity of composition or chemical affinity. 
 It also considers the effects of light, heat, and electricity; the nature 
 of the simple and compound inflammable bodies; of air and water; 
 the composition and decomposition of acids; tie' nature and proper- 
 ties of the salts; their relations to the acids ; the' calcination, solution 
 
 and alloying of metals; the composition and nature of plants; the 
 characteristics of the immediate element- of vegetable substances; 
 
 the phenomena of animali/alion ; the properties of animal com- 
 pounds, and the decay of organic suhstances. These are its general 
 views, but, as we have before observed, in order to facilitate the study 
 of chemistry, it is divided into several separate branches. There is 
 a meteorological chemistry, by which the great phenomena observed 
 in the atmosphere are explained; and a geological chemistry, which 
 seeks to account for the various combinations of nature beneath the 
 earth's surface, which produces volcanoes, veins of metal, coals, basalt,
 
 244 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 s^ ^ N ^ ^ c^ ^ ^ N * 5r c Gx ( -* < % 
 
 °x 
 
 Y' -r 
 
 £1 6°: 1 ^ < 
 
 ^l 
 
 - c^: K^ ^ ( - -f < ^ < -\ V^^ x^ ^. v -s 
 
 ^ • ^ r • \ / f N ; k * ~ S °1 ( o " l V C . 
 
 ^ / ) "V ^ < ^ ^ ' ^ ^> 4 _^_ ^»
 
 CHEMISTRY. 245 
 
 etc. There Is also a chemistry of the mineral kingdom, comprising the 
 
 examination of all inorganic substances: a chemistry of the vegetable 
 kingdom, which analyzes plants and their immediate products ; a chem- 
 istry of the animal kingdom, which studies all substances derived from 
 living or dead animals ; a pathological and pharmaceutical chemistry, 
 which traces the changes produced by disease, with the nature and prep- 
 aration of medicines; an agricultural chemistry, which treats of the 
 nature of plants and soils, and the laws of production. The practical 
 chemist distinguishes bodies into simple and compound substances. 
 Simple substances comprehend such as have hitherto not been decom- 
 pounded. Of these some are denominated combustibles, because they 
 can undergo combustion, or in oilier words can burn, as hydrogen, car- 
 bon, phosphorus and borax, besides the alkalies, earths and metals. 
 Some are supporters of combustion, which, though not of themselves 
 capable of undergoing combustion, are necessary to produce this effect in 
 other bodies ; of which there are three, namely, the three gaseous bodies, 
 oxygen, chlorine, and iodine. Compound substances are formed by the 
 union of simple substances with each other, or by that of compound sub- 
 stances with others. They result, first, from the combination of oxygen, 
 or one of the Other simple supporters of combustion, with one of the 
 simple combustibles ; such are the acids: second, from that of a simple 
 body combined with oxygen, with another similar compound ; such are 
 the salts : third, from that of two or three simple combustibles with one 
 another; fourth, from that of oxygen wiih hydrogen and carbon, form- 
 ing vegetable matter : fifth, from that of oxygen with hydrogen, carbon, 
 and azote, forming animal matter. When the constituent parts of bodies 
 air separated from each other, the bodies are said to be decomposed, and 
 the act of separating them is called decomposition : on the other hand, 
 when bodies are so intimately united as to form new and distinct sub- 
 stances, this chemical union i~ distinguished by the name of combina- 
 tion. The chemical investigation of bodies therefore proceeds in two 
 ways, namely, by analysis, that is, the separation of bodies by a series of 
 decompositions and combinations, to come at the knowledge of the con- 
 stituent parts : and synthesis, by a series of processes to form new com- 
 pounds; and these two forms of investigation may accompany and assist 
 each other. The commencement of the 19th century forms a brilliant 
 era in the progress of chemistry ; hut great as have been the discoveries, 
 and persevering as are the researches of the most profound inquirers, 
 every step that is taken, confirms more strongly the fact, that chemistry 
 is a progressive Bcience, and that the discoveries of to-day may be 
 eclipsed by tint discoveries of to-morrow. And therefore truly has it 
 been said, that "its analysis i< indefinite." Its termination will have 
 been attained only when the real elements of bodies shall have been 
 detect i'd. and all their modifications traced; bat how remote this may 
 be from its present state we cannot judge. Nor can we, from our present 
 knowledge, form any just conception of the stages ,,f discovery through 
 which it has yet to pa-s. MaundU rV Scu ntiftc and Literary Treasury."
 
 246 APPLIED PHONOGRAPHY. 253-254 
 
 APPLIED PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 253. The student who has obtained from the lessons 
 given in these pages a good theoretical knowledge of 
 Phonography, and has also had the practice necessary to 
 acquire a fair amount of proficiency as a note-taker, has, 
 we assume, mastered the art of shorthand writing for 
 some practical purpose. It is his intention to use it in 
 the office; or to employ it in connection with the type- 
 writer; or for note-taking of various descriptions (public 
 or private) ; or for reporting for the press. Many works 
 have been prepared which deal with what may be termed 
 Applied Phonography, that is the employment of Pitman's 
 Shorthand, in the various occupations just indicated. In 
 order that the student may know where to find informa- 
 tion of value to him in his individual practice, a brief 
 description of some of the books published is appended. 
 
 254. The whole subject of the practical uses of short- 
 hand is comprehensively treated in " The Shorthand 
 Writer : a Complete Guide to the Commercial, Profes- 
 sional and other Uses of Shorthand," by T. A. Peed i price 
 $1.00). This work may be studied with advantage hy 
 all shorthand writers who are commencing work, or who 
 are already in active employment, because it embodies 
 Mr. Weed's pre-eminent experience for half-a-ccntury in 
 every description of shorthand labor. Anot her work of 
 .Mr. Reed's will be found extremely serviceable to short- 
 hand writers who are called upon to deal with special 
 subjects, namely "Technical Reporting" (40c), which 
 contains the best phonographic abbreviations for em- 
 ployment in mechanical, medical, legal and statistical 
 note taking, with valuable notes; and phonographic 
 phrases for Latin and French quotations. There arc
 
 255-256 APPLIED PHONOGRAPHY. 247 
 
 three other phrase-books by Isaac Pitman, -which are 
 indispensable for thoroughly efficient verbatim work, 
 namely the '•Phonographic Phrase Book" (35c), con- 
 taining an extensive list of phraseograms which may be 
 safely employed; the "Legal Phrase Book" (15c), con- 
 taining phrases useful to the law reporter and lawyer's 
 clerk; the " Railway Phrase Book" (15c), an adaptation 
 of Phonography to the needs of railroad correspondence. 
 
 255. Several works deal witli the general employment 
 of shorthand in office work. The most useful, to the 
 American stenographer, being, "Business Correspondence 
 in Shorthand" (30c), containing acbual lmsiness letters, 
 with forms and expressions met with in the offices of rail- 
 road, law, banking and other branches of business, and 
 especially adapted to the requirements of American stu- 
 dents ; with typed key and matter divided for speed 
 practice. Other comprehensive works are " Phonog- 
 raphy in the Office: a complete Shorthand Clerk's Guide, 
 with chapters on special preparation, including business 
 phrases and contractions, letters, etc."; by A. Kingston 
 (40c) The book treats very fully on office work, and 
 includes not only information on shorthand subjects, but 
 abbreviations, etc., used in longhand writing. The 
 "Shorthand Commercial belter Writer," and "Office 
 Work in Shorthand." are companion volumes printed in 
 shorthand (35c each), and '-Key,'' in ordinary type (20c. 
 each). 
 
 256. The use of the typewriter in association with 
 shorthand has become indispensable, and the following 
 works on that subject will be found of much practical 
 value: "A Manual of the Typewriter" ($1.00); "A 
 .Manual of the Remington Typewriter," by John Harri- 
 son (35c); Instructions on the "Remington," " Cali- 
 graph," "Yost," " Bar-Eock " (20c. each). For further 
 particulars see catalogue at the end of this book.
 
 248 APPLIED PHONOGRAPH V. 257-259 
 
 257. The " Reporters' Assistant."' by Isaac Pitman (35c.) 
 contains classified lists comprising every outline in the 
 language which stands for two or more words, and is 
 valuable, not to reporters only, but to all shorthand 
 writers, whenever a difficult}- occurs in reading un- 
 vocalized Phonography. "Reporting Hints," by A. Baker 
 (40c), contains a number of practical hints on reporting 
 and the preparation of copy for the press, with speci- 
 mens of work, and the " Newspaper World," by A. Baker 
 (35c), furnishes an historical and descriptive account of 
 press work, which will be of value to the novice. 
 
 258. .Many shorthand writers turn their attention to 
 teaching, and there is a constantly increasing demand 
 for additional instructors in Isaac Pitman's Shorthand. 
 Very comprehensive information on the best methods of 
 procedure will be found in " A Handbook for Shorthand 
 Teachers: a Guide to the Art of Teaching Pitman's Pho- 
 nography, including a brief History of Shorthand, Obser- 
 vations on the Origin and Development of Phonography, 
 etc." (00c). 
 
 259. The student who desires to become further ac- 
 quainted with the various departments of Shorthand 
 Literature, is referred to the Catalogue at the end of this 
 
 volume, and to the Phonetic Journal. The Journal is the 
 oldest and largest weekly shorthand periodical in exist- 
 ence, and, in addition to articles of interest and value 
 to all practical shorthand writers, contains every week 
 speeches and other useful reading matter in engraved 
 shorthand. Pitman 1 i Shorthand WeeMy is entirely printed 
 in beautiful shorthand, with choice illustrations. The 
 reading matter is thoroughly entertaining, and the reader 
 will find its perusal an extremely pleasant method of 
 improving his knowledge of Phonography.
 
 260-202 TYPEWRITING AND SHORTHAND. 249 
 
 TYPEWRITING AND SHORTHAND. 
 
 200. Every writer of shorthand, who proposes to make 
 use of his knowledge of the art in professional or business 
 life, is strongly advised to make himself an efficient 
 operator on the typewriter. Without doubt the use of 
 the typewriter for the transcription of shorthand notes 
 is rapidly becoming the usual method. There are several 
 modes by which the typewriter may be employed for pro- 
 ducing a transcript. The shorthand writer himself may 
 transcribe his own notes on the typewriter, and, provided 
 that lie is fairly expert, lie will accomplish his task in 
 much less time and with less fatigue than by the old 
 method. lie may dictate his notes to an expert typist, 
 and by this division of labor produce his transcript even 
 more quickly. In many instances it, would be practicable 
 to divide the notes among several operators able to read 
 the shorthand writer's notes, or portions might be dic- 
 tated to each. Where verbatim transcripts of speeches 
 or evidence arc required, either as " copy " for the printer 
 or for the use of the parties interested, the employment of 
 the typewriter is of the utmost advantage, on account of 
 the superior legibility of the transcript. In all offices 
 having extensive correspondence, the typewriter is of 
 the greatest service, documents and letters being dictated 
 to shorthand writers, who are also typists. 
 
 261. The ability to operate a typewriter is not difficult 
 of acquirement, and at nearly all the shorthand schools 
 in the country, at most of the typewrit Jul;' agencies and 
 offices, and in connection with many educational institu- 
 tions, instruction is given in the art on moderate terms. 
 
 202. The publishers <>f this book have issued several 
 manuals on the use of the typewriter, which will be found
 
 250 TYPEWRITING AND SHORTHAND. 262 
 
 extremely useful to those taking up the art. Mention 
 of these will be found on page 247.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 (The referenct is to tJu Paragraph, except where the page «'■« given.) 
 
 Accent, 203 
 
 Additional sign for g and z, 51 
 
 Advantages of Shorthand, juii/r 110 
 
 Affix (/;•/ '.'.'.'/•' 1?4 -ahty iltiy 
 -ariiy, 175 ; -ly, 176; -mental, -'/>> n 
 ■tality, 177 ; -self, 178; -sAip, 179 
 
 All, joined logogram for, 156 
 
 Alphabet, the, 7 
 
 Applied Phonography, 253 
 
 Approbation anddissent.signsof, 241 
 
 Aspirate, 10 : representation of, ill 
 
 Business Letters, pagi 166 
 
 Basiness Phrases and i lontractions, 
 
 /j(fr/f lti.'i 
 
 ( apital letters, to mirk, 205 
 
 Gh and upward r, rales for writing, 
 
 28 
 Chapter and verse, how to indicate, 
 
 2 IS 
 Choosing matter for dictation, 215 
 < lircle 8 at ■•nil of half sized letters, 
 
 ill: u hen used, .".; 
 Circles and limps preceding a hook, 
 
 pagi I'' 
 Coalescents, 10 
 Compounds of Here, There, and 
 
 Where, 249. 
 Con and com, omission of, '.'I I 
 ( 'onsonants, table of, pagi I 
 t lontinuants, 9 
 Contractions. 192 ; pagi 101 
 Derivative words, position of, 229 
 Diagrams formed from consonants, 
 
 18 
 Dictation, 215 
 Diphthongs, IS; places of, 46; joined 
 
 initial. 165; W and // series, 152; 
 
 dissyllabic, 181 
 Directions for writing (he con so 
 
 pants, 1 1 
 Directions to the student, 1 
 Dissyllabic diphthongs, isi 
 Doable consonants, si 
 Doable-length adding Ir, dr, or thr, 
 
 163; position of, 230; vocaliza 
 
 Hon of. 168 
 Doable sized g, ">l 
 Duplicate signs for// and thr, SI ; 
 
 how emploj cd. S'. 1 ' 
 Emphasis, 204 
 Bzplodents, 8 
 Figures, 206 : representation of, 2-16 
 
 Final hook and final vowel. OS 
 
 Pinal /. 133 : Ir, 134; r, 129 
 
 /•'or r hook to straight letters, 95 ; 
 used medially, 96 
 
 Foreign consonants and vowels, 185 
 
 Fountain pens, 222 
 
 /■'/■ and thr, duplicate signs fin-, SI 
 
 French Words and phrases, page 206 
 
 Gold pens. 222 
 
 Grammalogaes, 49 ; phonetically ar- 
 ranged, pagi 92; alphabetically 
 arranged, pagi 94 ; positions, 188; 
 irregular, 190 
 
 // following another consonant, 119 
 
 Half-length curves. 138 
 
 Halving principle, pagi 66 
 
 Here, '/'//< re, and Where, compounds 
 
 Of, '.'111 
 
 Horizontal and half-sized letters, 
 
 position of, 231 
 Initial /. 132 ; r, 126 
 Insertion of vowel, words requiring, 
 
 *-!.-> 1 
 
 Intersected words, 245 
 Irregular double consonants, 84 
 i n I'gular grammalogaes, 190 
 Joined consonants, rules for, 20: 
 final vowels, ir>7 : initial diph- 
 thongs, 155; initial vowel-. 155; 
 VOWel sign for ir and y, 154 
 Junction of half length strokes, 14< 
 
 /. added tO curved letters. 83 
 
 Large circle, medial and final, 5S 
 
 Latin Quotations, pagi 202 
 
 Law Phrases, pagi 170 
 
 Leaves of note hook, method id' 
 turning, 224 
 
 Legal Correspondence, pagi 174 
 
 Liquids, 10 
 
 Logograms, 49 ; halved for past 
 tense, 235 
 
 Longhand writing, 242 
 
 L<uiL r vowels, 30; between conso- 
 nants..",."!: places, 36; sounds of, 31 
 
 Long and short vowels' places com 
 pared, 44 
 
 I ' w ritten upward. 140 
 
 Method of holding the pen, 8 : of 
 practice, 207 : oftnrning leaves of 
 
 note hook, 'J'.M 
 
 A added to straight letters, 93 ; to 
 carves, 94
 
 252 
 
 Nasals, 10 
 
 Nominal consonant, 184 
 
 Note-books, 222 
 
 Note-taking in public, 217 
 
 Of the, 195 
 
 Omission of con and com, 244 
 
 Outlines, size of, 218 
 
 Past tense ending in / or d, 145 ; of 
 verb expressed by logogram, 235 ; 
 of verb written by double-length, 
 167 
 
 Pen, method of holding, 3 
 
 Phonetic spelling, 34 
 
 Phraseogram or logogram employed 
 to express com or am, 200 
 
 Phraseograms, 197; general list of, 
 250 ; position of first word, 199 ; 
 vocalization of, 198 
 
 Phraseography, 225 
 
 PI and Pr, vocalization of, 158 
 
 Places of long vowels, 32 
 
 Pocket inkstand, 222 
 
 Positions of grammalogucs, 188 
 
 Position of words having outlines of 
 their own, 232 
 
 Position, writing in, 227 
 
 Positive and negative words, 213 
 
 Pr and pi mnemonics, 73, 74 
 
 Practical Hints in Legal Work, page 
 176 
 
 Prefix com or am, 169 ; inter, intro, 
 enter, 170; magna, magni, 171 ; 
 s<lf. 172 ; in, 173 
 
 Principle of phrasing, 250 
 
 R hook added to imj, SO 
 
 11 and / hooks to straight letters, 69 ; 
 vocalization of, 75 ; medial and 
 final, 75 ; when generally em- 
 ployed, 77 ; to carves, 79 
 
 Rapid longhand writing, 342 
 
 Rapid writing, secret of, 212 
 
 Relation <>f the consonants, 11 
 
 Reporting contractions, list of, p. I IS 
 
 Reporting Exercises : sermon on the 
 immortality of the sou], pagt 815 ; 
 characteristics of the age, p. 239 ; 
 supposed reply to a requisition, /'. 
 229 ; shorthand writers and re- 
 porters, //. 381 : speech by Daniel 
 Webster, //. 233; reporting as a 
 
 mental exercise, p. 239; chemis- 
 try, p. 248 
 Reporting grammalognes, 234 ; pho 
 
 Helically arranged. pagt 128 [ :>\ 
 
 phabetically arranged, pagi 180 
 
 Reporting witnesses. 239 
 
 Representation <>f figures, 246 
 
 # added to hooked consonants, <nii ; 
 
 to pr Series, H7 
 
 5 and z, additional sign for, 51 
 
 8 between two straight lines, 53 ; 
 joined to straight strokes, 51 ; to 
 curves, 52 : to /, and /'hooks, 99 
 
 St loop, 59 ; medial, 61 ; after -lion 
 hook, 150 ; prefixed xopr series, 91 
 
 St and Str loops combined with // 
 hook, 103 
 
 Str loop, 62; s added, 63 
 
 Stv circle, 67 ; prefixed to pr series, 
 92 
 
 Secret of rapid writing, 212 
 
 Shorthand Teachers, 258 
 
 Short vowels, 37 ; representation of, 
 38 ; between two consonants, 42 
 
 Significant marks, 236 
 
 Signs of approbation and dissent, 
 etc., 241 
 
 Similar words, list of, page 209 
 
 Single and double consonants, table 
 of, page 72 
 
 Size of the consonants, 12 ; of out- 
 lines, 218 
 
 Speed practice, 212 
 
 Stops, etc., 202 
 
 Stroke s or .:. when used, 56 
 
 7' or d added by halving, 135, 143 
 
 Table of consonants, page A ; single 
 and double consonants, page 72. 
 
 The, tick, 194. 
 
 Theological phrases, page 193 
 
 There or their, expression of by 
 doubling, 201 
 
 Tick the, 194 
 
 Time required to learn Phonogra- 
 phy, 2 
 
 Timi hook, 104 ; following a curve, 
 105 ; after a straight letter, inti; 
 after /. it, or ./, 107 ; on opposite 
 side to vowel, 108 ; used medially, 
 110 ; following circle 8 or ns, 111 
 
 Transcription, 342 
 
 Typewriting manuals, 256 
 
 Typewri ting and shorthand, 260 
 
 Vocalization of double length. 168 I 
 of half sized consonants, 186 ; of 
 words containing 6 or z, 55 
 
 Vowels to be inserted, 233 
 
 Vowels, joined final, 157; joined 
 inii ial, 155 
 
 ir and i/ diphthongs, 152 
 
 Words 'containing s or z, vocaliza- 
 tion of. 55; ending in netiim, 
 ■ection, omission of /', pafft 146 : 
 ending in tire, omission of / and /', 
 piu/i 115: requiring insertion of 
 
 vowel, 251 
 Writing by sound, 84; in position, 
 
 Writing materials, 221 
 
 Writing on the knee, 223
 
 ISAAC PITMAN & SONS' 
 CATALOGUE 
 
 OF 
 
 Shorthand and Educational 
 Works and Supplies. 
 
 THIS SYSTEM HAS BEEN ADOPTED BY THE 
 
 BOARD OF EDUCATION OF THE 
 
 FOLLOWING CITIES: 
 
 NEW YORK CITY ; ST. LOUIS, MO.; TRENTON, N. J.r 
 
 LOWELL, MASS.; LYNN, MASS.; 
 
 MARSHALLTOWN, lA., 
 
 ETC., ETC. 
 
 NEW YORK : 
 
 ISAAC PITMAN & SONS, 
 
 THE PHONOGRAPHIC DEPOT. 
 33 Union Square.
 
 2 
 
 Publishers' Notes and Comments. 
 
 HOW TO GET OUR BOOKS: 
 
 Booksellers who do not have them in stock will procure them to 
 order at the regular price. In giving your orders, specify distinctly 
 that you want the editions bearing the imprint of Isaac Pitman & 
 Sons on the title page, as the publishers, and that all other editions 
 will be refused. This is especially important in regard to the text- 
 books, if you wish for the latest and revised editions. Or, 
 You May Order Direct. The recently improved facilities for 
 sending books by mail or express are such, that il is almost as easy 
 to get a book from New York as to buy it at your own home. Then 
 you have the additional advantage of always receiving the latest 
 editions and a perfect copy. The express companies now take 
 books at the same rates as they would cost by mail : and as they 
 give a receipt safe delivery is insured. All' orders must be accom- 
 panied by a remittance. Goods G, O. D. if one-fourth of price is 
 sent with order. 
 HOW TO SEND MONEY BY MAIL: 
 
 Money may be sent by Post-office Money Order, Express Money 
 Order, Postal Note, Draft on a New York Bank, Registered Letter, or 
 Postage Stamps (of any denomination). Make remittances payable 
 to Isaac Pitman >fc Sons, New York. All postmasters are required 
 to register letters ou application. 
 
 BOOKS AS PRESENTS: 
 
 When you wish to make a present of a book (and there are many 
 excellently adapted for that purpose in this catalogue), enclose a 
 
 card in your letter on which is written " Presented to by " 
 
 We will place this in the book and send it to such address as you 
 
 may indicate. 
 
 TEACHERS AND THE TRADE 
 
 Are supplied at a very liberal discount. Pates on application. 
 TEACHERS OF Shorthand, who desire to keep Up with the progress 
 of the Art, and give their pupils the advantages to be derived from 
 the latest Improvements and best arranged instruction books and 
 aids, should scud to Isaac Pitman & Sons for sample copies, at 
 teachers' reduced rules. Applications may lie written in Phonog- 
 raphy, All Teachers are Invited to send their names and 
 addresses to us for registration. We have already hundreds of 
 names of those now teaching the system in public and private 
 
 schools, and wish to make the list Still more complete, It is to the 
 
 mutual advantage of teachers and ourselves to be known to each 
 other. Teachers should keep us Informed of their preseul address, 
 and when at liberty for positions. Special Certificates granted to 
 teachers of phonography. Full particulars on application. 
 * .„* Any of the winks mentioned In this Catalogue will be sent securely 
 packed and posl paid to any pari of the United States, Canada, or 
 Mexico, on receipt of price i>\ the Publishers. 
 
 ■ t * For particulars Of New Works Issued since this Catalogue, see the 
 " Phonetic Journal," published weekly. 
 
 NEW YORK : 
 ISAAC PITMAN & SONS, the Phonographic Depot, 
 
 33 UNION SQUARE. 
 Canada : The Copp, Clark Co., Limited, Toronto. 
 
 Boston : W. E. Hickox, Pierce Building.
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC WORKS. 
 
 By ISAAC PITMAN 
 
 (The Inventor of Phonography). 
 
 ONE ADVANTAGE in taking np the [saac Pitman system is. that 
 the text-books are issued in such a variety of forms and bindings, 
 that intending students and others are enabled to select that which best 
 suits their fancy and pocket. 
 
 A complete expositi f the system, in one handy-sized volume, will 
 
 be found iii •• Isaac Pitman's ( lomplete Phonographic Instructor," which 
 presents the entire system in a clear and concise manner, from the lirst 
 principles to the reporting style. Price $1.50. For particulars, see 
 below. The "Instructor is also published in two parts, and those 
 wishing to obtain the system in a less expensive form are recommended 
 to obtain Part [., or, " The New Manual of Phonography," price (inc. 
 
 *** Isaac. Pitman & Sous will be pleased t<> recommend competent 
 shorthand teachers, ami schools. All advice is freely given, and corre- 
 spondence solicited. 
 
 ISAAC PITMAN'S COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHIC 
 INSTRUCTOR. A New and Complete Exposition of 
 
 Isaac Pitman's System of Phonography or Phonetic Shorthand. 
 Containing instruction in both the Corresponding and Reporting 
 Styles, with copious lists of Phrases and Exercises, Business Let- 
 ters, and Specimens of Legal Forms. The plan of the" Instructor" 
 makes it equal lv acceptable for se^f-tutlion and for class-use. 
 A chapter entitled " Practical Hint- in* Legal Work," from the pen 
 of Mr. \V. L. Mason, Principal of the Metropolitan School of Isaac 
 Pitman Shorthand. 95 Fifth Avenue, New York, is a prominent 
 feature of the book. This presentation of Phonography, embody- 
 ing, as it does, the accumulatt d < xpi rii nee ofovt r fifty //- ars, is tin; 
 MOST I lOMPLBTE and PERFECT Shorthand Text -book that has K\ en 
 Be] n Issued. The chosen text-book for the public schools of New 
 York. Elegantly bound in cloth, gilt lettered, 250 pages. 
 
 Price, SI -50 
 Isaac Pitman's Complete Phonographic Instructor, Part 
 I., or, The New Manual of Phonography. Contain- 
 ing a complete exposition of the system from its simplest principles 
 to the fid I or Corresponding style, in pages, stiff cover. 
 
 Price, 60 cents 
 
 Isaac Pitman's Complete Phonographic Instructor, Part 
 II., or, The New Phonographic Reporter. Contain- 
 ing the Abbreviated or Reporting Style of Phonography. 137 pages, 
 
 Stiff cover Price. ',:> cents 
 
 "The -complete Phonographic Instructor' gives a complete ex- 
 position of Phonography, explaining every feature in the clearest 
 manner, and presents the accumulated experience of the most ex- 
 pert teachers and writers of the art. It is undoubtedly one of the 
 most perfect shorthand text books that has ever been issued." 
 
 ./ tut mil qf Education, Boston. 
 KEY to " Isaac Pitman's Complete Phonographic In- 
 structor." Contains a Key to till the Exercises, and 
 nl<o furnishes Answers to the Review Questions. Uniform with 
 the Instructor, cloth Price, 50 cents
 
 4 
 
 The Phonographic Teacher. A Guide to a Practical 
 
 Acquaintance with the Art of Phonography or Phonetic Short- 
 hand, containing a Series of Progressive Lessons. Eacli principle 
 is clearly and fully explained, and the knowledge learned is applied 
 in the shorthand and type exercises, following each principle. 
 This work has recently been entirely revised and remodel;' ' nil 
 the whole re-set in bold, clear type. Over one million-anl ..-naif 
 copies of this work have been sold, which fact sufficiently attests 
 with what ease Phonography can be learned. 48 pages," in stiff 
 paper covers Price, 16 cents 
 
 Key to the Phonographic Teacher. Of < value to 
 
 the private student ,, r^ cents 
 
 Progressive Studies in Phonography. A simple and 
 
 extended exposition of the Art of Phonetic Shorthand, as set forth 
 in the '•Phonographic Teacher," the "Manual of Phonography," 
 and the ''Reporter;" intended as a supplementary book to these 
 three, and for the use, principally, of students who are teaching 
 themselves Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 The "Fono" Headline Shorthand Copy Books, Nos. 1, 
 2, and 3, containing a series of beautifully engraved graduated 
 copies, to be written in Shorthand, in conjunction with the study 
 of the " Phonographic Teacher." Size 8*4 by t%. 
 
 Price, each, 10 cents 
 
 "The great surprise that strikes one on first seeing these copy 
 books is, that such an excellent idea has not been utilized before. 
 Teachers of large classes and schools should be thankful to Mr. 
 Pitman for having come to their rescue with so valuable a series of 
 books." — Frank Harrison's Shorthand Magazine. 
 
 The Phonographic Exercise Book. Made of the best 
 
 quality paper, in single or double lines, as ordered. 
 
 Price, 10 cents ; post price, 14 cents 
 
 Exercises in Phonography. A series of graduated sen- 
 
 tence exercises, illustrating the system as developed in the "Pho- 
 nographic Teacher." Price, 2 cents ; post-paid, 8 cents 
 
 These Exercises on cards (It!) in wrapper for class-use. Price, 10 cents 
 
 iEsop's Fables. In the Learner's Style. A valuable 
 reading book in words of one syllable, to be used in conjunction 
 with the " Phonographic Teacher." Price, rC cents 
 
 Easy Readings. In the Learner's Style of Shorthand, 
 with Key at the end of the book Price, IScents 
 
 A Compend of Phonography. Containing the Alpliabet, 
 
 Grammalogues, and principal Rules for Writing. 200th thousand. 
 
 Price, 2 cents j post paid, Scents 
 
 A Manual of Phonography. (800th thousand.) Contain- 
 ing a complete Exposition Of the system, With numerous engraved 
 shorthand examples Interspersed with the text, and exercises In 
 reading and writing, Many pages of engraved reading matter are 
 
 included in the book. IK7 pages.. . Price, 10 cenls ; cloth, 50 Cents 
 
 "The [saac Pitman 'Phonographic Teacher' and 'Manual of 
 Phonography' have been added to the list of text books adopted 
 i>v tin- New York Board of Education, for use in the evening high 
 
 BChOOls, Teachers will do well to examine these works seeing lln ir 
 
 moderate price— quite an important point ami the admirable way
 
 5 
 
 In which they are arranged. Many teachers have already made a 
 change from the high-priced and complicated text-books to the 
 above." .V. Y. School Journal. 
 
 "States In a clear and comprehensive manner the principles ol 
 
 an excellent system of shorthand. The exercises are plentiful and 
 
 ll adapted for practical application of the knowledge previously 
 
 g Lhered. The improvements have kept up with the needs of the 
 
 time, ami this text-book lias many fine qualities to recommend it." 
 
 — Public Opinion. Washington and New York. 
 
 " itelligent person can learn shorthand from this book 
 
 will' er instruction." — Teacher's World, New York. 
 
 " Teacl. and " Manual." In 1 vol., roan, gilt edges. 
 
 Price, 80 cents 
 
 Key to Exercises in Manual of Phonography. 
 
 Price, "Hicents 
 
 The " Fono " Headline Shorthand Copy Books. Nos. 4, 
 
 5, and 6. Graduated exercises on " Manual. "...Price, each, 10 cents 
 
 The Phonographic Reader. A course of Reading Exer- 
 cises in Phonography, with a Key in ordinary type. . ..Price, IS cents 
 
 Questions on the Manual of Phonography. A series of 
 questions on the •• Manual." Price, 10 cents 
 
 The Phonographic Reporter; or, Reporter's Companion. 
 An adaptation of Phonography to Verbatim Reporting for profes- 
 sional reporters and others who desire to become such. 112 pages. 
 
 Trice, CO cents ; cloth, 75 cents 
 
 Reporting Exercises. Intended as a Companion to the 
 "Phonographic Reporter," containing exercises mi all the rules 
 and contracted words in this hook Price. T5-ceuts 
 
 Key to the "Reporting Exercises," in winch all the Ex- 
 ercises are presented in Shorthand, in Reporting style. 
 
 Price. ; HO cents ; cloth, 40 cents 
 
 The Acquisition of Speed in Phonography. By E. A. 
 Cope, lti pages Price, 2 cents ; post-paid. .Scents 
 
 The Grammalogues and Contractions of Pitman's " Pho- 
 nographic Reporter," for use in classes Price, 5 cen is 
 
 The Phonographic Phrase Book. (New and enlarged 
 edition). Containing above two thousand useful phrases in Pho- 
 nography, with a Key In the ordinary type, and an exercise occu- 
 pying 43 pages, containing all the phrases as they occur in the 
 book Price, 35 cents ; clot h, SO cents 
 
 Phonography : The Manual, Reporter and Phrase Book, 
 
 in one volume Price, cloth, $ 1 .50 
 
 A Phonographic Dictionary of the English Language. 
 Containing the Shorthand forms for 55,000 words, and 5.000 
 proper names; also blank pages fur additional words. The 
 most comprehensive Shorthand Dictionary published. sixth 
 edition. 3iio pages crown s\ o, handsome cloth binding, specimen 
 
 pages on application Price, $lr85 i.J* 
 
 "Library Edition," half roan, beveled board.-, lt i . t . colored edges. j 
 
 Price. jlrfW h r
 
 The Reporter's Assistant. (New edition.) A Key to the 
 
 Reading of the Reporting Style of Phonography. The " Reporter's 
 Assistant" is the fruit of much labor. All the words in the dic- 
 tionary, not exceeding three consonants, were written in Short- 
 hand, and, from this extensive list of outlines has been drawn all 
 words that contain the same outline, and they have been classified 
 according to their forms Price, 35 cents; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Technical Reporting. Comprising Phonographic Abbre- 
 viations for words and phrases commonly met with in reporting 
 Legal, Medical, Scientific and other Technical Subjects. By T. A. 
 Reed. 60 pages Price, 40 cents; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Business Correspondence in Shorthand, No. 1. Contain- 
 ing actual business letters as dictated to stenographers in American 
 business offices. The following subjects are treated : Railroad, 
 Law, Banking, Stocks, etc., etc. The work is Keyed in ordinary 
 type, and the matter counted off into sections for speed-testing in 
 either shorthand or typewriting. Of value to writers of any system 
 and indispensable in the class room and business college. 48 pages 
 in attractive cover Price, 30 cents 
 
 "An excellent work. I like it very much indeed, and have felt 
 the want of such a book for a long time." — Miss Mary E. Bbal, 
 Teacher of Isaac Pitman's Shorthand in the Bangor (Me.) Business 
 College. 
 
 " Our shorthand teachers pronounce it excellent."— J. G. Bohmek, 
 Jones Commercial College, St. Louis, Mo. 
 
 Business Correspondence in Shorthand, No. 2. Similar 
 
 in character to above, but different letters. 40 pages in cover. 
 
 Price, SS-cents 
 
 Phonography in the Office. A Complete Shorthand 
 Clerk's Guide. A book for everyone who desires to make use of 
 Shorthand in the Office. By A. Kingston. 130 pages, fcp 8vo. 
 
 Price, 40 cents; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Graduated Dictation Books, for acquiring Speed in 
 Shorthand and Typewriting. Adapted to any system. The reading 
 matter is divided on a new and improved plan. Divided for speeds 
 of 50, 80, 100 and ItiO words per minute. 1" pages, crown 8vo. No. 
 1.— Political Speeches. No. 2.--Sermons Price, each, 10 cents 
 
 Key, in Shorthand, to the Graduated Dictation Book. 
 
 Nos. 1 and S Price, each, 20 cents 
 
 The Shorthand Commercial Letter Writer. A Guide to 
 
 Commercial Correspondence in the Reporting Style of Phonography; 
 
 presents specimens of the kind of correspondence used in business. 
 
 so that tlir Student can train himself in the art of writing business 
 
 let t ns from die! at ion. M pages IV p. . Price, 86 cents; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Key to the Shorthand Commercial Letter Writer. 
 Containing all the letters of the "Shorthand Commercial Letter 
 Writer" in ordinary type Price, 20 cents; cloth, 86 nuts 
 
 The Shorthand Commercial Letter Writer and Key. 
 [none volume Cloth, price, 60 cents 
 
 Office Work in Shorthand. Being Specimens of Miscel- 
 laneous Work commonly dictated to shorthand clerks, in Reporting 
 
 Style, (to pages Price, 35 cents; cloth, 50 cents
 
 7 
 
 Key to Office Work in Shorthand. Containing all the 
 Specimens, Documents, etc.. of "Office Work in Shorthand," in 
 ordinary type Price, 20 cents; cloth, 35 cents 
 
 Office Work in Shorthand and Key. In one volume. 
 
 Cloth, price, 60 cents 
 
 The Phonographic Railway Phrase Book. An adapta- 
 tion of Phonography to the Requirements of Railway Business and 
 Correspondence.. — Price, K cents 
 
 The Phonographic Legal Phrase Book. An adaptation 
 of Phonography to the Requirements of Legal Business and Corres- 
 pondence Price, rScents 
 
 List of the Phonetic Society for the current year. ^Pub- 
 lished end of March Price, 5 cents 
 
 ADAPTATIONS OF ISAAC PITMAN'S PHO- 
 NOGRAPHY TO FOREIGN LANGUAGES. 
 
 French Phonography. An adaptation of Phonography to 
 
 the French language. By T. A. Reed Price, 35 cents 
 
 f German Phonography. An adaptation of Phonography 
 
 to the German language Cloth, price, $1.25 
 
 f Spanish Phonography. An adaptation of Phonography 
 
 to the Spanish language. In the press. Particulars hereafter. 
 fManuale di Fonografia Italiana. An adaptation of 
 
 Phonography to the Italian language. By Giuseppe ETrancini. 
 
 Price, 50 cents 
 
 f Dutch Phonography. An adaptation of Phonography 
 to the Dutch language. By P. DeHaan Price, $1.00 
 
 f Phonographia Sef Llaw Fer yn ol Trefn Mr. Isaac 
 Pitman. An adaptation of Phonography to the Welsh language. 
 
 By Rev. R. ll. Morgan, M.A Price, 50 cents 
 
 SHORTHAND READING BOOKS. 
 (Printed in Phonography from engraved metal characters.) 
 
 There is to better way to Secure speed and accuracy in writing, 
 that bj the constant reading of well-engraved shorthand. One advan- 
 tage of Studying the Isaac Pitman system and one which cannot well 
 be over estimated— is, that the Shorthand literature in that system is far 
 in excess of all other systems combined. 
 
 The Journal of Education, Boston, remarks: "The Isaac Pitman 
 system is the only one having a Shorthand literature of its own, from 
 n li'cli students quickly and easily learn the • best forms.' " 
 
 Frank Harrison? s Shorthand Magazim says: "It must he admitted 
 
 on every hand that the wealth of literature in the Isaac Pitman system 
 Becuresfor its students and writers an immense benefit, not available in 
 any other system." 
 
 The Penman's Art Journal says: "Wearewell aware of the advan- 
 tages of the Isaac Pitman system on account of its complete literature."
 
 8 
 
 IN THE CORRESPONDING STYLE. 
 
 Extracts No. 1. Containing the following Tales: "Ten 
 Pounds, 1 ' '-The First Offence," and "The Broken Chess Pawn." 
 
 Price, T§ cents 
 Extracts No. 2. Containing " That Which Money Cannot 
 Buy," "The Deaf Musician," "How to Prosper in Business," 
 "Woman: her Position and Power," and "Kindness." 
 
 Price, TScents 
 
 Extracts No. 3. Containing " Being and Seeming,' My 
 
 Donkey," and " A Parish Clerk's Tale " Price, IS cents 
 
 'ym 
 
 The Book of Psalms Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 The Narrative of the Pilgrim's Progress. 
 
 Price, 40 cents ; cloth, 60 cents 
 Self-Culture. By Prof. Blackie. .Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Gulliver's Voyage to Lilliput. By Dean Swift. 
 
 Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Select Poetry Price, "K> cents 
 
 Tales and Sketches. By Washington Irving. v With 
 
 printed Key at foot of each page Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Gleanings from Popular Authors. With a Key at the 
 
 foot of each page. 175 pages Price, 40 cents ; cloth. 50 cents 
 
 "This work is another valuable addition to the varied literature 
 of this system."— Penman's Art Journal. 
 
 The Vicar of Wakefield. Illustrated. 280 pages. 
 
 Price, 50 cents ; cloth, 00 cents 
 
 "A more interesting and instructive work in Phonography can 
 hardly be imagined." Evening Telegram. New York. 
 
 "An excellent reading book to familiarize oneself with the forms 
 and characters." — Cincinnati Times-Star. 
 
 "Is of convenient size, finely engraved, well printed, and the 
 illustrations, which are numerous, add to the general attractiveness 
 of the work. A book that the students of the Isaac Pi I man system 
 should be proud of." — The Office, New York. 
 
 The Shorthand Birthday Book of Poetical Selections. 
 Contains selection- from Horace to poete of the present day. Each 
 opening bason the left page selections for three days, and on the 
 right page blanks for the insertion of names. The Phonography is 
 printed from shorthand specially engraved for the work, and the 
 cover has o floral design printed in gold and colors. Eminently 
 adapted as a gift booh from teacher to pupil. A unique book. 
 
 I'i ice, 75 cents 
 
 "A beautiful present to a friend who writes Shorthand. The 
 
 selections are in excellent taste and the Shorthand rendering is 
 
 exquisitely done." — The Stenographer. 
 •■ A particularly dainty little volume, Altogether unique." 
 
 —Penman's Art Journal. 
 
 IN THE REPORTING STYLE. 
 
 Selections No. 1. Containing "Character of Washington," 
 "Speech of George Canning at Plymouth," "The Irish church," 
 "Calvin. Galileo, and Shakspeare." etc., » ill' printed Key. 
 
 Price, t6 cents
 
 9 
 
 Selections No. 2. Containing "Address of the Earl of 
 Derby on being installed Lord Rector of the University of Edin- 
 burgh," " The Civilizing Influence < >f Music." etc. . ..Price, I&cents 
 
 Selections No. 3. Containing " Prof. Max Miiller on^Na 
 tional Education," •'Sermon by Rev. H. B. Browning, M.A ," 
 "The Eastern Question," etc Price, & cents 
 
 Leaves from the Note-Book of Thomas Allen Reed, with 
 printed Key at the foot of each pare, in two volumes, fep. 8vo. 
 Vol. I. contains a portrait of Mr. Reed. Each volume is complete in 
 itself Price, eacb vol., 50 cents ; cloth. GO cents 
 
 Two Trips to India. By T. A. Reed. 64 pages. Price, 35 cents 
 
 The Legend of Sleepy Hollow. By Washington Irving, 
 with printed Key at the foot of each page Price fs cents 
 
 yd 
 
 The Bible in Shorthand. Containing the old and New Tes- 
 tament-, large 8vo. (8J4 in *. by 5% ins.). Price, cloth, beveled 
 boards, red edges, $3 . roan, gilt edges, $3.50; morocco, gilt edges, 
 g4 50. specimen page on application. 
 
 " Is very attractive; in style and is published at a reasonable price. 
 Despite the delicacy of the characters, every line, point or dash is 
 as clear as print. Quite a curiosity." — N. Y. Recorder. 
 
 " There is not a defective page in the volume, and it is so plainly 
 written that a writer of any of the Pitmanic systems may read it 
 with ease."— National S/> tugrapht r. 
 
 Representative British Orations. With Introductions by 
 Charles Kendall Adams. Printed in an Easy Reporting Style of 
 Phonography, with Key at the fool of each page. 
 
 Vol. I., 329 pages, fcp. Svo . contains speeches by Sir J. Eliot, 
 John Pym, Lord Chatham, Lord Mansfield, and Edmund Burke. 
 
 Price, 60 cents ; cloth, 7.") cents 
 
 Vol. II. contains speech,- by William Pitt, Charles James Fox 
 
 and Lord Erskine Price, 60 cents ; cloth, 75 cents 
 
 The Reporter's Reader. A Series of Beading Books in the 
 Reporting Style, with a Key at the fool of each page. Each num- 
 ber, of which ten are now published, contains 32 pages in a wrapper. 
 
 Price, 15 cents each 
 No. 1 — Ruth and Naomi ; a Sermon by the Rev, Dr. Lyman Abbott. 
 
 Wealth and Poverty ; a Sermon by the Rev. Alfred Rowland, 
 
 L.L.B., P.. A. 
 No. 2— Punishment of Death; Rt. Bon. John Bright. How I Got 
 
 Married Without " Popping the Question." 
 No. 3— Mr. Gladstone on Mental Culture. Lord Palmerston and the 
 
 Reporters. Looks. 
 No. 4 — Tne House of Lords; by Lord Salisbury. The Rejected Bribe. 
 No. 5 — On Food; a Lecture by Prof. Henry E. Armstrong, Ph.D., 
 
 Sec. C.S. 
 No. 6— Friendship ; a Sermon by Geo. Dawson, M A. The Valley of 
 
 the Shadow of Death ; Forgiveness Ol Sili- . Sermons by the 
 
 Rev. II. P. Browning, M.A. 
 No. 7— The Commercial Value of Idea- and Physical Facts; an Ad 
 
 dres- by Chauncey Smith, Esq. The study of Literature; 
 
 an Address by theRt. Hon. John Morley, M.P. 
 No. 8— Law Reports : Bcresford Hope v. Lady Sandhurst (Election 
 
 Law); Maiton b. Gorrill (Election Law); Attorney-General V. 
 
 Mayor, etc.. of Croydon (Free Libraries' Acts); In re P.rock- 
 
 lebank (Bankruptcy >.
 
 10 
 
 No. 9 — Home Rule : Speech by Mr. John Morley. Lord Derby on 
 
 Evening Schools. 
 No. 10— The Royal Academy Banquet. 
 
 The New Testament, in an Easy Reporting Style of Pho- 
 nography. 368 pages. Size of page, 634 ins. by 4 ins. Price, roan, 
 red edges, $1.50 ; Turkey Morocco, gilt edges, $2.00. 
 
 The Book of Common Prayer, in an Easy Reporting Style 
 of Phonography. 296 pages. Size of page, 6J4 ins. by 4 ins. Price, 
 roan, red edges", SI. 50: Turkey morocco, gilt edges, $2.00. Speci- 
 men page on applicatton. 
 
 The Church Services (entire), in an Easy Reporting Style 
 of Phonography. 960 pages Roan, price. $3.00 ; morocco, $4.00 
 
 NATIONAL PHONOGRAPHIC LIBRARY. 
 
 (Reporting Style, freely vocalized). 
 
 The Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin. 160 pages. 
 
 Price, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 Thankful Blossom. By Bret Harte. 
 
 Price, paper, 35 cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 A Christmas Carol. By Charles Dickens. 
 
 Price, 35 cents ; cloth. 50centB 
 
 The Pickwick Papers. By Charles Dickens. In two vols., 
 
 fcp. 8vo, cloth Price, $1.00 each 
 
 Tom Brown's Schooldays. 288 pages. 
 
 Price, 60 rents ; cloth, 75 cents 
 " The practice which ran lie secured through reading this volume 
 should be <>f the greatest value to t hose wishing to master the sys- 
 tem." Journal of Education, Boston. 
 
 Hamlet, in the Easy Reporting Style, freely vocalized. 
 112 pages, fcp. 8vo Price, 85 cents ; cloth, B0 cents 
 
 The Merchant of Venice, in the Easy Reporting Style. 
 freely vocalized. 80 pages, fcp 8vo. In schools and colleges these 
 plays w ill prove a very useful aid in the shorthand studies. 
 
 Price, 85 cents ; cloth, 5llrents 
 
 Selections from American Authors. Containing selections 
 from Mark Twain. E. A. Poe, R. II Dana, Mas Adeler, Nathaniel 
 Hawthorne, I'.ret I larte. .lames M . Bailey, R. Waldo Kmerson. P. T. 
 Itanium, II. D. Thoreau, -). Penimore Cooper, Artemus Ward, O. 
 \\ Holmes, the author Of "A Had Hoy's Diary," ami Col. R. G. 
 [ngersoll, This unique volume forms excellent reading practice 
 in conjunction with the text-book and should be on every student 1 * 
 
 and teacher's de-k Pi Ice, 35 rents ; cloth, 5(1 rents 
 
 " A most beautiful and inviting specimen of Isaac Pitman's Pho- 
 nography, as well as a most excellent manual of American litera- 
 ture."— A. D. 'WILT, Prin. Miami ( 'mil. Coll., Dayton, O. 
 
 THE PHONETIC JOURNAL. 
 
 Established 1812, edited by the inventor of Phonography, 21 pages. 
 Specimen copy free. < lirculatlon 24,000 weekly. Bach issue con- 
 tains lOto 12 columns of the Isaac Pitman Engraved Shorthand, in 
 the Learner's, Corresponding, and Reporting styles, with Key;
 
 11 
 
 occasional pages of Fac-simile Notes of rapid writing, and other 
 matter of ureal interest to writers of all systems; typewriting 
 column, special column " American Notes and News," etc., etc. 
 No phonographer can afford to be without it. Terms of subscrip- 
 tion, payable in advance : — 
 
 12 months, weekly issues $1 GO 
 
 6 ■ " 80 
 
 8 " " 50 
 
 Special rates to teachers and clubs. 
 
 tBound volumes from 1848 to 1875 are out of print. Volumes from 
 1870 to present date, $2.00 each, post free. Handsome covers for 
 binding the present or past yearly volumes 50 cents each 
 
 Cloth Reading Cases 50 cents each 
 
 The Plwnographic World, the leading shorthand periodical in 
 America, says: "The shorthand student or young writer is not 
 safe when he leaves the schoolroom and the text-book. He should, 
 by all means, subscribe to the journal published in the direct in- 
 terests of his system, and he should continue to subscribe until by 
 careful comparison, every OV&im he makes, agrees exactly with that 
 laid down by his author. Every student and young writer of Isaac 
 l'ii man's Phonography should subscribe for the Phonetic Journal." 
 
 Frank Harrison's Shorthand Magazine (Boston) remarks: "Every 
 one should subscribe for the Phom /<<■ Journal, It has a circulation 
 of 24.000 copies weekly, and contains much to interest all stenog- 
 rapher-." 
 
 PITMAN'S SHORTHAND WEEKLY. 
 
 Twelve pages, crown Ito. same size as the Phonetic Journal. Speci- 
 men copy free. The Wnkly is beautifully printed in the Re- 
 porting, Corresponding, and Learner's Styles of the Isaac Pitman 
 Phonography, profusely illustrated, and printed on good toned 
 paper. The contents consist ol stories and tales, serial and com- 
 plete ; interesting extracts; amusing paragraphs; phonographic 
 jokes and anecdote-. It aims at providing reading practice in 
 Phonography of a light, interesting, entertaining and amusing char- 
 acter for every phonographer. Terms of subscription same as the 
 Phonetic Journal. Half yearly volumes containing 250 pages of 
 beautifully printed shorthand, profusely illustrated by the best, 
 artists, and elegantly bound in cloth, gilt, pictorial cover, t Vols. I 
 
 to V now ready Price, each $1.25 
 
 Handsome covers for binding the present or past, volumes. 
 
 Price, 5U cent- each 
 
 f Carte de Visite of Mr. Isaac Pitman. 
 
 Price, 15 cents ; Cabinet, 30 cents 
 
 f Permanent Woodburytype Photograph of Mr. Isaac 
 Pitman, Inventor of Phonography. 10x12 ins. 
 
 Price, post -paid. 10 rents 
 
 | Permanent Woodburytype Cabinet Photograph of 
 Mr. T. A. Ueed Price, 80 cents 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC STATIONERY AND 
 SUPPLIES. 
 
 Lead Pencils. The ordinary pencil is not suitable for 
 Shorthand writing any more than for artists 1 work. These pencils 
 are specially manufactured of the linest grade of black lead, and 
 every pencil' bears the name of " Isaac Pitman & Sons." and without 
 which none are genuine. Made in two qualities.
 
 12 
 
 No. 1.— Per dozen, 50 cents ; per half gross, $2.50 ; per gross, $4.50. 
 
 Sample of six, post-paid, 25 cents ; rhree, 15 cents. 
 No. 2.— Per dozen, $1.00; per half gross, $5.00; per gross, $0.00. 
 
 Sample of six, post-paid, 50 cents : three, 30 cents. 
 
 "The pencils are all and more than you claim for them: in fact, 
 they are the best we have ever used." — The Birdett Business 
 College, Boston, Mass. 
 
 " I always use the Isaac Pitman pencil, and prefer it to any other 
 — and I have tried many."— W. W. Kunton, Official Court Reporter, 
 Corning, Iowa. 
 
 Steel Pens. Isaac Pitman & Sons' Steel Pens have a world- 
 wide reputation for their excellence of finish, durability, and 
 uniformity. Every pen bears the name of Isaac Pitman & Sons. 
 
 The Shorthand Pen Per box of 12 dozen, 75 cents 
 
 The Reporting Pen J4 gross in box, 50 cents 
 
 The Reservoir Pen J4 gross in box, 50 cents 
 
 The Phonographic Pen 2 dozen in box, 35 cents 
 
 Sample dozen, assorted, post-paid, 15 cents. 
 
 Reporters' Note-Books. Made of superior quality paper 
 and suitable for pen or pencil. No. 5 Note Book is used in the < 'di- 
 ces of the Manhattan Railway Co., New York, and other large cor- 
 porations. 
 
 No. 1. 80 pages, 4 xfiU;, red lines 5 cents ; post-paid, 8 cents 
 
 No. 3. 200 pages, 4^x7^4, blue lines.. 12 cents ; post-paid, 18 cents 
 No. 5. 200 pages, 5x8, blue lines, ruled single or double, elastic. 
 
 bound 20 cents ; post paid, 25 cents 
 
 Note Books should be ordered in quantities to warrant sending 
 by express and thus savin- extravagant postage required on this 
 class of matter. Wholesale rates on application. Neat cloth covers 
 for holding Nos. 1 and 3 and forminga knee-rest. Price, SO cents; 
 post paid. 2") cents. Ditto, No. 5, price, SOcents; post-paid, 85 cents. 
 "We use your notebooks entirely in our school, and. in spile of 
 the heavy transportation fees, prefer them to any other make.' 1 
 The Din -tan Si hool of Shorthand, New < Orleans, La. 
 
 r.\ far the besl reporting l ks we have seen, our scholars 
 
 will "us t . mi other. " — F. R. RUSCOE, College of Commerce. 
 Norwalk, Conn. 
 
 Reporting Paper, blue lines, for pen or pencil. 
 
 Per quire, 10 cents; post -tree, it cents. Five quires, 50 cents: 
 
 post-free. 60 cents. 
 
 Reporting Covers, to bold <>i r more quires of reporting 
 
 paper, which call be removed When UBed. These covers can be 
 
 used for an indefinite time. 
 
 Cloth, 20 cents; solid leather, 60 cents; solid morocco, leather 
 lined, $1 00. 
 Phonographic Writing Paper, ruled blue, packet of live 
 quires 85 cents; post-paid, 40 cents 
 
 The " Fono " Stationery Box, equally suitable for short- 
 hand and ordinary correspondence, containing 25 envelopes and 25 
 -hiei- or paper, specially ruled for shorthand, with portrait of Mr. 
 Isaac Pitman, and ornamental design ; Ruperior cream wove paper. 
 
 Price, 50 cents ; post-paid, (ill cents
 
 13 
 
 Typewriting Paper. List and samples on application. 
 
 Fountain Pens. The Waterman " Ideal " is the most 
 perfect fountain pen made, and is unequalled for shorthand or 
 longhand writing. The gold pens arc of the finest quality, and arc 
 warranted for live years. A pen selected and not found suitable 
 will be exchanged Full descriptive catalogue on application. In 
 ordering, mention whether coarse, medium, or fine nib is required. 
 
 No. 2, 88.50; No. 4, $4.00 
 Bent carefully packed and post-paid on receipt of amount. 
 
 " Fono " Pencil Case and Fountain Pen Holder. De- 
 signed to supply a demand for a cheap and reliable holder for 
 pencils and fountain pens. Made of the very best roan, leather 
 lined. The case folds up, and occupies less space than an ordinary 
 pocket-book, aud is secured by a nickel-plated clasp. 
 
 Price. ;")0 cents ; post-paid, CO cents 
 Price with six of our celebrated Reporting Pencils. 
 
 7."> cents: post-paid, 85 cents 
 
 "Fono" Pencil Sharpener. A perfect peucil sharpener, 
 made of solid brass, with Steel cutter, and should he in the posses- 
 sion of every stenographer Price, 35 cents 
 
 Reporter's Folding Inkstand for the pocket, morocco 
 
 covered, wil h pen rest. 
 
 Price, 50c ; post-paid, 55c ; large size, 75c ; post-paid, 85c 
 The "Safety " Patent Inkstand, nickel-plated throughout, 
 
 with pen rest Price, 75 cents ; post-paid, 85 cents 
 
 WORKS ON SHORTHAND. 
 IN ORDINARY TYPE. 
 
 The Shorthand Writer. A complete Guide to Commer- 
 cial, Professional, and other uses of Shorthand. By Thomas 
 Allen Heed. This volume contains Mr. Reed's accumulated experi- 
 ence of half-a-century's study and practice of the Art of Snort- 
 band, as a reporter, professional shorthand writer, teacher, lecturer. 
 and examiner. In ibis work Mr. Reed sums up the experiences of 
 a lifetime, which are of inestimable value to writers of ail Bystems. 
 240 pages Cloth, gilt, price, $1 00 
 
 History of Shorthand. By Isaac Pitman, third edition. 
 228 pages Price, 75 cents ; cloth, $1.00 
 
 f A Biography of Isaac Pitman. By Thomas Allen Heed. 
 Illustrated with woodcuts and lac-simile pages, in handsome cloth 
 binding, on specially made thick paper, cr. 8vo. cloth, price $1 00 
 
 The Newspaper World. Essays on Press History, Past 
 and Present. By Alfred Baker Price, 35 cents : cloth, 50 cents 
 
 Reporting Hints and Practice. Designed for student- 
 reporters and Others qualifying for newspaper work. By A. 
 Baker, Member Institute of Journalists Cloth, price, 35 ecu is 
 
 fPitman's Shorthand and Typewriting Year Book and 
 Diary. Ready Dec. 1st. Strongly bound in boards. 
 Price, 35 cents ; post paid, (Scents; cloth, interleaved with 
 
 blotting, 60 cents ; post-paid. 70 cents 
 
 A Chapter in the Early History of Phonography. By 
 Thomas Allen Rued. With a Preface by Isaac Pitman. 
 
 Cloth, price, 3."> I
 
 14 
 
 fThe Bibliography of Shorthand. By Dr. Westby-Gib- 
 
 son, Past-president of the Shorthand Society. Comprising a list of 
 all known printed Works and Manuscripts on Stenography and 
 Phonography, by English, Colonial and American authors (includ- 
 ing periodicals, works in character, and the best magazine articles), 
 with Introduction. 256 pages, double columns, demy 8vo. 
 
 Cloth, price, $2.00 
 
 WORKS, ETC., FOR TEACHERS OF 
 PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 All Teachers of Isaac Pitman's Phonography are requested to send 
 their address for registration to Isaac Pitman & Sons, 33 Union Square. 
 New York. Special certificates for teachers. Particulars on applica- 
 tion. 
 
 (Handbook for Shorthand Teachers. Containing In- 
 structions to Teachers, Lessons on the Text-books, etc. 
 
 Price, GO cents ; cloth, 75 cents 
 " Goes very fully into the method of teaching, and gives an 
 array of hints which should enable a teacher to manage his class 
 with ease, and to the benefit of the student." 
 
 —National Stenographer. 
 Chart of the Phonetic Alphabet, containing the Short- 
 hand and Printing letters, 20 x 30 ins Price, 5 cents 
 
 f Charts on the " Phonographic Teacher." A series of 12 
 large Charts 35 by S3 inches), illustrating the principles of Phono- 
 graphy as developed in the "Teacher. Ready for hanging on 
 wall, $2.00 the complete set ; or mounted on stout cardboard, 2 on 
 
 a board Price, $2.50 
 
 Tracts (in common spelling), explanatory and recom- 
 mendatory of the principles and practice of Phonetic Shorthand. 
 
 Free. 
 
 A Persuasive to the Study and Practice of Phonography. 
 
 10 pages, royal 32mo, in attractive tinted cover, and space being 
 
 reserved for Teachers' terms. By a judicious distribution of this 
 
 pamphlet, pupils can be secured, and publications sold. 
 
 Price, 25 cents per 1(>0 ; $i.00 per 1000 
 
 WORKS ON TYPEWRITING. 
 
 ■|A Manual of the Typewriter. A Practical Guide to 
 Commercial, Literary, Legal, Dramatic, and all classes of type- 
 writing work. Cloth, 96 pp., and 84 plates Price, $i.iio 
 
 A Manual of the Remington Typewriter. By John Har- 
 rison, With Exercises and Illustrations, New and revised edition. 
 Adopted by the Marshalltown (Iowa), and other High Schools. 
 
 186 pp., fcp. Bvo Price. 85 cents ; cloth, 60 cents 
 
 " No learner should be without it." .v. F. Evening Telegram. 
 
 Instructions on the Remington Standard Typewriter. 
 By A. I-:. Morton. Illustrated. 88 pp., 8vo 80 cents 
 
 Instructions on the Caligraph Typewriter. Invaluable 
 to every user of a Caligraph, or to those who wish to know all 
 abont the machine, 88 pages Price, SO cents
 
 15 
 
 Instructions on the Bar-Lock Typewriter. The best 
 
 work mi (his machine published, Concise, clear and practical. 
 
 :>•„' pages Price, 20 cents 
 
 Instructions on the Yost Typewriter. Contains full 
 
 directions for working the i ost. 32 pages Price, 20 cents 
 
 Typewriting and Typewriters; And How to Choose a 
 
 Machine. Numerous illustrations. By A. E.Morton. 
 
 Price, •'!.") cents 
 
 EDUCATION AND OTHER WORKS. 
 
 f Pitman's Pocket Dictionary of the English Language. 
 An invaluable companion to everyone who has occasion to talk. 
 read or write, and especially valuable to every Student and Btenog 
 rapher. It is complete, practical, accurate and convenient. Shows 
 all irregular participial endings of verbs, irregular plural forms of 
 nouns etc. 8H2 pp., size only ' X :! \ ."> inches. Weight '■'>' ounces. 
 Primed on opaque paper of superior quality, and elegantly bound 
 
 in lea! her. with L'ilt edges I 'rice. "0 cents 
 
 "Your -Tocket Dictionary' is an exceedingly handy and useful 
 
 little work, and should lie in the vest | ket ol everybody." -W. L. 
 
 Mason, Prin. Metropolitan School of Isaac Pitman Shorthand, 95 
 Fifth Avenue, New York. 
 
 A Complete Guide to the Improvement of the Memory; 
 or, The Science of Memory Simplified, with. Applications to Lan- 
 guages, History, Geography, Prose, Poetry,etc. By the Rev. J. II. 
 Bacon, 136 pp., fcp. 8vo . Price, paper, 85 cents ; cloth, SO cents 
 
 A Guide to English Composition. With Progressive 
 Exercises. By the Rev. J, ll. Bacon, author of " A Complete Guide 
 
 to lie improvement of the .Memory." etc. 11'.' paires. 
 
 Price, 85 cent-; cloth, gilt, 50 cents 
 Papers on Penmanship. By F. C. Cleaver ..Price, 10 cents 
 Book-keeping. A Learner's Guide to its Theory and 
 Practice. By David Tolmie, l. S. Sc. 
 
 Price, 3.") cents ; cloth, 50 cents 
 
 PHONETIC BOOKS. 
 
 The New Testament of our Lord and Saviour Jesus 
 
 Christ. Crown 8V0, lar^e type Trice, cloth, $1.0(1 
 
 Sheet Lessons (ll!) for use in classes, for teaching 1 phonetic 
 
 reading Price, 85 cents 
 
 Tablets; or. The Letters of the Phonetic Alphabet, printed 
 on stiff cardboard, to be used in teaching the Alphabet, and ex- 
 plaining it at lectures Trice. 15 cents 
 
 First Book in Phonetic Reading. With " Directions to 
 
 Teachers " how to use it. Printed in large type Price, Scents 
 
 Second Book in Phonetic Reading. Large type and 
 
 illustrated Price, 10 cents 
 
 Third Book in Phonetic Reading Price. 10 cents 
 
 Fourth Book in Phonetic Reading Price, 10 cent- 
 Fifth or Transition Book ... Price, 10 cents
 
 16 
 
 WHY 
 
 THE ISAAC PITMAN PHONOGRAPHY 
 
 HAS REACHED THE FOREMOST RANK. 
 
 BECAUSE it is the ORIGINAL and STANDARD, and for 58 years 
 has been thoroughly tested for rapid writing and reading, and 
 has proved its capacity for every kind of reporting. 
 
 BECAUSE it has been undergoing a process of gradual improve- 
 ment down to the present day, and that system which possesses 
 the greatest facilities for improvements has a very decided advan- 
 tage over those that have not these facilities. Notwithstanding 
 these improvements, uniformity of writing has been preserved, 
 and at the same time, there lias been steady advancement. While 
 it is the oldest system, it is also the newest. 
 
 BECAUSE, "Not to progress, is to retrograde." No one for a 
 moment supposes that shorthand writing is yet perfect, any more 
 than our means of locomotion, of lighting and heating, or any 
 other mechanical or educational works are. Why should the in- 
 vention of any shorthand system be regarded as perfect a.t the Jlrst 
 attempt, any more than that of any other invention f 
 
 BECAUSE thesechanges have not been, as in most other systems, 
 the creation of a single mind, but the united deliberation of an 
 army of expert writers and teachers throughout the world; the 
 result being that the Isaac I'iiinan system has expedients for 
 brevity and legibility that no other Bystem possesses. 
 
 BECAUSE the Isaac Finnan system has more periodical literature 
 and books by one hundred percent, than all other systems com 
 bined. and is the only phonography that supplies sufficient reading 
 mailer to meet the growing requirements of the student ami the 
 professional shorthand writer. The readingof accurate shorthand 
 familiarizes the mind with the "best forms," and is of valuable 
 assistance in acquiring a high rate of speed. 
 
 BECAUSE, owing to the immense foil owing of this system, new and 
 improvt a editions of the text honks are issued from time to time, 
 
 whereas in other systems such a course is impossible owing to 
 their limited sale. 
 
 \ n\ one wishing to pee the statements here made more fully illus- 
 I rated are referred to a 82-page booklet entitled 
 
 "WHICH SYSTEM OF SHORTHAND SHOULD WE LEARN?" 
 ByE. Barker. Gratis and post-paid. 
 
 The Journal of Education (Boston), speaking of this brochure, says ■ 
 "Contains a remarkably clear statement of the principles of the different 
 systems, is carefully written and based upon clear reasoning. Every 
 
 one should see n re this es-ay before deciding whieh system to study."
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 OCT 2 61349 
 
 KB 5 1955 
 
 • N 3 1956 
 UAH S m 
 
 NOV 211961 
 SEP 9 1964 
 
 R EC E I 
 
 MAIN LOAN 
 
 AUG ^4 
 
 L 
 
 A.M. 
 
 7|8|9jlO|U|12l 1 
 
 ROM \m w 
 
 !!Ri W ***^^ 
 
 APR 1 7 
 
 
 CD 
 
 S£P« 
 
 
 URL SFP 3 11.^'i. 
 
 6EP24 
 
 REC'D LD-UR 
 
 A 
 
 WAY 2 1 1< 
 
 DES 
 
 964 
 
 P* 
 
 wec 
 
 DCT 9 
 
 <-/ 
 
 0l)E F 2"WkS FROM drtlL R£*. i 
 "'•' KBB10-UR1 
 
 NOV 2 7 1991 
 
 • ••»*»• «W 
 
 
 wf 
 
 [•'..rni L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)44 I 
 
 'JWIVERSJTY ot CAUrO«Ml» 
 
 AT 
 
 - , ANGFJLKS 
 
 . . • i > A DV
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 AA 001 168 635 9